Book

eTeacher ENGLISH
Online Language Academy
English - Level B
Exercise Workbook
eTeacherGROUP
Online Language Academy
w w w . e T e a c h e r G r o u p . c o m
Introduction
Quartet 1
Welcome to Quartet Course Book 1. The Quartet Course Book 1 includes a
variety of reading texts that revolve around the theme of world travel, as well as
reading comprehension activities, guided writing, speaking activities, grammar,
and vocabulary exercises. The book is organized thematically, following the topics
on Quartet Online. The result is a fully integrated language learning course. We
hope that you will enjoy learning with Quartet Course Book 1.
III Quartet 1
Map of Quartet 1
Vocabulary Language
Points
Unit 1 Pages 2-24 Visiting cities Present Simple

Cities: Istanbul, Verbs describing Comparative and
Mexico City, Paris, day-to-day superlative
and San Francisco activities adjectives
Part 1: My Favorite Pages 2-12

City
Part 2: What a Pages 13-24

Wonderful City
Unit 2 Pages 26-51 Verbs describing Present

Another City: actions in the city Progressive
Casablanca Going to the Wh-questions:
movies who/what
Part 1: A Lot is Pages 26-38
Happening!
Part 2: Lets See a Pages 39-51

Movie
Unit 3 Pages 54-73 Food and Wh-questions:

Food in Italy, India, restaurants when, where, why,
Belgium, and China how
Present Simple vs.
Part 1: Asking for Pages 54-63 Present
Information Progressive
Part 2: Always and Pages 64-73

Now
IV Quartet 1
Language in Use Reading Speaking Writing
(Function) Activities Activities
Giving and receiving Two Postcards Talking about your Writing two
compliments from Istanbul favorite city postcards
Making comparisons Giving Writing an
compliments to advertisement
your family and for a tour to your
friends city
Writing a short
note giving
someone a
compliment
Making a weekly
schedule
Giving and accepting Casablanca, a Describing what is Writing a travel

invitations Modern City of happening in a report and diary
Asking questions Romance and hotel Writing an
Culture Solving a mystery invitation to an
Inviting someone event
to different places Writing a
conversation
Asking and Where in the Role-play: Writing an

answering questions World? interviewing a cook interview with a
about his new radio show guest
cookbook Writing about the
Talking about food foods you eat
in your country when you travel
Talking about a Writing a
vacation description of your
Telling a story work
Role-play:
interviewing
someone for a job
V Quartet 1
Vocabulary Language
Points
Unit 4 Pages 76-100 Health Food Modals for ability:

Food, Food, Food can/cant
Modals for
Part 1: We Are What Pages 76-86 permission and
We Eat requests:
can/could
Part 2: What Can You Pages 87-100 Countable and
Count? uncountable
nouns
Unit 5 Pages 102-124 Vacations some, any, much,

Vacation Time many, a lot of/lots
Pages 102-112 of, a little, a few
Part 1: How Much? Future: be going to
How Many? Pages 113-124
Part 2: Were Going to

Visit Mexico
Unit 6 Pages 126-149 Travel and Past Simple

A Vacation in Alaska transportation Past of to be
Past Simple vs.
Part 1: What Did You Pages 126-137 Past Progressive
See in Alaska?
Part 2: Whats the Pages 138-149

Matter?
VI Quartet 1
Permission and Facts about Food Role-play: asking Describing unusual

requests and answering foods from your
Talking about ability questions country
Talking about Writing a letter to
health issues an airline company
Making up your Making a shopping
own radio show list
Wanting or promising Year-Round Skiing Deciding on Writing fortune-

to do something for in Zermatt, solutions to travel telling predictions
someone (will/wont) Switzerland problems Writing a
Making predictions Talking about conversation about
future plans a travel situation
Complaining Visit the Land of Planning a Making an

the Midnight Sun vacation advertisement
Talking about travel Writing a short
pictures story
Talking about a Writing a letter of
vacation complaint
Discussing
complaints
VII Quartet 1
U N I T
1
Cities: Istanbul, Mexico City, Paris,
and San Francisco
U N I T
PART 1: MY FAVORITE CITY
Language Point
Present Simple
Before You Start
Debbie Pedro
Jean Paul Selma
San Francisco, Mexico City,
Paris, France Istanbul, Turkey
U.S.A Mexico
Jean Paul
Paris, France
Jean Paul lives in Paris. Hes a fashion designer. He loves basketball and opera
music.
"I love Paris, I dont want to live anywhere else. I work hard every day. When I
finish my work, I go to cafs, visit museums, and meet my friends. Paris is a great
city!"
Debbie
San Francisco, U.S.A
Debbie lives in San Francisco. She works in a restaurant. She likes sports and
camping. She doesnt like classical music.
"I like San Francisco, but I also like to visit other places."
2 Quartet 1
U N I T
1
Pedro
Mexico City, Mexico
Pedro lives in Mexico City. He studies at the university. He likes his classes but he
doesnt like the tests.
"When I finish university, I want to travel in Europe. Then I want to find a good job in
Mexico City."
Selma
Istanbul, Turkey
Selma lives in Istanbul. She works at the Topkapi museum. She loves to swim.
"I love the sea in Istanbul. I usually swim every day before work. I get up very early
and go to the beach."
A Are these sentences true or false?
f
1. ______ Jean Paul works in a restaurant.
2. ______ Selma often swims in the sea.
3. ______ Debbie loves classical music.
4. ______ Pedro doesnt like tests.
5. ______ Jean Paul works very hard.
6. ______ Selma lives in Istanbul.
B Complete the following sentences. Make them true for you.
Sao Paulo
1. I live in ______________.
2. I work/study __________________.
3. I like ________________________.
4. I dont like ____________________.
5. Every day I ___________________.
6. I often _______________________.
3 Quartet 1
U N I T
Some Grammar
Present Simple
I, You, We, They study classical music.

like
He, She, It, Jean Paul likes milk.
Spelling
We usually add s to the 3rd person (he, she, it) singular.

We add es:
a. for verbs ending in s, ss, sh, ch, x, and o.
mix-mixes wish-wishes
b. For verbs ending in consonant + y, we also change the y to i.
try-tries hurry-hurries
Do I, you, we, they study music?
Does he, she, it, Selma drink milk every day?
I, You, We, They dont /do not live in Paris.
He, She, It doesnt /does not eat meat.
4 Quartet 1
U N I T
1
We use the Present Simple to talk about actions that happen regulary.
Example: Jean Paul always works hard.
We use the Present Simple to talk about things that are true all the time.
Example: Forty-five million tourists travel to France every year.
We use the Present Simple to talk about feelings and thoughts.

Example: Jean Paul loves coffee.
With the Present Simple we can use frequency words, such as always,
frequently, never, often, sometimes, and usually.
Some Practice
A Match the questions in A to the answers in B.
A B
1. e
____ Does Selma speak a. No, she buys most of them
Turkish? in San Francisco.
2. ____ Do you know the name of b. Yes, I do. I love French

that building? bread.
3. ____ Does Pedro come from San c. Yes, I do. I think Chinese
Francisco? food is great.
4. ____ Do you eat Chinese food? d. No, he doesnt. He comes

from Mexico City.
5. ____ Do you like French bread? e. Yes, she does. Shes from
Istanbul.
6. ____ Does Debbie buy her f. Yes, its the Blue Mosque.
clothes in Paris?
5 Quartet 1
U N I T
B Complete these sentences with the correct form of the verbs in

the box.
cost go speak work

eat love study
finish open travel
opens
1. The City Museum _________________ at 10:00 every
morning.
2. Food in Paris is very expensive. It ______________ a lot of money.
3. We usually __________________ Turkish food when we visit Istanbul.
4. I ___________________ French movies. Theyre usually very interesting.
5. Shes very clever. She ________________ Spanish, English, and French.
6. Michael is an architect. He __________________ very hard.
He___________ to work at 6:00 in the morning and ______________ work
at 8:00 at night.
7. Tourists _________________ to Mexico by plane, train, or car.
8. Pedro __________________ for at least three hours every evening. His
courses are very difficult.
C Describe the things that you do on a vacation.

Examples: I usually meet new people.
I often go to the beach in the afternoon.
I always eat in seafood restaurants.
always usually often sometimes never

eat at restaurants
buy clothes
go to the beach
meet new people
visit the city
go to sleep early
6 Quartet 1
U N I T
D Compare your answers with your partners answer and prepare a

list of sentences that are true for both of you.
E Read Jean Pauls weekly schedule.
F Are these sentences true or false?
t
1. _______ Jean Paul always arrives at work at 8:00 am.
2. _______ Jean Paul works until 6:00 pm every day.
3. _______ Jean Paul plays basketball on Wednesday.
4. _______ Jean Paul sometimes eats lunch at the Caf Paris.
5. _______ Jean Paul never goes to the health club.
7 Quartet 1
U N I T
G Complete your own weekly schedule. Then tell your partner

what you sometimes / usually / often / always do.
Example: I usually eat lunch at 1:00 in the afternoon.
Hours Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday
8:00 am
9:00 am
10:00 am
11:00 am
12:00 pm
1:00 pm
2:00 pm
3:00 pm
4:00 pm
5:00 pm
6:00 pm
7:00 pm
8:00 pm
8 Quartet 1
U N I T
Something to Read
What can you see in Istanbul?
carpet(s) explain practice

difference favorite speak
expensive museum(s) special
Two Postcards from Istanbul
9 Quartet 1
U N I T
Some Practice

t
1. ________ Graciella and Henry have two friends in Istanbul.
2. ________ Graciella and Henry sell carpets at the market.
3. ________ There is a museum just for carpets.
4. ________ Graciella and Henry want to buy a carpet.
5. ________ Muhamut speaks five languages.
B Complete the sentences with words from the box.
carpets expensive special

difference museum
museum
1. The history _________________ opens at 8:00 am.
2. There are beautiful _____________________ in Istanbul. Let's get one for

the living room floor.
3. These jackets are too ______________________. I don't have enough

money to buy one.
4. I want to buy a __________________ present for my father in Istanbul.
5. There is a big _______________ between the carpets at the market.
10 Quartet 1
U N I T
C Put the words in the correct order.

Example:
often / we / to my parents' house / go / on Sunday
We often go to my parents' house on Sunday.
1. tourists / Many / visit / market / the

2. Istanbul / always / museums / visit / in / We
3. Nico / many / speaks / languages
4. or / People / to / Turkey / travel / boat / by / plane
5. like / They / buy / to / carpets / expensive
What Do You Think?
A Check () the statements that are true.
1. _________ Graciella and Henry never visit museums.
2. _________ Graciella and Henry like to learn about carpets.
3. _________ Graciella and Henry dont like to meet new people.
4. _________ Graciella and Henry like markets.
B Talk to your partner about your favorite city. Tell him/her about
three things to see and do in that city.
11 Quartet 1
U N I T
C Graciella and Henry want to go to the museum. Look at the sign

and answer the questions.
1. Its 12:00 in the afternoon. Can Graciella and Henry go to the museum?
2. Graciella and Henry are both 28 years old. They each have to pay
________.
3. Graciella and Henry want to go to the museum with a group of 20 pupils.
The group has to pay ________.
On Your Own
A Write a short postcard about Istanbul, Mexico City, Paris, or San

Francisco. Use the example in Something to Read to help you.
B Write a short postcard to a friend about your city/town.
12 Quartet 1
U N I T
PART 2: WHAT A WONDERFUL CITY!

Language Point
Comparative and Superlative Adjectives
Before You Start
Fast Food Around the World

Chez San Francisco Mexican Fast
Rochelle Burger Food
Prices $12 $9 $6
(one average meal)
Service 3 minutes 7 minutes 3 minutes
Size of 2 big rooms 1 small room 2 big rooms

restaurant and a garden
Are these sentences true or false?
f
1. _______ San Francisco Burger is as expensive as Chez Rochelle.
2. _______ The service in Chez Rochelle is the fastest.
3. _______ Chez Rochelle is as big as Mexican Fast Food.
4. _______ Mexican Fast Food is more expensive than Chez Rochelle.
5. _______ The service in Chez Rochelle is as fast as the service in Mexican
Fast Food.
13 Quartet 1
U N I T
Some Grammar
Comparative Adjectives
as adjective as The weather in Paris is as nice as in San Francisco.

adjective -er than Mexico City is older than San Francisco.
more/less adjective than Cafs in Paris are more expensive than in Istanbul.
Superlative Adjectives
adjective + est The cheapest way to travel in Paris is

the Metro.
adjective + most/least + adjective The Eiffel Tower is the most
interesting building in Paris.
Irregular adjectives: good, better, best The Lonely Traveler is a

good hotel.
bad, worse, worst This is the worst restaurant in
the city. The food is terrible.
We sometimes use adjectives to compare two things.
When two things are the same, we use as + adjective + as.
Example: She is as tall as Tony.
When two things are different, we use adjective + -er than or,
more/less + adjective + than.
Example: Terry is taller than Sid.
If the adjective is long, we use more + adjective + than.
Example: This book is more interesting than that book.
When we want to compare one item with the rest of a group,
we use the + adjective + est with adjectives of one syllable or with
adjectives of two syllables ending in y (change y to i).
Example: Tara is the tallest girl in our class. She is also the nicest girl in
our class.
We usually use the most / the least + adjective with adjectives of two or
more syllables.
Example: This is the most beautiful city in the world.
14 Quartet 1
U N I T
Some Practice
A Look at these charts from the Internet. Complete the sentences
with the words in the box. Words can be used more than once.
bigger smaller largest

biggest smallest
http://www.qgroupplc.com/place/
Country Square mi Square km Population City Population

France 211,209 547,030 58, 978,172 Mexico City 8,235,744
India 1,269,346 3,287,590 1,000,848,550 Istanbul 8,203,329
Mexico 761,606 1,972,550 100,294,036 San Francisco 735,315
United States 3,717,812 9,629,091 270,299,000 Paris 2,078,950
Turkey 301,384 780,580 65,599,206 Madrid 2,947,228
Buenos Aires 2, 965403
bigger
1. The United States is____________than India.
2. France is ___________________ than Mexico.
3. Turkey is ___________________ than France.
4. France is the ________________ country of all five countries in the chart.
5. The United States is the ______________ country of all five countries in the
chart.
6. San Francisco has a ________________ population than Istanbul.
7. Mexico City has the ________________ population.
8. San Francisco has the _________________population.
15 Quartet 1
U N I T
B What other comparisons can you make about the charts in A?
C Look at the weather chart from the Internet. Complete the

sentences with the words in the box.
coldest colder warmer warmest
http://www.qgroupplc.com/weather
Average Daily Temperatures in Tourist Cities

Fahrenheit
Location January April July October
Acapulco, 87 87 90 89
Mexico
Mexico City, 66 77 73 70
Mexico
Paris, 42 60 76 59
France
Istanbul, 48 58 78 66
Turkey
San Francisco, 48.5 62.2 89.7 50
California
warmest month of the year in Acapulco.

1. July is the ________
2. The ________ month in Mexico City is January.
3. In Istanbul, April is a ________ month than January.
4. In January, its ____________ in Paris than in San Francisco.
5. What city has the highest temperature?
6. What city has the coldest temperature?
16 Quartet 1
U N I T
D Look at the information in the chart in exercise C and answer the

questions.
1. Where would you like to travel? Why?
2. What time of the year would you like to travel?
E Compare the three tours below. Look at the price, weather,

and food.
Example: San Francisco is the cheapest tour.
17 Quartet 1
U N I T
F Read the statements. Place a check () under agree, disagree,

or I dont know. Then compare your chart with your partners
chart.
agree disagree I dont
know
French food tastes better than American food.

The Louvre is the most famous museum in
Paris.
Mexico City is hotter than Paris.
Designers from Paris always design the most
beautiful clothes.
Coffee in Paris tastes better than anywhere else
in the world.
San Francisco has the biggest Chinatown in the
United States.
Paris is one of the most famous cities in the
world.
Mexico City is the oldest city in the world.
G Write an advertisement for a tour to your city/town.
18 Quartet 1
U N I T
Language in Use
Pedro: Lucinda, Im so happy that were here in Paris! What a wonderful

hotel! It's so much better than our last hotel. It's bigger and cleaner
and the service is wonderful.
Lucinda: Well, it's one of the nicest hotels in Paris.
Pedro: By the way, that's a beautiful dress. Is it new?
Lucinda: Yes, its from the hotel shop. They have the most beautiful clothing.
Paris has the best clothing in the world.
A Underline the sentences in the conversation that show that you

like something or someone.
B Are these sentences true or false?
1. t
_______ Pedro and Lucinda like the new hotel.
2. _______ Pedro likes Lucindas new dress.
3. _______ There are no shops in the hotel.
4. _______ The hotel is big and clean.
Language Function
When we compliment people, we tell them that we like something that they do
or have. We also use superlative adjectives to say how wonderful
something/someone is.
19 Quartet 1
U N I T
Some Practice
A Which sentences are not compliments?
Dear Debbie,
1. You are a great travel agent!

2. You give wonderful travel advice.
3. The hotel is near the opera house, and its perfect.
4. You have good taste.
5. You are also a good friend.
6. There's a clothing store in the hotel.
7. I want to buy everything.
8. I love Paris.
Love, Lucinda
B Decide if the sentences below are compliments or not. Copy them

into the table.
1. It looks great on you.
2. They are very friendly.
3. The hotel restaurant is excellent.
4. The music is wonderful.
5. I think this hotel is OK, but I like bigger hotels.
6. The Louvre is OK, but I prefer art galleries.
7. Yes, it's a great museum.
8. It's the finest hotel in Paris.
Compliments Not compliments
It looks great on you.
20 Quartet 1
U N I T
C Complete the conversation using the compliments in exercise B.
1. Lizzy, is that a new dress?

Yes, it is. Its from Paris.
It looks great on you.
_________________________________________________.
2. I just love to visit the Louvre. You always see new things. Dont you agree?
____________________________________________________________.
3. I dont like hotel restaurants very much, but this one is OK.
OK? _________________________________________________.
4. I like Paris, but Im not sure about the people.

Really? ___________________________________________.
5. I love this hotel. Its clean, quiet, and small. What do you think?
__________________________________________________.
6. Sorry, Im busy. I cant go to the opera with you.

Oh, please come! __________________________________________.
D Work with a partner. Give each other compliments Look at the

example.
Example: You are the most wonderful partner in the world.
dress most beautiful most handsome

computer best happiest
dog biggest most intelligent
garden cheapest nicest
house cleanest richest
city most expensive strongest
friendliest tallest
21 Quartet 1
U N I T
Some Fun
A The first person says the name of a city, country, or continent. The next
person has to say a place that begins with the last letter of the first place.
The third person does the same thing.
Example: Paris, Scotland, Denver, Russia, America, Asia.
B Fill in the missing words and then complete the crossword

puzzle.
Across
2. John finished high school. George finished university, so George is more
educated
___________.
5. People who design clothes are ____________
9. In Mexico there are buildings from an early native ____________ .
10. When we say nice things to people, we give them ___________ .
Down
1. The Golden Gate Bridge is in _____________ .
2. Hotel rooms in Paris cost more than in Istanbul. Theyre more _________ .
3. Istanbul is on two ____________ .
4. Paris is in which continent?____________ .
6. Another word for very old is ________________ .
7. The Blue Mosque is a very famous ____________.
8. When you look at the size of each place, you can see that Mexico City is
____________ than Paris.
22 Quartet 1
U N I T
On Your Own
Write a short note to someone you know, complimenting them.

Here are some situations you might use.
Tell a friend that they are a wonderful host.
Tell someone that you love their new house.
Tell a friend that he/she is a great cook.
What Did You Learn?
Facts:
23 Quartet 1
U N I T
Words:
Word Meaning
Language points:
Language point Example
Present Simple: positive
Present Simple: negative
Present Simple: question
Crossword Answers
1 1 3 4
S E D U C A T E D C E
1
A X O U
1 5
N P D E S I G N E R S
1
F E T O
6
R N A I P
7
A S B N N E
8
N I U L C E
9
C I V I L I Z A T I O N
I E L R E T
S D G N S
10
C O M P L I M E N T S
1 1
O R
N R
G
24 Quartet 1
U N I T
2
Another City: Casablanca
U N I T
PART 1: A LOT IS HAPPENING!

Language Point
Present Progressive
Before You Start
Randolf: Welcome to "The Traveling Camera". Im Randolf Thorn. On this show,

we interview tourists all over the world. Today were talking to Carol in
the Casablanca Central Market in Morocco. Carol, what are you doing
in Casablanca?
Carol: Well, Randolf, Im living here this year. Im studying Arabic
at the University and Im learning about Morocco's history and
culture.
Randolf: Carol, can you show us around the market for a while?
Carol: Of course. Look over there. People are selling fresh fish and seafood.
Shopkeepers are selling fruits and colorful flowers.
Randolf: Beautiful. And people are speaking different languages.
Carol: Yes. Some are speaking Arabic, but others are speaking French
or Spanish.
Randolf: Well, Carol, thank you for talking to us. Thats all for today.
Carol: You're welcome, Randolf.

Randolf: This is Randolf Thorn, saying thank you for watching another
episode of "The Traveling Camera!
26 Quartet 1
U N I T
t
1. _______ Carols studying Arabic.
2. _______ Carols selling fish in the market.
3. _______ People are speaking Arabic, French, and Spanish in the market.
4. _______ Randolfs living in Casablanca this year.
5. _______ Carols learning about Morocco.
B Read the statements below and place a check () under the

person or people who are doing each activity.
Activity Randolf Carol The people

in the market
Theyre speaking
different languages.
They're living in Casablanca.
She's studying Arabic.
They're selling fish.
She's talking to Randolf.
They're selling fresh fruit
and flowers.
Hes interviewing Carol.
They're speaking English.
They're in the Central Market.
They're in Morocco.
They're looking at the flower
sellers.
27 Quartet 1
U N I T
Some Grammar
Present Progressive
I am / 'm speaking.
He, She, It, Carol is / 's sleeping.
You, We, They are / re selling fruits.
Short Forms
I am = Im it is = its
he is = hes you are = youre
she is = shes we are = were
they are = theyre
Questions
Am I sitting in your chair?

Is he, she, it, Randolf eating a mango?
Are you, we, they selling fruit?
Negative
I am not / 'm not speaking Arabic.

He, She, It, Carol is not / isnt eating the mango.
You, We, They, Carol are not / aren't selling carpets.
and Randolf
28 Quartet 1
U N I T
2
Short Forms
I am not = Im not It is not = its not / it isnt

He is not = hes not / he isnt You are not = youre not / you arent
She is not = shes not / she isnt We are not = were not / we arent
They are not = theyre not / they arent
We use the Present Progressive to talk about actions that are happening
now, this week, this month, or at the moment.
Example: Sorry, I cant talk now. Im speaking to Randolf.
We use the Present Progressive to talk about temporary situations.

Example: Im living in Casablanca this year.
We use the Present Progressive for descriptions.

Example: The sun is shining today and I'm feeling happy.
Some Practice
A Complete the sentences with the correct form of the Present

Progressive.
is selling (sell) fresh mangoes and bananas. Lets buy
1. The shopkeeper ___________
some.
2. Randolf ______________ (not speak) to Carol in Arabic. He ________
English.
3. I ____________________ (stay) in the Hotel Casablanca. Its the nicest
hotel in the city.
4. My friends _________________ (visit) Africa right now.
5. Kassia ____________________ (read) an interesting book about African
culture.
6. Murray ___________________ (live) in Casablanca but he ________
(not study) Arabic. He doesnt have time.
29 Quartet 1
U N I T
B Change the sentences to match the picture.
Example: The man is eating fruit.

The man is drinking coffee.
1. The man is eating a sandwich.
2. Two women are running together.
3. The man isnt drinking coffee.
4. A woman is cutting fruit.
5. The man is feeding the chicken.
6. Two women arent speaking to each other.
30 Quartet 1
U N I T
C Complete the sentences with the correct form of the Present Progressive.
Use the verbs in the box.
Some Words
begin have rain write
do learn stay
grow look study
Dear Mia,
(1) I 'm writing
____________ to let you know that everything is fine. Gerald and I
(2) ____________ a wonderful time. Casablanca is beautiful. Theres a lot to
see and do. The weather is beautiful, not too hot and not too cold.
We (3) ____________ Arabic. Its not easy for me, but I (4) ____________
the language. I (5) _______________ to understand when people talk to me.
Gerald is better than I am. He can already say a lot of things. We study
Arabic at the same school, but Gerald is in a more advanced class.
We (6) ____________ for a house to rent for a year. We want a house near
the university. The baby is wonderful. She (7) _________________ so fast!
It (8) ____________ really hard now, so (9) I'm_________ at home

(10) and __________my homework.
Please write soon. With love,
Carol
D Mia wrote Carol an answer to her letter in exercise C.

Here are Carols answers to Mias letter. Write the questions.
Example: Yes, I am learning a lot about Moroccan culture.
Are you learning about Moroccan culture?
1. No, the baby isnt talking yet. I hope that her first word is "Mom"!
2. Yes, were enjoying the food. Moroccan food is wonderful.
3. Yes, were looking for a furnished house. We dont want to buy furniture.
4. No, Gerald isnt teaching at the university right now. He might teach a
course in September.
5. Yes, were meeting many new people. The people here are very friendly.
31 Quartet 1
U N I T
E Craig and Detective Habib are talking outside the hotel. Complete
the conversation with the Present Progressive. Use the verbs
below and information from the pictures.
do run watch
fight sleep
Craig: are you doing , detective? (2) _______________________

What ____________
the people in the Red Rock Hotel?
Detective: Yes. The answer to the problem is here. In room 203,
(3) _____________________. In room 202, (4) _________________.
They cant hear anything. Oh no, someone (5) _______________ out
of the hotel.
Craig: Detective, lets get them.
32 Quartet 1
U N I T
F Continue the conversation. Youre the detective. Look at the

other four windows and describe whats happening.
G Solve the mystery

1. Get into groups of four.
2. Look back to the picture of the Red Rock Hotel. Help the detective solve
the problem. Why is someone running out of the hotel?
3. Ask the other groups questions to hear their answer to the mystery.
33 Quartet 1
U N I T
Something to Read
Do you want to visit Casablanca? Read about it.
Some Words
busy delicious national romantic
culture mint outdoor
34 Quartet 1
U N I T
Some Practice
A Answer the questions.

1. Wheres Casablanca?
2. Whats the main language of Morocco?
3. What other languages do people speak in Casablanca?
4. Whats the national drink of Morocco?
B Match the words in A to the definitions in B.
A B
e outdoor
1. __ a. the language, food, and customs of a place
2. __ mint b. a place for ships
3. __ national c. about a country
4. __ busy d. having a feeling of love
5. __ port e. not in a building
6. __ romantic f. very good to eat
7. __ delicious g. a kind of green plant that people use in food
8. __ culture h. having a lot to do
C Fill in the travel report for Casablanca.

Casablanca
Name of the city: ________________________________________________
Country:
Languages:
Food/drink:
Weather:
Things to do:
Other:
35 Quartet 1
U N I T
What Do You Think?
A Are the sentences from the text fact or opinion?
fact opinion
1. Casablanca is the largest city in Morocco.
2. Most people like to eat in outdoor restaurants.
3. The language of Morocco is Arabic.
4. At night, Casablanca is a romantic city.
5. Mint tea is the Moroccan national drink.
6. There are wonderful restaurants with delicious food.
7. Its a city of sunshine and wonderful weather.
B Answer the questions about Casablanca, A Modern City of

Romance and Culture.
1. What kind of text is this?
2. Where can you see this kind of text?
3. Does the writer like Casablanca? Which words tell you how he feels?
4. What types of things can a traveler do in Casablanca?
5. Do you want to visit Casablanca? Why or why not?
36 Quartet 1
U N I T
C Read the entertainment schedule and complete the chart.
where what time price

(per person)
Hank wants to hear
a live band. Hotel Casablanca
Hank wants to eat
lobster with eight
other people.
Hank wants to
dance at a nightclub.
37 Quartet 1
U N I T
On Your Own
A Write a travel report for your own city/town.
Name of the city:
Country:
Languages:
Food / Drink:
Weather:
Things to do:
Other:
B Using your travel report as a guide, write a short travel diary to

your own city or town. Imagine that you are a tourist there for
the first time. Whats special about your city/town? What is there
to do in your city/town?
38 Quartet 1
U N I T
PART 2: LETS SEE A MOVIE

Language Point
Wh- questions: who and what
Before You Start
Malia: What are you doing now?

Farnell: Nothing special. Why?
Malia: Im going to see a movie at the Art Center. Do you want to go
with me?
Farnell: Whats on?
Malia: Its an old movie called Casablanca.
Farnell: What time does it start?
Malia: It starts at 7:00 pm.
Farnell: Who are the actors in the movie?
Malia: Oh, theyre famous actors: Humphrey Bogart and Ingrid Bergman.
Farnell: Oh yes, I remember. Its a classic. I really want to see it.
Malia: Good! Lets meet at 7:00 pm at the Art Center.
39 Quartet 1
U N I T
A Fill in the missing information.

t
1. _______ Malia wants Farnell to see a movie with her.
2. _______ Casablanca is playing at the Dance Center.
3. _______ The movie starts at 7:00 pm.
4. _______ The actors in Casablanca are Humphrey Bogart and Ingrid
Bergman.
5. _______ Casablanca is a new movie.
40 Quartet 1
U N I T
Some Grammar
Wh- Questions: Who/What
To be
Who am I?
Who is Ingrid Bergman?
What is Casablanca?
Who are the actors?
What are their names?
Present Simple
Who/ What do I, you, we, they, like?
Malia and Farnell
Who/ What does she, he, it like?
Who/What runs quickly?
Present Progressive
Who am I seeing?
What am I reading?
Who is he, she, it, Malia watching?
What is he, she, it, Malia doing?
Who are you, we, they, meeting?
Malia and Farnell
What are you, we, they, doing?
Malia and Farnell
Who/What is running away?
Questions with who ask about people.

Example: Whos Humphrey Bogart?
Who watches movies?
Questions with what ask about things.

Example: Whats Casablanca?
Whats on at the Art Center?
41 Quartet 1
U N I T
Some Practice
A Complete the questions below with who or what.
What is Casablanca? It's a city in Morocco.

1. _______
2. _______ is on at the Art Center? The movie Casablanca.
3. _______ are the famous actors in the movie Casablanca? Humphrey Bogart
and Ingrid Bergman.
4. _______ is a classic movie? It's an old movie.
5. _______ is the largest city in Morocco? Casablanca.
6. _______ language do people speak in Casablanca? They speak Arabic.
7. _______ is the national drink of Morocco? Mint tea.
B Use Who and What to complete the conversation.
Cassandra: What
__________ are you doing now?
Daniella: Serge is visiting me.
Cassandra: _________ is Serge?
Daniella: He's a friend from Morocco.
Cassandra: ______ does he like to do?
Daniella: He likes old movies. We're watching a movie now.
Cassandra: _______ are you watching?
Daniella: Casablanca.
Cassandra: ________ are the actors in that movie?
Daniella: You remember, Humphrey Bogart and Ingrid Bergman.
Cassandra: Of course, ________can forget Bogart and Bergman?
42 Quartet 1
U N I T
C Read the interview and fill in the questions.

Serge Sanford is a movie critic. What does he think of the movie Casablanca?
what do you think of Casablanca

Interviewer: Serge, _____________________________?
Serge: I think it is one of the greatest movies of all time.
Interviewer: I agree. ____________________________________________?
Serge: The best actress in the movie is Ingrid Bergman in the role of Ilsa.
Humphrey Bogart is good, but he isnt as good as Bergman.
Interviewer: ___________________________________________________?
Serge: The movie is about love in the time of war. Bergman and Bogart
are a couple who fall in love, lose each other, find each other
again, and then almost lose each other again. Its a very romantic
movie.
Interviewer: Serge, in your opinion, ________________________________?
Serge: The last scene. Its the best part of the movie.
D Ask your partner questions. Use the statements below to

help you.
1. You want to know what he/she is reading at the moment.
2. You want to know who he/she eats lunch with.
3. You want to know what types of movies he/she likes.
4. You want to know who his/her best friend is.
5. You want to know what he/she likes to do.
43 Quartet 1
U N I T
Language In Use
(the telephone rings)
Mona: Hello?
Lucas: Hi, its Lucas. How are you?
Mona: Fine, thanks, Lucas. How are you?
Lucas: Im fine too. Its my birthday on Wednesday. Would you like to come
to my party on Wednesday night?
Mona: Id love to, Lucas. Thank you for inviting me. Wheres the party?
Lucas: Its at my house, 26 Parsons Street. The party starts at 9:00 pm.
Im happy that you can come, Cassandra.
Mona: Cassandra? This is Mona. Theres no Cassandra here.
Lucas: Oh. I must have the wrong number.
Mona: I think you do. Well, Lucas, see you at the party on Wednesday!
Lucas: Ohyes see you there.
44 Quartet 1
U N I T
True False I dont

know
1. Lucas has a party every year.
2. Lucas wants Mona to come to his party.
3. Lucas has the wrong number.
4. Cassandra and Lucas are friends.
5. Mona wants to go to Lucass party.
6. Lucass party starts at 8:00 pm.
Language Function
When we invite people, we ask them to visit or join us in doing something.
We use: Would you like to go with me to ?

Do you want to go to with me?
Would you like to come to
Answer: Thank you for the invitation.

Of course.
Yes, thanks.
No thank you.
45 Quartet 1
U N I T
Some Practice
A Complete the conversation.
Malia: Would you like to go out for dinner after the movie?
______________
Farnell: No, thanks. Im having dinner at Lisa's house. _____________
____________ to join us?
Malia: Yes. Thank you.____________ to bring anything?
Farnell: No, we have enough food.
B Check () the sentences that are invitations.
1.
________
Im cooking dinner now. Do you want to eat with me?
2. ________
Lucas has a birthday party every year.
3. ________
Would you like to have dinner with me tonight?
4. ________
Theres a delicious Middle Eastern restaurant nearby. You
should try it sometime.
5. ________ Do you want to see Casablanca with me? Its playing at the
Art Center.
6. ________ Is there a good nightclub around here?
C Look at the pictures and invite your partner to these places.

Your partner must accept or refuse each invitation politely.
restaurant concert party movies
46 Quartet 1
U N I T
D Read the invitations and answer the questions.
47 Quartet 1
U N I T
1. Where are Malia and Farnell getting married?

2. Why is the Gallery Morocco having a special party?
3. What food can you get at the Gallery opening?
4. Why is Lucas having a party on Wednesday?
5. It's 8:00 pm on March 15. What event is happening?
E Write an invitation to an event. Use the invitations in exercise D

as examples.
Here are some suggestions:
A 50th wedding anniversary
A graduation ceremony/party
A dance
A reunion
48 Quartet 1
U N I T
Some Fun
A Play a trivia game

1. Form two teams.
2. With your team, prepare a list of questions and answers.
3. Ask the other team a question. If the other team knows the answer, it gets
a point. If it doesnt know the answer, your team gets the point.
Some examples of questions to use:
Who is the president of (country)?
Who is Kevin Costner (or another famous person)?
Who is the author of War and Peace (or another famous book)?
What is the capital of France?
B Fill in the missing words and then complete the crossword

puzzle. 1
4 5
8
R R R
9
10
O U T D
Across
3 We had a r____ vacation in Paris.
4 I learned to drink tea with m___ when I was in Morocco.
6 The food here is d____. I love it!
8 I bought this carpet at the m_____ in Casablanca.
9 You can buy f___ fish and vegetables in the market.
10 It's a beautiful day. Let's eat at an o___ restaurant.
Down
1 A p____ is a place for ships.
2 I sent you an i____ to my birthday party.
5 Carol is learning about Morocco's history and c___ .
7 Sorry, but I'm too b__ to go with you to the movies tonight.
49 Quartet 1
U N I T
On Your Own
Write a short conversation inviting someone to the movies, a

party, or a restaurant. Write five sentences. Use the conversation
in Something To Read as an example.
What Did You Learn?
Facts:
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
50 Quartet 1
U N I T
Words:
Word Meaning
Language points:
Present Progressive: positive
Present Progressive: negative
Present Progressive: question
Wh- questions: who
Wh- questions: what
Crossword Answers
1
P
2
O I
3
R O M A N T I C
4 5
M I N T V C
6
D E L I C I O U S
T L
7
A T B
8
M A R K
R E
R T U U
9
I F R E S H
10
O U T D O O R E Y
N
51 Quartet 1
U N I T
3
Food in Italy, India, Belgium, and
China
U N I T
PART 1: ASKING FOR INFORMATION
Language Point
Wh- questions: when, where, why, how
Before You Start

Hans and Olga live in Berlin and own a German restaurant. They want to go to
the Far East this summer, so they got some brochures from their travel agent.
54 Quartet 1
U N I T
1. Which country are they interested in visiting?

2. Where can they stay?
3. When are they interested in going to the Far East?
4. What can they learn on their visit?
B Below is a page from the Chinese Tourism News. Look at the

brochures on page 54. Which of these announcements talk about
the information in the brochures?
55 Quartet 1
U N I T
Some Grammar
Wh- Questions:
Where is the restaurant?

Why are they in China?
Why isn't Jorge using chopsticks?
When are they leaving for China?
How do we get to the course?
Where do you get a newspaper?
Questions with where ask about place.

Example: Where can we get good Indian food?
Questions with when ask about time.

Example: When are they going to eat dinner?
Questions with why ask about reasons.

Example: Why do people eat so much spaghetti in Italy?
Questions with how ask about ways.

Example: How do you use chopsticks?
56 Quartet 1
U N I T
Some Practice
A Match the answers in A to the questions in B.
c Where does Olga work?

1. __ a. They want to study Chinese.
2. __ How does Hans practice his b. They want to go this June.

English?
3. __ Why do Hans and Olga want to go c. She works in a German

to China? restaurant.
4. __ Where do Hans and Olga want to d. They want to visit Shanghai.

visit?
5. __ When do they want to travel? e. He reads the English newspaper.
B Use where, why, and when to complete the radio interview.
Michael: Hi, Tania. Welcome to our special program on travel.

Tania: Thank you.
Michael: Where do you usually travel to?
Tania: Oh, every year I go somewhere else.
Michael: And_______do you travel?
Tania: In June. Only in June.
Michael: ________ only in June?
Tania: Because my friend Pierre can only travel in June and I love traveling
with him.
Michael: So, ___________are you planning to go this year?
Tania: China. It's our dream!
Michael: Well, have a good time.
Tania: Thanks. I'm sure I will.
57 Quartet 1
U N I T
C You work at the radio station and you're talking to Pierre about the
cookbook he's writing. Here are some beginnings of questions to
help you.
What kind of..?

Is there.?
What?
Are there..?
What.?
D Read the story.
Lonny and Liang are friends. Lonny lives in England and Liang lives in China.
Lonny works for a computer company and Liang works in a hotel restaurant.
Lonny likes his job because he can travel. They both love music and food. Every
June they meet and travel together. This year they are going to Italy. Liang wants
to work as a chef in Italy. He wants to become a famous chef.
E Ask some questions about Lonny and Liang. Complete the

questions with when, where, and why.
1. _________ does Liang work?
Where do they meet?

2. _________
3. _________ do they meet only once a year?
4. _________ does Liang live?
5. _________ does Lonny like his job?
6. _________ kind of work does Liang want to do in Italy?
58 Quartet 1
U N I T
F Ask your partner wh- questions to get information.

Write the answers.
1. Where do you live?
2. Whats your favorite food?
3. How do you practice your English?
4. Why do you want to travel?
5. Whats the capital city of Italy?
6. When is the next Olympics?
7. Where are the Alps?
8. Why do people like chocolate?
9. Where is Hong Kong?
G Look at the information about Pierre LaGrande and prepare

questions. For help, look at the conversation in B.
H Imagine you have your own radio talk show. With your
partner, prepare a list of special guests you would like to
invite, and the questions for them. Then prepare an
interview which includes questions and answers.
59 Quartet 1
U N I T
Something to Read
Some Words
atmosphere business area pleasant specialties
reserve a table midnight popular balcony
buffet owner serve
Where in the World?

The food writer, Charles Cookson, recommends these restaurants.
Brussels
HOUSE OF FLANDERS
Dinner for two: $200
A large, pleasant place in the business area of town.This restaurant serves

delicious food. It's very busy at lunchtime so reserve a table.
Specialties: lobster with lemon and butter; oysters in champagne sauce; raspberry
souffle.
Hours: 12:00-3:00 pm, 7:00 pm-1:00 am
Italy
BOCADORA
Dinner for two: $125
This is one of the city's most interesting restaurants. The owners are a mother, daughter,
and son, and they serve wonderful seafood and Italian specialties. This restaurant is very
busy from 6 o'clock in the evening until closing.
Specialties: shrimp and vegetable stir fry; fettuccine with veal; creamed potatoes with fish.
Hours: 5:00 pm to midnight.
60 Quartet 1
U N I T
China
PEARL PALACE RESTAURANT
Dinner for two: $95
This is a wonderful place! It's far away from the noise of the city. The atmosphere and
music make it popular with people of all ages.
Specialties: General Tao's chicken; sweet and sour pork; Chiang Mai noodles.
Hours: All day until the early hours of the morning (summer); winter until midnight.
India
TIKKA
Dinner for two: $25
Try the buffet at Tikka. The food is good and the price is right. People come here to meet
their friends and eat good food. If you come early, you can eat on the balcony.
Specialties: a variety of curries; Bombay duck; great coconut cake.
Hours: 11:00 am to midnight
Some Practice
A Answer the following questions.

1. Where can you eat:
a. coconut cake __________________________
b. Bombay duck __________________________
c. seafood __________________________
2. Which restaurant closes the latest?_____________________________
3. Where in the newspaper can you find "Where in the World"?
a. the sports section
b. the business section
c. the food section
4. Which restaurant changes its hours during the year?
5. Which restaurant is:
a. the cheapest? __________________________
b. the most expensive? __________________________
6. Which restaurant closes for a few hours during the day?________________

7. Which restaurant is out of town? __________________________________
8. How does Charles Cookson know about these restaurants? _____________
_____________________________________________________________
61 Quartet 1
U N I T

True False Does
Not Say
1. Bocadora is run by a mother, daughter,
and son. _____ _____ _____
2. The Pearl Palace is a popular place
for young people only. _____ _____ _____
3. House of Flanders is very busy at lunchtime _____ _____ _____
because it's far away from the noise of the city. _____ _____ _____
4. People always reserve a table at the House
of Flanders. _____ _____ _____
5. At the Tikka you can only eat on the balcony. _____ _____ _____
6. The House of Flanders is for businesspeople
only. _____ _____ _____
7. At a buffet, you can prepare your own food. _____ _____ _____
C Complete the sentences with a suitable word. Use the words

from Something To Read.
PICK OF THE WEEK
La Casetta
Via Lungo Mare 4
Owner: Eva Perruchi
Average price of meal: $20
Here it is the best 1. __________ in Rome. Its behind the business

2. __________ of the city, on a small, quiet street. It has the best 3. __________
perfect for romance. Eva Perruchi 4. __________ the restaurant. Shes from a
small town in Tuscany, and the 5. __________ include many of my favorite
Northern Italian dishes. The waiters are very 6. __________ and helpful. The
restaurant is 7. __________ with businesspeople. They like to go there for a long
lunch.
I really liked their seafood 8. __________. There are more than 30 different
types of dishes and you can eat as much as you want.
The restaurant is open 12 hours a day, from noon until 9. __________.

Remember to 10. __________ at least three days in advance. Oh, I almost
forgot the restaurant closes during the summer. Sorry tourists!!!
62 Quartet 1
U N I T
What Do You Think?
A Ask your partner about typical foods of his/her country.
B Ask your partner questions about his/her favorite food and

restaurant.
On Your Own
A Write a few sentences explaining what type of foods you eat when you
travel and why.
B Your friend is planning a vacation to China and you have many questions
you want to ask him/her. Ask about the following: the flight,
the hotel, the food, the weather, the entertainment, and the people.
Example: Hi, Leah. It's great to see you.

What are you reading?
I'm reading a travel brochure about China.
63 Quartet 1
U N I T
PART 2: ALWAYS AND NOW

Language Point
Present Simple vs. Present Progressive
Before You Start
A Visit to a Chinese Restaurant

Waiter: Good evening. My name is Lee and I'm your waiter.
Louisa: Good evening, Lee.
Waiter: Do you want something to drink while you're
reading the menu?
Louisa: Just water for now, please. I'm waiting for my friends.
Her friends arrive a few minutes later.
Waiter: Are you ready to order now?
Louisa: Yes, were all here. Whats that man doing with the dough?
Waiter: Hes making noodles.
Louisa: Do people always make noodles by hand in China?
Waiter: Well, not really. In factories, they use machines. At home, in small
villages, they always make them by hand like that.
Louisa: What's this restaurants specialty?
Waiter: Noodles, of course!
64 Quartet 1
U N I T
t
1. _________ Louisa is waiting for her friends to join her.
2. _________ Louisa is reading the menu while shes
eating noodles.
3. _________ The man is making noodles in the restaurant.
4. _________ In China, everyone makes noodles by hand.
5. _________ There are noodle factories in China.
6. _________ In small villages, people don't make their own noodles.
Some Grammar
Present Simple vs. Present Progressive

We use a combination of Present Simple and Present Progressive when we want
to contrast things we usually do with things that are happening now.
Present Simple
true all the time
Example: Belgium is a small country.
feelings, thoughts
Example: I like spaghetti.
things we always do
Example: The Chinese usually use chopsticks.
Present Progressive
things happening now
Example: I cant talk right now. Im cooking our dinner.
65 Quartet 1
U N I T
Some Practice
A Complete the telephone conversations using the Present

Progressive or the Present Simple.
1. (eat)
Joe: What are you doing?

Leo: I'm eating.
Joe: What _____ you __________?
Leo: I ____________ curry.
Joe: Do you always __________ Indian food?
Lee: Yes, it's my favorite. I ______ it at least four times a week.
2. (cook)
Rollo: Hello, Ricky. Do you have time to talk?

Ricky: Yes, of course. I ____________, but I can cook and talk at the
same time.
3. (try)
Sara You sound a bit sad. What are you doing?

Carlos: I am sad. I_________to study English and it's very difficult.
Sara: Do you always _________ at 8:00 in the morning?
Carlos: No, sometimes I start at 7:00 am.
4. (drink)
Fred: Whats the matter?

Louis: I feel sick.
Fred: Thats too bad. What are you doing about it?
Louis: I _______________ a lot of tea.
Fred: Thats good. I always ____________ tea when I feel sick.
66 Quartet 1
U N I T
B Match the questions in A to the answers in B.
A B
1. __ Why does Carlota sleep a. Its eating cheese. It loves cheese.

in the middle of the day?
2. __ Whats the cat eating? b. She's reading about China.
3. __ Who is making all that c. Shes always tired after lunch.

noise?
4. __ Whats Jack doing in the d. The neighbor upstairs. Hes

kitchen? playing the drums.
5. __ What's Francine doing? e. Hes making a chocolate cake

for the party tonight.
6. __ Why do you eat curry for f. I don't eat it every day, just four
dinner everyday? times a week.
C Ask your partner a question. Your partner should complete one of the
answers below. Then switch roles. You should give a different answer.
Example: Why are you crying?
I always cry when I see a sad movie.

I'm not crying. I have a cold and my eyes are red.
1. Why are you eating so much chocolate?

a. _____________ when Im nervous.
b. _____________ because I love chocolate.
67 Quartet 1
U N I T
3
2. Where are you going?
a. _____________. I have a dinner date.
b. _____________. I never go out after 10:00 pm.
3. Why are you calling the restaurant?

a. _____________ because my mother works there.
b. _____________. I'm calling my sister.
4. Why are you eating lunch now?

a. ____________ this is breakfast.
b. ____________ because Im hungry.
D Ask your partner about other students in the class. Try to find
one person who does each of the actions below.
QUESTION WHO?
1. Who lives near you?

2. Who speaks two languages?
3. Who likes to cook Indian food?
4. Who likes to travel alone?
5. Who doesn't like dancing?
6. Who uses a computer every
day?
7. Whos taking dancing lessons?
8. Whos buying a house?
9. Whos planning a vacation?
10. Who plays basketball?
11. Who walks to class?
12. Who likes Chinese food?
68 Quartet 1
U N I T
E Report your findings from D to the class.

Example: ___________ is planning a vacation to China.
___________ likes to cook Indian food.
F Tell a story. Choose any three of the pictures, prepare a story,

and tell it to the class.
a bicycle Chinese food a hotel rainy weather
Use sentences like:

Jack likes to go places. He
G You are looking for someone to travel with. Read the information
below, and decide who you want to travel with.
Carolina
Age: 22
Hobbies: plays the guitar
Special information: She's learning salsa dancing.
Paula
Age: 19
Hobbies: tennis
Special information: She's learning how to cook.
Louis
Age: 24
Hobbies: basketball, piano
Special information: Hes studying Chinese.
69 Quartet 1
U N I T
H You want someone to work for you. Your partner wants a job.
Decide what kind of business you have, for example, a store or
an office. Then make up questions and answers.
Example:
Student A: Where do you work now?
Student B: I work at the supermarket.
Student A: What do you do there?
Student B: I clean _______________________________________
Student A: Do you like ___________________________________?
Student B: _____________________________________________
Student A: Where do you _________________________________?
Student B: I live _________________________________________
Student A: What do you want to ____________________________?
Student B: I want to ______________________________________
70 Quartet 1
U N I T
Some Fun
Complete the puzzle. Then look for the hidden word.
1. When you want to eat a meal, you go to a _____________.

2. Chinese people live in _____________.
3. 12 o'clock at night is _____________.
4. Tourists usually sleep in a _____________.
5. Rome is the capital city of _____________.
6. The _____________ of the restaurant are a mother and her daughter.
7. The month before July is _____________.
8. The cook in a restaurant or a hotel is a called a _____________.
9. If you want to eat a special meal at a restaurant, you should try
one of their _____________.
10. A part of a house where people can sit outside is called a _____________.
11. Brussels is the capital of _____________.
Now, use the hidden word and make up as many words as you can.
71 Quartet 1
U N I T
On Your Own
Using the questions in exercise H, write a short description

of your work. If you don't work, write a description of someone else's work.
I'm working at ___________________.

I like/dont like the job.
I live far/close to work.
I ___________________ every day and it's very/not very interesting.
What Did You Learn?
Facts:
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
72 Quartet 1
U N I T
Words:
Word Meaning
Language points:
Wh- questions: when
Wh- questions: where
Wh- questions: how
Wh- questions: why
Wh- questions: what
Present Progressive
Present Simple
Puzzle Answers
1. restaurant 2. China 3. midnight 4. hotel 5. Italy 6. owners 7. June

8. chef 9. specialties 10. balcony 11. Belgium
The hidden word is sightseeing.
73 Quartet 1
U N I T
4
Food, Food, Food
U N I T
PART 1: WE ARE WHAT WE EAT
Language Point
Modals for ability: can/cant
Modals for permission and requests: can/cant/could
Before You Start
Customer: Could you help me please? I have a few questions.

Sales Clerk: Yes?
Customer: Can your vitamins make me look younger?
Sales Clerk: No, they really cant. But water does make your skin look
younger.
Customer: Can too much water hurt me?
Sales Clerk: No, I dont think so. Eat some carrots. Theyre very good for
you too.
Customer: Can carrots make my hands yellow?
Sales Clerk: Only if you eat too many.
Customer: Can honey make me feel better?
Sales Clerk: Yes, if you have a cough. You can put it in your tea instead
of sugar. Excuse me. I have to help some other customers.
Customer: Sorry. Can I have your phone number? I want to ask you a
few more questions.
Sales Clerk: Im afraid you cant. But you can come here and talk to me
any time.
Customer: Thanks. One more question: Can I sit here for a few
minutes?
76 Quartet 1
U N I T
Are these sentences true or false, according to the conversation

on page
t 76?
1. ___ The customer loves to ask questions.
2. ___ Carrots can make your hands yellow.
3. ___ Too much water can make you feel tired.
4. ___ Vitamins can make you look younger.
5. ___ Honey is sweet.
6. ___ The customer can phone the sales clerk and ask questions.
Some Grammar
Modals for ability: can / cant
Modals for permission and requests: can / cant / could
I, You, He, She, We can help us.

They, It cant / cannot / can not
Can / Could you help me?
When can they meet us?
Modals for ability: can / cant
When we describe what we are able or not able to do we use can/cant.

Examples:
I can swim in the open sea. I know how to swim very well.
I cant speak Portuguese. I dont know that language.
Modals for permission and requests: could / can
We use can and could to ask for permission and to make requests.
Could is more polite than can.
When we ask for permission, we ask if we can do something or have
something.
Examples:
Can I use your car, please? Yes you can, but be careful.
Could I use your phone, please? No, its only for the salespeople.
When we make requests, we ask someone to do something for us.
Examples:
Can you please shut the window? Its freezing in here.
Could you please pass me the pepper?
77 Quartet 1
U N I T
Some Practice
A These sentences are from the conversation in Before You Start.
Which are permission or ability?
permission ability
1. Can your vitamins make me look younger?

2. No, they really cant.
3. Can too much water hurt me?
4. Can carrots make my hands yellow?
5. Can honey make me feel better?
6. You can put it in your tea instead of sugar.
7. Can I have your phone number?
8. Could I sit here for a few minutes?
9. Yes, you can.
B Complete the sentences to make an advertisement about

Healthline Vitamins. Use can or cannot, you, and the words
below.
dance e-mail get walk
do feel order work
HEALTHLINE VITAMINS
Can you work all day without feeling tired?

_____________
_____________ for hours without stopping?
_____________ for miles?
If _____________ all these things, you need HealthLife Vitamins! __________

better and younger in just two weeks.
_____________ the vitamins by calling: 555-5555.

Or _____________ us: healthlife@qgroupplc.com.
Special offer this week only: _____________ two bottles of vitamins for just
$120.
78 Quartet 1
U N I T
C Match the questions in A to the answers in B.
A B
1. ___ Could you please tell the sales a. Maybe I can help you. The
clerk to call me? I need to ask her sales clerk is at lunch.
a few questions.
2. ___ Could you please answer some b. Yes, certainly. Make it out
questions about Healthline to Healthline Vitamins.
vitamins? I want to try them.
3. ___ Could you tell me how much one c. Im afraid not. We need
bottle costs? payment with the order.
4. ___ Can I pay with a credit card? d. Certainly. Im here until
6:00 pm.
5. ___ Can I pay you next month? e. Of course. What do you
want to know?
6. ___ Can I write you a check? f. Only $75.
7. ___ Can I call you later? Theres g. No, sorry. We dont take
someone at the door. credit cards.
D Guess the answers. Fill in the missing blanks with can or cant.
1. A cat _______ eat more than five mice per meal.

2. Some worms eat themselves when they _______ find food.
3. "The German Cockroach" _______ live a month without food. It _______
only live for two weeks without water.
4. How do ants find food? When one ant finds food, it leaves a trail behind it
so that others ants _______ find food, too.
5. Bees _______ "talk" to each other. They do a special dance to tell other
bees where the flowers are.
6. A worker bee _______ make only about one teaspoon of honey in her
lifetime.
can 6. can, can 3.

can 5. cant 2.
can 4. can 1.
Answers:
79 Quartet 1
U N I T
E You ask a question. Your partner responds. Use could and can
for permission or requests.
YOU YOUR PARTNER
You want some bread. You are close to the bread.

Could you please pass the bread? Of course.
YOU YOUR PARTNER
1. You need a recipe for honey cake. You have a recipe for honey
cake.
2. Youre in a restaurant and You have a menu.

need the menu.
3. You want to eat the last piece You dont agree.

of cake.
4. You want to ask another question. You dont want to answer it.
5. You are very hungry and want to eat. Youre eating dinner.
6. You need information about the You have information about the
vitamins. vitamins.
7. You want to use the phone. You let him/her use the phone.
8. You want to pay by check. You dont want a check.
80 Quartet 1
U N I T
F Prepare a conversation with your partner about one of the

situations below. Use can and could wherever possible.
Example:
You want to become a vegetarian. You go to a doctor. You want to know what to
eat and what not to eat. You want to know what is healthy.
You: Could you help me, Doctor? I want to become a vegetarian. What can
I eat instead of meat?
Doctor: Well, you can eat tofu. Thats very healthy. You can also eat foods
from milk, like yogurt. Dont forget to eat a lot of fruit and vegetables.
You: Well, I cant become a vegetarian then.
Doctor: Why not?
You: I dont like any of those foods.
1. You love honey and eat it every day. You go to your health food store to
buy more honey. They dont have any.
2. You dont drink very much water every day. You call your friend. He is a
dietician. Ask him for advice.
3. You are very tired all the time. You cannot work. You cannot study.
You speak to your uncle. He is 75 and is never tired. Ask for his help.
81 Quartet 1
U N I T
Something to Read
FACTS ABOUT FOOD

Americans eat more than 600 million pounds (272,730 kilograms) of peanuts
each year. They eat enough peanut butter every year to cover the floor of the
Grand Canyon. But some people have an allergy to peanuts and can die from
eating only one peanut. The allergic reaction can begin immediately after eat-
ing the peanut and they can die if they cannot get help.
Chocolate can be deadly to dogs. About 2 ounces (57 grams) of milk chocolate
can kill a 10-pound (4.5 kilogram) dog. The chocolate is bad for its heart.
Flowers are not just beautiful. You can also eat some of them. Ask an expert
before you put flowers in your salad.
Honey can be used in many ways: as a natural food, a sweetener, and as a
shampoo. A colony of bees can make between 60 to 100 pounds (27 to 45
kilograms) of honey a year.
Corn can grow almost everywhere. It can grow in places as high as 12,000 feet
in the South American Andes Mountains and as low as sea level. You can make
toothpaste, shoe polish, and paint from corn and you can even use it to make
cloth. But most people just eat it.
allergy expert paint sweetener

cloth immediately polish
deadly natural reaction
82 Quartet 1
U N I T
Some Practice
A What is true according to the text? What is not in the text?
True Not in text
1. Sweet corn is Americas favorite food.

2. Honey is better than sugar.
3. It is not good to give a lot of chocolate to your dog.
4. Some people are allergic to chocolate.
5. It is healthy to eat flowers.
6. Corn can grow in many places in the world.
7. Peanuts can kill.
B Match the phrases in A with the phrases in B.
i
1. ___ Professor Rupert is an expert on a. Im using special shoe
honey. polish.
2. ___ Your shoes look so shiny and b. They can kill you.
new.
3. ___ I always shop in a health food c. I only eat natural foods.
store.
4. ___ I cant answer you immediately. d. No, just honey. Its the
only sweetener that I
use.
5. ___ Where are you using that purple e. I want to make a new
paint? dress.
6. ___ Some plants are deadly. f. He was very angry.
7. ___ What was his reaction to the g. On the front door. I am
news? tired of brown.
8. ___ Do you want sugar in your tea? h. I have to help the other
customers first.
9. ___ I need two yards of cloth. i. He knows everything
about the subject.
83 Quartet 1
U N I T
C Fill in the conversation with one of the words in the box.
allergies
deadly
expert
immediately
natural
reaction
sweetener
Doctor: Good afternoon, Mrs. Wills. How can I help you?

Mrs. Wills: reaction to something.
My son Reggie is having a terrible (1) _________
Suddenly he has red spots all over his body.
Doctor: Does he have any (2) _________?
Mrs. Wills: Yes, he cant eat eggs or anything with milk in it. I am very
careful with him and only give him (3) ______ foods. The only
(4) __________ he uses is pure honey. What can we do?
Doctor; Well, Im not an (5) _______ in allergies. Lets see. Does he eat
chocolate?
Mrs. Wills: No, only Sweet and Natural from the health food store.
Doctor: Take him to the hospital (6) ________. Sweet and Natural is
(7) ________. It has milk in it.
D Reggie is allergic to foods with eggs and milk.What foods can

Reggie eat? Work together to find out which of the foods below
have eggs or milk in them.
Allergic Not Allergic
peanut butter
avocado ice cream
yogurt
whipped cream
salad
tuna fish
lemonade
milkshake
cola
hard cheese
omelette
hamburger
milk chocolate
84 Quartet 1
U N I T
E Read the conversation. Complete it by giving your own ideas or

using the ones below. Then read your answers to the class.
Theres enough for everyone in the world.

Use a fan.
Give it to the chickens.
Give them popcorn instead.
Give it to the cows.
Give it away and wait for better times.
Cook it for a long time and put a lot of butter on it.
Radio announcer: Welcome to KORN, the corn growers radio

program. We can solve all your problems. Our first
caller is Mr. Cornway. How can I help you?
Mr. Cornway: My corn is very small this year. What can I do?
Radio announcer: Give it to the chickens

Easy. 1. _____________________. And here is Ms. Cornin
from Minnesota. Yes, and how can we help you today?
Ms. Cornin: There are ants and insects all over my corn. What can I
do?
Radio announcer: 2. _________________. Hello to Mike from Kansas.

Yes?
Mike: My cows dont want to eat corn anymore. What can I do?
Radio announcer: OK. I can help you. 3. _______________. And here is our
last caller. Ms. Porter from Iowa. Yes, Ms. Porter?
Ms. Porter: Hi. I have a serious problem. I cant sell my sweet corn. Its
hard and it doesnt taste nice.
Radio announcer: Well here's my advice to you: 4. ____________________.

Wait, sorry, one last caller little Wendy from Nebraska. Hi
Wendy.
Wendy: Im calling about popcorn. I love it so much. Is there enough

popcorn in the world?
Radio announcer: Wendy, this is a serious problem. But dont worry.

5. ________________________________.
85 Quartet 1
U N I T
What Do You Think?
A Answer these questions. Compare your answers with the rest

of the class.
1. Is it healthier to be a vegetarian?
2. Can we stop food allergies?
3. Can you eat healthier food than you eat now?
4. Can we grow only "natural food?"
B Make up your own radio program. People call you to ask you
to solve their problems. Use the activity in exercise E as your
model.
On Your Own
Do you know about any unusual foods? Do you know any

interesting facts about food from your country? Write a report.
86 Quartet 1
U N I T
PART 2: WHAT CAN YOU COUNT?
Language Point
Countable and Uncountable Nouns
Before You Start
Welcome to Healthy Airlines! We are the only airline that takes care of your
health in the air. Remember that there is no smoking, alcohol, or meat on this
flight. We are now ready to serve you drinks and dinner. Today, we have a
healthy meal of fresh orange juice, a green salad, a baked potato and vegetarian
pasta. Later we will serve fresh fruit. To drink we have a selection of different
kinds of tea, lemonade, and water. Immediately after dinner, you can join us in a
twenty-minute exercise session. If you want to sleep, please ask for a blanket
and a pillow. Healthy Airlines is offering a special low price for international
phone calls, but remember, we want you to rest during the flight. To watch TV,
please use channel 2. Your headphones are in the seat pocket. For more
information, look at the booklet in your seat pocket. Enjoy the flight!
87 Quartet 1
U N I T
A Look at the list. What can you get on the flight with Healthy
Airlines?
Food Yes No
a steak
fish
tea
a fresh glass of fruit juice
a soft drink
a salad
vegetarian pasta
coffee
Services
a pillow
exercise sessions
a massage
Some Grammar
Countable and Uncountable Nouns
Countable Nouns Uncountable Nouns

Singular a fresh salad tea
an orange vegetarian pasta
a glass of fruit juice
the seat pocket the water
the booklet the fruit juice
Plural the drinks
the exercise sessions
international calls
88 Quartet 1
U N I T
4
Countable Nouns
We use a or an with things we can count when there is only one.
We use an before words starting with a vowel.
Examples: a tomato, a car, an orange
We use the when we talk about something specific in the singular or
plural.
Examples: Could I have the blanket that is under your seat?
When talking generally, we dont use anything before a plural countable
noun.
Example: Flights for Paris leave every hour.
Uncountable Nouns
Some nouns have only one form the singular. We cannot count them.
We do not use a or an with things we cannot count.
Examples: water, salt
We use the when we talk about something specific.
Example: The water in this bottle is not cold.
You can use expressions such as a bottle of, a bowl of, a tin of,
a container of, a cup of, a dish of, and a glass of before countable
nouns. You can use these expressions in the plural.
Examples: I want a glass of water.
Do you want a bowl of soup?
May I have two bottles of oil?
Some Practice
A Look at the text in Before You Start again. Underline the things
you can count.
B Countable or Uncountable? Mark the right box for the words in

bold.
Countable Uncountable
1. I love oranges. I eat an orange every day.
2. I never drink coffee.
3. Sweet corn is delicious.
4. People make cloth out of corn.
5. People can use corn oil when they fry food.
6. I cant be a vegetarian. I hate vegetables and fruit.
7. Honey is very good for us.
8. Could you answer this question for me?
9. Dont drink the water.
89 Quartet 1
U N I T
C Below is a list of words from this whole unit. Decide if a word is

a singular countable noun, a plural countable noun, or an
uncountable noun.
Singular Countable Noun Plural Countable Noun Uncountable Noun
vegetable
honey
carrots
sugar
tea
credit card
check
menu
restaurant
meat
chocolate
eggs
sweet corn
milk
questions
sweetener
cloth
turkeys
peanut butter
90 Quartet 1
U N I T
D Youre taking a flight with Healthy Airlines. What do you want

eat and drink on your flight? Compare your answers with your
partners.
What I want on my flight What my partner wants on her/his flight

a steak
wine
E Use the words in the box and complete the conversation.

When necessary add a, an, or the. There is more than one
possible answer for each blank
alcohol fruit pasta water
baked potato lemonade pillow
blanket meat tea
exercise orange juice vegetarian
Air Hostess: Good evening. How can I help you?
Markos: I am very hungry and very thirsty. What can I eat?
Air Hostess: a salad
Your dinner includes 1. __________ , 2. ________, and
3. _____________.
Markos: Cant I have steak?
Air Hostess: No, we only serve healthy food on Healthy Airlines. No
4. _____________.
Markos: I understand. I dont want anything to eat. What can I drink?
Air Hostess: We have 5. ___________, 6. ___________ and 7. ___________.
Markos: No, cola?
Air Hostess: We only serve healthy foods on Healthy Airlines. No cola.
Markos: Can I at least have a cup of coffee and a piece of cake?
Air Hostess: No sir. Only 8. ___________ and 9. __________. We dont serve
anything with sugar on Healthy Airlines.
Markos: This is too healthy for me. Can I have 10. ___________ and
11. ___________? I want to sleep.
Air Hostess: Dont you want to 12. ___________? It will make you feel good.
Markos: No, Im too hungry.
91 Quartet 1
U N I T
F Match a container with each item of food. There is more than

one correct answer.
a bowl a cup a tin a glass a dish
a glass of milk
juice
tomato pure
avocado salad
ice cream
lemonade
iced tea
soup
popcorn
fruit
water
coffee
G Write a list of the items of food in your kitchen. Compare with

your partner.
In my kitchen In my partners kitchen

2 containers of milk
92 Quartet 1
U N I T
H Arrange the recipe below in the right order. Number the

sentences according to the pictures.
Some Words
beat mash recipe
cream peel separate
ingredients portions whip
1
Avocado Ice Cream
Ingredients
2 5 portions
3 avocados
1/2 cup of sugar
3 1 cup (200 grams) of whipping cream
3 eggs
4 ___ Mash the avocado in a blender until its creamy.
___ Peel the avocado.

5
___ Put the mixture in either a big bowl or five little ones and freeze.
6 ___ Whip the cream.
___ Separate the egg whites from the yolks (yellow of the eggs).
7
___ Add the sugar to the whipped cream.
8 ___ Whip the egg whites.
___ Add 1/2 cup of sugar to the egg whites.

9
___ Beat the egg yolks with 3 tablespoons of sugar.
93 Quartet 1
U N I T
I What can you do with these foods? Mark the correct column(s)
with a check (). Compare your lists.
Food peel mash whip

potato
butter
sweet corn
garlic
avocado
mango
orange
strawberry
carrots
cucumbers
tomatoes
cream
eggs
J Paulina and Gilbert are on their way to the supermarket. Put

the dialog in the right order.
1 Paulina:
___ We need to go to the supermarket. There are lots of things we need
to buy.
___ Gilbert: Corn is in season, now. Lets get corn. Thats all, right?
___ Paulina: Dont worry! We can use our credit card.
___ Gilbert: Okay. Ill make a list. We need bread. What about milk?
___ Paulina: We have tomatoes and cucumbers, avocado and lettuce
___ Gilbert: We have some in the refrigerator. We also have one avocado. What
about vegetables?
___ Paulina: Yes, we need milk and, butter, eggs, cottage cheese, yellow cheese
and yogurt.
___ Gilbert: What about fruit? I know we have bananas and oranges, but
what else?
___ Paulina: We need apples. We also need three avocados for the avocado ice
cream. Dont forget the cream.
___ Paulina: What about a few mangoes. I know they are expensive but
___ Gilbert: Dont forget we are short of money.
94 Quartet 1
U N I T
K What do Paulina and Gilbert already have? What do they buy?
they have they buy dont know
avocados
apples
bread
butter
chocolate
coffee
cottage cheese
cream
cucumbers
fish
lettuce
mangoes
meat
milk
pizza
popcorn
L You are going camping. Make up your own shopping list.

Compare it to your partners list.
Example: I have apples on my list.

I dont like apples. Lets get bananas. Theyre on my list for today.
95 Quartet 1
U N I T
What Do You Think?
A Read the poster and answer the questions.
1. What kinds of things do people lose?

2. What can Healthy Airlines do with these things?
3. Why do people bring food on a plane or to an airport?
4. What is the most valuable item on the list?
96 Quartet 1
U N I T
B Write a letter to Healthy Airlines. Give them ideas on

what they can do with the items in the Lost and Found.
Some Fun
A A group survival game
You are on a plane.
It crashes in the middle of the sea.
You swim to a very small island.
Three or four other people also swim to the island.
Now you are on the island. The island is warm and there is water. There are
some plants on the island that you can eat.
There are some boxes from the plane floating in the water. You can save five
things before they get too wet and sink in the deep water. What do you want to
save?
A book called How to Survive on a Desert Island

A bottle of vitamins
A box of matches
A carton of milk
A piece of rope
A pillow
A tent
An umbrella
Ten cans of tuna fish
97 Quartet 1
U N I T
B Crossword puzzle.
Answer the questions and complete the puzzle.
1 2
3 4
1 5
P
10
Across
3. I eat cottage c___ for breakfast.
5. If something is so dangerous that it can cause death, it is d_____ .
6. You make french fries from p_____ .
9. I can't eat peanut butter because I am a__ to peanuts. .
10. Spaghetti, macaroni, and lasagna are types of p____.
Down
1. A vegetarian does not eat m_____ .
2. I'm cold. May I please have a b___?
4. Honey and sugar are used as s____.
7. I take vitamins to keep me h_____.
8. Please bring me a p____ so I can sleep.
98 Quartet 1
U N I T
On Your Own
Look around your house. Make two lists: one of things that are
uncountable nouns and one of things that are countable nouns.
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
What Did You Learn?

Facts:
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
99 Quartet 1
U N I T
Words:
Word Meaning
Language points:
Modals for ability:
can / cant
Modals for
permission and
requests: could /
can / cant
Countable Nouns
Uncountable Nouns
Crossword Answers
1 2
M B
3 4
C H E E S E L
1 5
A W
P D E A D L Y
T E N
E K
6
P O T A T O E S
7
H E T
8
E N P
9
A L L E R G I C
L R L
10
P A S T A S L
H O
Y W
100 Quartet 1
U N I T
5
Vacation Time
U N I T
PART 1: HOW MUCH? HOW MANY?

Language Point
some, any, much, many, a lot of/lots of, a little, a few
Before You Start
Howard howardq@qgroupplc.com
Hi Howard,
I hope everything's OK. Were planning a vacation to the Dead Sea. My
travel agent told me that there are many beautiful hotels and a lot of hot
mud baths there. But we have some other questions:
1) How much money do we need?
2) How much time do we need to stay there?
3) Are there a lot of tourists in the winter?
4) Is there any nightlife?
5) Do I need to bring any special clothing?
Please answer quickly.

Jan
102 Quartet 1
U N I T
Jan Janx@qgroupplc.com
Hi Jan,
Now is the best time to go to the Dead Sea. There aren't many tourists
and it isn't too hot. Some people stay a few days but many people stay
longer and visit some of the sites nearby. There isn't really any nightlife
and you don't need any special clothing except comfortable shoes. But
don't forget to bring lots of suntan lotion! And lots of money!
I am attaching a few pictures of sites near the Dead Sea. I hope you will
have some time after your trip to visit me.
Regards,
Howard
What will Jan take with her to the Dead Sea?
___ a guide book to sites near the Dead Sea

___ a business suit
___ books and magazines
___ a bathing suit
___ walking shoes and comfortable clothing
___ a winter coat
___ $200
103 Quartet 1
U N I T
Some Grammar
Some/Any Plural Countable Nouns Uncountable Nouns
Jan has some questions. some money.

She doesnt have any walking shoes. any time to write.
Do you have any walking shoes? any information on the Dead Sea?
a lot of/lots of
Howard has lots of/a lot of friends. a lot of/lots of free time.
Many/Much
Howard has many pictures of his family.

He doesn't have many bathing suits with him.
Howard spends too much time with her.
He doesn't drink much milk.
(a) few
Howard has a few pictures of Jan.

This place has very few tourists now.
(a) little
You only need a little more time to see everything.

You need little money for the nightlife.
104 Quartet 1
U N I T
5
We use some and any before plural countable and uncountable
Nouns. We usually use some in positive sentences and any in negative
sentences and questions.
Examples:
I'd like some books.
I'd like some information about the Dead Sea.
We dont need any pictures of Florida.
There isn't any time to change our plans.
Do you have any pictures of the Alps?
We use some in polite questions, where we think the answer will be YES.
Example: Would you like some suntan lotion? Yes, please.
We use many with countable nouns only. We use much with uncountable
nouns in negative sentences.
Example: I have many books about dolphins.
Do you have much homework to do?
We use a lot of/lots of with both countable and uncountable nouns.

Examples:
There are lots of/a lot of tourists at the hotel.
There is a lot of/lots of salt in the Dead Sea.
We use (a) few with countable nouns only. Note that few means "almost
none at all".
Examples:
There are a few tourists there in the winter. (some)
There are few tourists there in the winter. (almost none)
We use (a) little with uncountable nouns only. Note that little alone means
"almost none at all".
Examples:
There is a little tourism there in the winter. (some)
There is little tourism there in the winter. (almost none)
105 Quartet 1
U N I T
Some Practice
A What does Jan take with her on the vacation? Use the example
below with a few, a lot of, some, and many.
Example: Jan takes many hats with her to the Dead Sea.
B Fill in the right words: some, any, much, many, or a lot of/lots
of. You can use some of these words more than once and there
may be more than one correct answer.
lots of tourists taking a relaxing vacation.

Southern Florida is very popular, with 1. _______
There are 2. _______ beautiful beaches and the most famous tourist attraction -
Disney World. 3. ______ people go to Florida just to visit this famous amusement park
in Orlando. 4. ______tourists go to Florida to dive. Others go for the golf. The weather
is warm both in the summer and in the winter.
Tourists dont do 5. _______ fishing or swimming in the Alps. They go for the winter
sports. They usually go to ski. 6. _____ people go hiking in the Alps during the summer
months.
There arent 7. _____ fish in the Dead Sea because theres too 8. ______ salt in the
water. There isnt 9. _______ golf at the Dead Sea because there isnt 10. _______
grass. There isnt 11. _______ grass because there isnt 12. _______ of rain. People
go to the Dead Sea because its good for their skin and they can relax.
106 Quartet 1
U N I T
C Rewrite the sentences below using a lot, much, many, some,

a little, and a few.
Example: More than 80% of the visitors to the Dead Sea stay there more than
two days.
Many of the visitors to the Dead Sea stay there more than two days.
1. About half the tourists who travel to the Dead Sea also spend time touring
around the country.
2. Only 2% of the visitors come from Asia.
3. There are tourists who go to the Dead Sea for their health.
4. At the Dead Sea, the sun shines almost all year.
D Check () the answers that are true for you.

Read your partners answers. How are yours different? How are yours the
same?
1. I read many travel books.
2. I go to see many movies.
3. I dont like much salt in my food.
4. I need a lot of time to learn new words.
5. I dont need much sleep.
6. I dont have much time to visit new places.
7. I have very little money, so I dont travel very much.
8. I like to play a lot of basketball.
9. I have many good friends.
10. I have few problems.
11. I spend a lot of time reading about new places.
12. I eat lots of Mexican food.
E Write about yourself. Explain your answers. Use the words below
with some, any, much, many, and a lot of.
Example: I dont have much time for vacations because I always have a lot of
work.
adventures family money travel books

experience good luck time work
107 Quartet 1
U N I T
F Read your sentences from the exercise in E to your partner.

Ask him/her what is true for him/her. How are you different?
How are you the same?
Something to Read
active passport towering

glasses phrase book travel insurance
hotel reservation stopover valid
108 Quartet 1
U N I T
Some Practice
A All the sentences below about Zermatt are not true.
Make them true.
1. You can only go skiing in the winter.
2. There are only a few hotels there.
3. You can get to Zermatt by cable car.
4. There is a lot of traffic in the town.
5. Zermatt is on the Matterhorn Mountain.
6. The Matterhorn is a restaurant.
B Answer these questions about the "to do" list.

1. Do you know who wrote the "to do" list?
2. Who are Clifford and Frank?
3. What are they doing on their vacation?
4. Where are they going?
5. Why isn't Patrick going with them?
6. Why do they need a phrase book?
109 Quartet 1
U N I T
C Match A to B. For help look at Something to Read again.
A B
1. valid a. car
2. phrase b. passport
3. cable c. book
4. travel d. insurance
D Who said it? Match the people in A with the phrases in B.
A B
1. __ The hotel manager a. You have a reservation at the

Tower Hotel in Paris.
2. __ Frank b. Sorry. I can't go with you.
3. __ Patrick c. Don't worry, sir. You
get travel insurance
automatically.
4. __ The travel agent d. This will help you understand
the most common words.
5. __ The bookstore owner e. I will meet you at the airport.
6. __ The traveler f. Your room is on the second

floor.
7. __ The woman at the credit card g. Now I can see better with my
company glasses.
110 Quartet 1
U N I T
E Frank is calling Clifford to talk about their skiing vacation.

Fill in the blanks to complete the conversation. There is more
than one possible answer.
Frank: Hi, Clifford.

Clifford: Hi, I hear Patrick isnt coming with us. Why not?
Frank: He doesn't have a valid 1. _________________.
Clifford: Im really sorry to hear that. Now I dont have to buy new
2. _______________. I can take his. They are almost new.
Frank: That's fine, but be nice. He is very 3. ______________. He really
wanted to go on this vacation.
Clifford: I know. Did you buy a 4. ___________________?
Frank: I couldn't find any in the local bookstore. Anyway, who wants to talk
I want to 5. _________________ all day.
Clifford: I agree. Do you think the skiing conditions will be good?
Frank: Oh, yes! In Zermatt theres always 6. _______________________.
111 Quartet 1
U N I T
What Do You Think?
What do you do in these situations? Talk to your partner.

Decide on the best solution.
1. You lost your passport in a foreign country.

2. You dont have a visa.
3. You arrive late at night and dont have a hotel reservation.
4. Your suitcase didn't arrive.
5. Someone stole your money and credit cards.
112 Quartet 1
U N I T
PART 2 : WERE GOING TO VISIT MEXICO

Language Point
Future: "be going to"
Before You Start
At The End of the Baja Peninsula

Cabo San Lucas, Mexico (also known as Cabo) sits at the end of the long
Baja California Peninsula. It has everything for the active tourist or resident:
shopping, nightclubs, restaurants, boating, fishing, and great beaches. It even
has restaurants like Planet Hollywood and the Hard Rock Caf. Cabo looks
and feels like an American tourist town.
San Jose del Cabo is a small, quiet town 18 miles (29 kilometers) east of
Cabo San Lucas. The town center is a few streets away from the waterfront
and there is a traditional central plaza. San Jose del Cabo has a nice
tree-lined main street with cafs, stores, and small restaurants.
Kam: So, what are we going to do about our vacation this year?
Jerry: This year I made plans for Cabo San Lucas. I hear its a perfect spot
for an active and healthy vacation.
Kam: What am I going to do there? You know I like quiet and relaxing
vacations.
Jerry: Well, Im going to try deep sea fishing and Im going to play golf,
and even learn how to dive.
Kam: All I want is a quiet, peaceful vacation.
Jerry: And every night were going to eat at different restaurants. This is
going to be lots of fun!
Kam: For you perhaps. Not for me.
Jerry: Why not? Were going to be together for two whole weeks.
Kam: No, we arent. Im going to spend my vacation in San Jose del
Cabo!
113 Quartet 1
U N I T
Make these sentences true.

Example: Jerry is going to play basketball.
Jerry is going to play golf.
1. Kam is going to join him on vacation this year.
2. Jerry and Kam are going to be together for two weeks.
3. Jerry is going to cook every night in Cabo San Lucas.
4. Jerry isnt going to spend his vacation in Cabo San Lucas.
5. Jerry and Kam are going to do the same things while theyre on vacation.
Some Grammar
Be going to Verb
Im going to visit Mexico next year.
Were going to travel to Cabo San Lucas in
August.
Willie isnt going to meet us at the hotel.
Hes not going to leave until tomorrow.
Are they going to go fishing?
When is Jerry going to make the hotel reservation?
Future be going to
We usually use be going to when we want to talk about something that is

pre-planned or that we intend to do.
Example: Next summer Im going to travel to France.
When we talk about the future we use time expressions, such as:
tomorrow, tonight, later, soon, the day after tomorrow
and expressions beginning with in and next: in a few days, in 20 years,
next June, next week (year, month), next summer (winter, autumn, spring).
114 Quartet 1
U N I T
Some Practice
A Check () the sentences that talk about the future.
1.
__ Jerry and Kam are going to visit Mexico.
2. __ They both like Mexico.
3. __ They want to go to different places.
4. __ Jerry likes an active vacation.
5. __ Kam wants a quiet vacation.
6. __ They cant agree.
7. __ They arent going to stay at the same place.
8. __ Jerrys going to spend his vacation in Cabo San Lucas.
9. __ Kams going to spend her vacation in San Jose del Cabo.
B Jerry is in Cabo San Lucas. Kam is in San Jose del Cabo. Here are
the phone messages they left each other about tomorrows plans.
Fill in the correct form of be going to + verb in both messages.
Hi Jerry.
I want you to know my plans in case Hi Kam.
u the plan of
you want to join me. Tomorrow I 1. I promised to leave yo
mes!
am going to be
_______________ (be) with Tom and our cruise, so here it co
Susan, people I met here. Tomorrow morning e
We 2. _________ (walk) from our hotel 1. __we____go
are __to
__ing ___ (take) a cruise.
__tak
(travel) along
to the plaza and then we 3. ______ We 2. ____________
the beautiful
(sit) at one of the cafs. In the the coastline to look at
_____ (make)
afternoon, I 4. _________ (swim) in the scenery. They 3. ____
d snorkel. It
hotel pool. three stops to swim an
of fun. In the
This evening, we 5. _________ (try) to 4. _________ (be) a lot
_ (walk)
have dinner at the Caf San Jose, a evening, I 5. ________
me nice night-
small restaurant in the center of the around and look for so
other guests
town. I 6. _________ (be) back in my clubs with some of the
you tomorrow.
room before 10:00 pm. Hope you are at the hotel. Speak to
having fun. I am.
Hope to see you, Bye,
Kam Jerry
115 Quartet 1
U N I T
C Check () who the speaker is for each statement.
Kam Jerry Dont Know

1. Were going to sit at the pool.
2. Were going to rest in the afternoon.
3. Im going to buy some Mexican clothes.
4. Were going to shop all afternoon.
5. Im going to spend time with friends.
6. Were going to look at the scenery.
7. Were going to look at the people.
8. Im going to rest in the evening.
9. Im going to eat dinner in a restaurant in
town.
10. Were going to have fun.
D Read about Cabos. Then write what Jerrys going to do there.

The beginning is done for you.
Example: On his vacation, Jerrys going to do a lot of things.

The center of Cabos has many shops, markets, and activities. Theres
even a bullfight once a week. There are hundreds of restaurants and nightclubs
in the town and a few 5-star restaurants. Four months a year, from November
to March, you can see the Gray Whales. You can snorkel in Santa Maria Bay
and go scuba diving at the Sand Falls. You can go on a ride on a glass-bottom
boat, go windsurfing, or just go for a swim.
116 Quartet 1
U N I T
E What is Kam going to do on her vacation?

Example: Kam is going to have a very quiet vacation.
F Talk to your partner. Ask about his/her plans for next week, next
month, and next year. Tell him/her about your plans. Use going
to.
G Play a fortune-telling game.

1. Choose two to three people in your group.
2. Write sentences about each one, using going to. Write what you think
is going to happen to them in the future. This is their fortune.
3. The person can accept the fortune or refuse the fortune. He or she can
correct the fortune.
Example:
You: Boris, you are going to become a famous artist and live in Paris.
Boris: I like that fortune, but I'm not going to become an artist. I'm
going to become a scuba diver.
117 Quartet 1
U N I T
Language In Use
Read the following conversation.
Receptionist: How may I help you, sir?

Jerry: I cant get into my room. Theres something wrong with my key.
Receptionist: Ill call someone to help you.
Jerry: Thanks, and what about my suitcases?
Receptionist: Oh, dont worry, sir. The bellhop will take them to your room.
Jerry: Well, actually, Im not even sure this is my hotel.
Receptionist: This is the East Cape Hotel.
Jerry: I want the West Cape Hotel.
Receptionist: No problem, sir. Ill get you a taxi.
Jerry: Thanks.
118 Quartet 1
U N I T
A Correct the sentences that are wrong.
1. Jerry is in the West Cape Hotel.

Jerry is in the East Cape Hotel.
_____________________________________________________________
2. The receptionist is also from the East Cape Hotel.
_____________________________________________________________
3. The receptionist will help Jerry with his room key.
_____________________________________________________________
4. The receptionist will take Jerry's suitcases to his room.
_____________________________________________________________
5. Jerry is sure hes in the right hotel.
_____________________________________________________________
6. A taxi will take Jerry to his hotel.
_____________________________________________________________
B Answer the questions.
1. Is the receptionist polite and helpful?
2. How do you know? Find examples in the text.
Language Function
When we want to do something for someone else or promise something, we
often use will, will not/won't + the base form of the verb.
Examples: Ill call someone to help you.

I won't do that anymore.
119 Quartet 1
U N I T
Some Practice
A Read the advertisements and match the title to the right

advertisement.
West Cape Hotel
Cabo Information Center
Peninsula Bank
120 Quartet 1
U N I T
B Where can you get these services? Check () the correct answer.
Compare your answers with your neighbors.
Hotel Information Bank None of

Center them
Get information about the area

Change your money
Get free drinks
Get a ride from the airport
Get a free ride to the airport
Book tours
Get your tourist guides
C Choose one of the situations below and write a conversation.

Read it to the class.
Example:
Situation:
Jerry wants to go fishing. He wants to find big fish and doesnt
know where to go. Juan offers to help him.
Conversation:
Jerry: Excuse me, are you from Cabo?
Juan: Yes, I am. Can I help you?
Jerry: Where can I go fishing?
Juan: Ill show you, its very close.
Jerry: Is there a special place to catch very big fish?
Juan: Don't worry. I'll take you there.
Jerry: Thanks a lot.
Juan: Youre welcome.
1. It's Jerry's first time fishing. He needs to buy a few things, and he also
needs to have a lesson or two. Maria offers to help him.
2. Jerry wants to watch the Gray Whales, but doesnt know where and when.
Carlotta offers to help him.
3. Jerry wants to see the famous Sand Falls and he doesn't know how to
scuba dive. Carla offers to help him.
121 Quartet 1
U N I T
Some Fun
Crossword Puzzle
1
3 4
Across
5. I suggest that you buy travel i____ for your trip.

8. I want to spend the night in Paris. Can you arrange a s___ for me?
9. You should buy a p___ book before you go on vacation..
Down
1. I want to go scuba d_____ this year.

2. I'd like to make a r____ at your hotel for next month, please.
3. Do you have a valid p___?
4. If you like an a___ vacation, skiing at Zermatt is for you.
6. I have never taken a c____ car before.
7. The Matterhorn t___ over Zermatt.
122 Quartet 1
U N I T
What Did You Learn?
Facts:
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
Words:
Word Meaning
123 Quartet 1
U N I T
Language points:
some
any
much
many
a lot of/ lots of
a little
a few
Future with going to:
positive
negative
question
Crossword Answers
1
D
2
I R
3 4
V E P A
5
I N S U R A N C E
N E S T
6
G R S I C
V P V A
A O E B
7
T R T L
8
I S T O P O V E R
O W
N E
R
9
P H R A S E
124 Quartet 1
U N I T
6
A Vacation in Alaska
U N I T
PART 1: WHAT DID YOU SEE IN ALASKA?
Language Point
The Past
Before You Start
Alex: How was your vacation in Alaska?

Philip: It was fantastic! Here are some pictures.
Alex: Amazing! Did you really see bears?
Philip: We saw bears and moose. We even saw seals. They swam in the
water near the boat.
Alex: Where did you stay?
Philip: Most of the time we slept on the ship. We stayed in a hotel in
Anchorage for a few nights.
Alex: What was the ship like?
Philip: The ship was like a 5-star hotel. And the food was delicious.
126 Quartet 1
U N I T
1. Where did Philip go?

2. Where did he stay?
B Change the sentences to make them true according to the

conversation.
Example: The trip to Alaska was horrible. The trip to Alaska was fantastic.
1. The tourists slept on the ship every night.
2. The seals and bears were swimming in the water.
3. Alex told Philip about his vacation.
4. It was a boring vacation.
5. Alex took pictures of the food.
C Arrange the sentences in the correct order. There is more than

one correct answer.
1. ___ When Philip returned from Alaska, he showed his pictures to his
friend Alex.
2. ___ The tourists slept in a hotel the other nights.
3. ___ He got on the boat in Anchorage.
4. ___ The tourists saw many animals during the vacation.
5. ___ The boat traveled along the coast of Alaska.

1 Philip flew to Alaska for his vacation.
6. ___
7. ___ The boat was as good as a 5-star hotel.
8. ___ Most of time, the tourists slept on the ship.
127 Quartet 1
U N I T
Some Grammar
PAST SIMPLE
I, You, Alex, We, stayed on the ship most

The tourists slept evenings.
PAST of to be
I, He, She, It was in Alaska last year.
You, We, They, The were excited to see the seals.

tourists
In the Past Simple, the past form of regular verbs end in -ed. Irregular verbs have
special past forms. Look at the end of the book for a list of irregular verbs.
Negative
PAST SIMPLE
I, You, Alex, We, They, didn't see / did not see any whales.
The tourists
PAST of to be
I, He, She, It wasn't / was not in that picture.
You, We, They, weren't / were not happy to go home.

The tourists
128 Quartet 1
U N I T
Questions
PAST SIMPLE
Did I, you, he, she, it, stay on the boat?

we, they sleep
Where did I, you, he, she, go on vacation?

we, they, your
family
When did I, you, he, she, take those pictures?

they
Why did I, you, he, she, it, run away from the tourist?
we, they
PAST of to be
Was it scared of the tourists?
Were you, they happy to go home?
We use the Past Simple to talk about things that happened at a definite time in
the past. In these sentences, we often use time expressions, such as:
- yesterday, the day before yesterday
- expressions beginning with last: last Monday, last week
(month, year, night, summer)
- expressions with ago: two years (months, days, hours) ago
Examples:
I studied French two years ago.
I was ill last Monday.
I swam with the dolphins in Florida last year.
129 Quartet 1
U N I T
Some Practice
A Find out about Philips train trip. Match the questions in A to the
answers in B.
A B
c Where did Philip go last

1. __ a. He bought coffee on the train,
Thursday night? but it was terrible.
2. __ Why did he go by train? b. Yesterday
3. __ What did he eat? c. He went to the Denali State Park

by train.
4. __ Did he buy anything to drink? d. He said that the park was beautiful
but the train ride was too long.
5. __ Did he have a good time? e. The train is cheaper than a rental

car.
6. __ When did he return to f. He ate sandwiches that he made

Anchorage? himself.
B Read this letter about a vacation to Alaska.

Find the verbs in the Past Simple and complete the table.
Dear Alex,
My vacation in Alaska was fantastic. Most of the time, we traveled by ship. We usually ate and
slept there. When we were on the ship, we relaxed and saw all kinds of animals and some of the
highest mountains in North America. At Anchorage we went by a special midnight train to Denali
State Park and visited Mount McKinley. We also visited a gold mine not far from Fairbanks. At
the end of the vacation, we flew to Vancouver, Canada.
See you soon!
Love, Philip.
130 Quartet 1
U N I T
Regular Verbs Irregular Verbs
Base Form Past Tense Base Form Past Tense
travel be
relax eat ate
visit sleep
see
go
fly
C Complete the sentences with the correct form of the verb from
the table in exercise A. There is more than one correct answer
and some words can be used more than once.
Dear Patricia,
What a wonderful vacation! I flew to Vancouver, Canada fourteen days ago

traveled along
from Chicago and got on a boat to Alaska. For eight days, I (1) ______
the coast of Alaska on a wonderful ship. We (2) ______ the most wonderful
things - bears, seals, and even a whale! We (3) ______ and (4) ______ on the
ship.The ship was as good as a 5-star hotel. For four days we (5) ______ in
Anchorage, Alaska and (6) _______ the Denali State Park. We (7) ______
there on a special train - it leaves the station at midnight! After the trip to
the park, I (8) ______ to Vancouver for two days of touring. What an
interesting city!
Today I am flying home.
Speak to you tomorrow.
Philip
131 Quartet 1
U N I T
D Complete the conversation that Philip has with Patricia.

Use the correct past form of the verbs in brackets ( ).
Philip: Hi, Patricia.

Patricia: When 1. _________ (get) home?
Philip: This morning. My plane 2. _________ (land) at 9:15 am and I
3. _________ (be) home before 11:00 am.
Patricia: So, how 4. _________ (be) your vacation?
Philip: Fantastic! I 5. _________ (see) so many new things.
I 6. _________ (meet) so many interesting people, and I
7. _________ (visit) so many exciting places.
Patricia: Enough. And 8. ______________ (think) about me at all?
Philip: Of course. Sometimes. Well, once in a while. And what
9. _________ (do) while I 10. _________ (be) away?
Patricia: I 11. ________ (go) to see lots of movies. I 12. _________ (eat)
in a different restaurant every night. I 13. _________ (make) some
new friends.
Philip: Enough. I understand. You 14. _________ (not think) about me at
all!
132 Quartet 1
U N I T
E Talk with your partner about a vacation you went on.

Ask your partner questions. Then swap roles.
Here are some questions you can ask your partner.
1. Where did you go?

2. How did you travel?
3. What did you see?
4. What did you do?
5. Where did you sleep?
6. What did you eat?
Something to Read
Roland plans to go to Alaska this summer. Look at his itinerary.
Some Words
get off relax sail travel
gold mine return sleep visit
mountains riverboat stay
133 Quartet 1
U N I T
11-Day Tour by Ship, Train, and Plane

Day 1 Sail from Vancouver by ship. Sleep on the ship.
Day 2 Stop at Ketchikan. Travel to Sitka by ship. Sleep on the ship.
Day 3 Stop at Sitka. Travel to Juneau. Sleep on the ship.
Day 4 Travel to Hubbard Glacier. Walk around, relax, and see Alaska from the ship.
Sleep on the ship.
Day 5 Travel to College Fjord. Sleep on the ship.
Day 6 Travel to Kodiak by ship. Stop at Kodiak. Get off the ship and see the wild
animals. Return to the ship and sleep on the ship.
Day 7 Travel to Anchorage. At Anchorage, get off the ship and stay at a hotel
in Anchorage.
Day 8 Visit Anchorage. At 12:00 midnight, go by train to Denali State Park. The
sun shines all night. Sleep at a hotel at Denali State Park.
Day 9 Visit Denali State Park. Go by tour bus. See Mount McKinley, one
of the largest mountains in Alaska. Return to the train and go to
Fairbanks by train.
Day 10 Visit Fairbanks. Travel by riverboat to see an Alaskan gold mine. Sleep at a
hotel in Fairbanks.
Day 11 Fly back to Vancouver by special plane.
134 Quartet 1
U N I T
Some Practice
A Roland and Jennifer are talking about Alaska.

Complete the conversation with the words in the box.
get off mountains stay walk around

gold mine riverboat view
Roland: I'm going to Alaska this summer.
Jennifer: I hear its great. There are lots of animals and fantastic views. Take
walk around
good shoes if you want to 1. _____________________ the icy
glaciers, but 2. _____________ with the group its dangerous!
Roland: OK, dont worry. Ill do everything you say.
Jennifer: Dont forget to 3. ________________ in Anchorage, and see the

4. ______________ of Alaska. The 5. ___________ is wonderful
from up there. There is a great 6. ___________ trip to the
7. ___________ ___________.
Roland: Hey Jennifer, have you ever been to Alaska?
Jennifer: Never, but Ive read a lot about it.
135 Quartet 1
U N I T
B Margaret also plans to go to Alaska this summer.

With your partner, compare her tour with Roland's tour.
For help, look at Something To Read again. Then say what the
differences are.
136 Quartet 1
U N I T
C You and your partner are planning a vacation to Alaska.

You have eight days. You get seasick, prefer hotels, and hate
riverboat rides. You love walking through the wildlife of Alaska.
Plan a vacation suitable for you and your partner. Look at
Something To Read again for help.
D Present your vacation to the class. Compare your plans.
What Do You Think?
Answer the questions.

1. Would you like to go on a cruise to Alaska?
2. What kind of people do you think you might meet on a cruise to Alaska?
3. Prepare a description of a typical traveler. Think of age, interests, and
lifestyle.
On Your Own
Write an advertisement for a tour to Alaska.
137 Quartet 1
U N I T
PART 2: WHATS THE MATTER?

Language Point
Past Progressive
Past Progressive vs. Past Simple
Before You Start
Dear Jake,
The cruise to Alaska was great, but I ate too much.
The meals were fantastic but there were too many of them. On the second day
of the tour, for example, the crew brought us coffee and cake while we were
sitting on deck and watching the view. This was one hour after breakfast! After
a large lunch at 12:30, we went to visit some sites on shore. While we were
touring, we ate some sandwiches that the tour guide gave us. While we were
listening to a fantastic jazz concert, the crew served us some more coffee and
cake. And then, at midnight, when we were just sitting around and talking, they
told us that the midnight meal was ready.
Tomorrow I begin my diet.

Regards, Stella
138 Quartet 1
U N I T

1. Why did Stella put on weight?
2. Did Stella enjoy the cruise?
3. How often did they eat on the cruise?
4. What did some people eat in addition to breakfast, lunch, and
sandwiches?
B Complete the sentences in A with endings from B.
A B
e We were sitting and talking

1. ___ a. the crew brought us coffee and
cake.
2. ___ While we were sitting on the b. we were touring.

deck,
3. ___ The cruise was great c. but I ate too much.
4. ___ The crew brought us cake d. we were listening to the concert.

and coffee while
5. ___ We ate sandwiches while e. when they served the midnight

meal.
139 Quartet 1
U N I T
Some Grammar
PAST PROGRESSIVE
I, He, She, It was swimming in the water.
You, We, The tourists were taking pictures of the seals.
Negative
PAST PROGRESSIVE
I, He, She, It wasn't /was not looking at the camera.
You, We, The tourists weren't /were not smiling in that picture.
Questions
PAST
PROGRESSIVE
Was the tourist/she feeding the seals?
Weren't you/they feeling well yesterday?
Past Simple vs. Past Progressive

We often use the Past Progressive in sentences together with the Past
Simple with the words when and while.
The Past Progressive refers to the background situation (what was already
happening), and the Past Simple refers to the events we want to focus on.
Example: I was looking at the seals when they served dinner.
The action in the Past Simple usually "interrupts" (comes in the middle of)
the action in the Past Progressive.
Example: While I was dancing, they served coffee and cake.
140 Quartet 1
U N I T
Some Practice
A Fill in the correct forms of the verbs. Use the Past Simple and the
Past Progressive.
were dancing (dance) and ____________ (eat) while the ship

1. The people ____________
was traveling along the coast of Alaska.
2. While the people ____________ (sit) on the deck and __________ (watch)
the scenery, the seals suddenly ____________ (appear) in the water.
3. They ____________ (serve) breakfast in the dining room while Philip

_________________ (still sleep).
4. We ____________ (look) at the scenery while the guide

___________ (tell) us about the history of Alaska.
5. The bears ____________ (play) near the water when the ship
____________ (sail) by.
6. The tour bus ____________ (come) for us while I ____________ (still

pack) my things.
7. It ____________ (snow) again when we _____________ (leave) Alaska.
8. While we ____________ (walk) through the gold mine, we

_________________________ (secretly look) for gold.
141 Quartet 1
U N I T
B Talk about the pictures, using Past Progressive and Past Simple.
C Create a story by putting the sentences in a logical order. Number

each sentence.
a. ___ A few years later while Lorraine was bringing up her two children,
Sandra moved to New York and lived a glamorous life as a single woman.
b. ___ After high school, while Lorraine was traveling around the world, Sandra
started to study at the university.
c. ___ Two years later, while Lorraine was studying, she met a man and decided
to marry him.
d. ___ They look very much alike but they lived very different lives.
e. ___ Sandra was still studying and didnt want to get married.
f. ___ Fifteen years after Lorraine got married, Sandra met Bert, got married
and quickly had two children.
g. ___ While she was taking care of babies, Lorraine decided to study again.
h. ___ In fact, they both did the same things in life but at different times.
i. ___ Sandra and Lorraine are twin sisters.
142 Quartet 1
U N I T
D Answer the following questions about the text in exercise C. Use

complete sentences.
1. What was Lorraine doing when she got married?

____________________________________________________________.
2. What did Lorraine decide to do while Sandra was raising her children?
____________________________________________________________.
3. What was Lorraine doing after high school, while Sandra was studying?
____________________________________________________________.
4. What was Sandra doing while Lorraine was raising her children?
____________________________________________________________.
E Write a short story about someone. It can be about a real person

or an imaginary person. Now mix up the sentences. Give the
mixed-up story to a partner to put in order.
143 Quartet 1
U N I T
Language In Use
Luigi: What terrible food! Look at this salad. It's not fresh.
Stella: That's not true. They made it an hour ago while we were watching the
whales.
Luigi: Well, its terrible. And the bread it tastes like paper.
Stella: I don't agree with you. I like the bread a lot. In fact, I like it too much.
Do you like anything at all?
Luigi: No, nothing. Why are you walking away? Aren't you going to eat
anything?
Stella: No, not with you! You complain too much.
A Which of the sentences above are complaints? Underline them.
144 Quartet 1
U N I T
B Who do you think might say this Stella or Luigi?
Stella Luigi
1. This food is wonderful.

2. I don't like you at all.
3. This is a terrible cruise.
4. You always complain.
5. I can't eat this. I want different food.
6. I'm unhappy. I want to talk to the captain.
7. Nobody wants to sit next to me at dinner.
8. I'm enjoying every minute of my vacation.
9. I want my money back.
Language Function
When we complain, we say that we are not happy or satisfied with something
and we want it to be better.
Some Practice
A Match the sentences in A to the sentences in B.
A B
1. c
___ I'm not happy at my job. a. Think of something else.
2. ___ I'm so tired. b. Do they speak English?
3. ___ Thats a bad idea. c. I'm looking for a new one.
4. ___ It's too late to have a party. d. He ate it all while I was
sleeping.
5. ___ It's raining again!
e. We were going to go on a
6. ___ He didn't leave any cake for picnic.
me.
7. ___ They don't understand us. f. People have to get up early
for work.
145 Quartet 1
U N I T
B What do you do?
1. What do you do when you drive in traffic?
I enjoy looking at the view and the people.

I think about something else.
I complain about it after I get home.
2. What happens when you eat something in a restaurant that you dont like?
I send it back to the kitchen and ask for something else.

I tell myself that its not so terrible and eat it.
I complain about it and tell people not to eat in that restaurant.
3. What do you do when you have to work late every day and dont have
enough free time?
I tell my boss that I cant work so much anymore.

I think about the extra money I am making and what I'll do with it.
I complain about how tired I am and how hard Im working.
4. What happens when you go to see a really bad movie?
I leave in the middle of the movie.

I stay to the end because I paid for the ticket.
I stay to the end and then I complain about what a bad movie it was.
5. What happens when you go sleep in a terrible hotel and are very tired the
next day?
I remember the place and never go there again.

I tell myself that it wasnt so terrible and that Im not really tired.
I tell everyone how tired I am and what an uncomfortable night I had.
6. What do you do when you meet people you don't like?
I excuse myself and leave.

I find something interesting about these people.
I complain to my friends about how dull and boring the people were.
146 Quartet 1
U N I T
C Do you complain? Prepare a complaint for each sentence.

Then discuss them in groups.
1. You bought a new radio but it doesnt work. What do you say to the sales
clerk?
2. You planned a picnic at the beach but now your friend can't come.
What do you say to your friend?
3. You order a steak but the waiter/waitress brings you chicken. What do you
say?
4. Your neighbor is having a party and is making a lot of noise. How do you
tell him/her that you cannot sleep?
5. Your friend needs $50. You already gave him/her $20 and you never got it
back. What do you say now?
147 Quartet 1
U N I T
Some Fun
Write funny word sentences.
The object of this game is to write sentences using the letters in the words below.
You will use each letter to start one word in your sentence. Use your imagination.
Example:
Sleep:
Some large elephants eat pizza.
give _______________________________________________________
gold _______________________________________________________
happy _______________________________________________________
look _______________________________________________________
love _______________________________________________________
visit _______________________________________________________
stay _______________________________________________________
swim _______________________________________________________
On Your Own
Write a letter of complaint to

the newspaper about one of
the subjects below:
1. dirty streets
2. not enough food for poor people
3. noisy neighbors
4. not enough parks in your town
148 Quartet 1
U N I T
What Did You Learn?

Facts:
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
Words:
Word Meaning
Language points:
Past Simple: regular verbs
Past Simple: irregular verbs
Past Simple: negative
Past Simple: question
Past Progressive: positive
Past Progressive: negative
Past Progressive: question
149 Quartet 1
Appendix
List of Irregular Verbs
Infinitive Past Simple Infinitive Past Simple
be was/were send sent

beat beat set set
become became show showed
begin began sing sang
bite bit sleep slept
blow blew slide slid
break broke smell smelled
build built speak spoke
burn burned/burnt spend spent
buy bought spill spilled
can could stand stood
catch caught steal stole
choose chose strike struck
come came swim swam
cost cost swing swung
cut cut take took
dig dug teach taught
do did tear tore
draw drew tell told
dream dreamed/dreamt think thought
drink drank throw threw
drive drove tread on trod on
eat ate understand understood
fall fell wake up woke up
feed fed wear wore
feel felt win won
find found wind wound
fly flew write wrote
forget forgot
forgive forgave
get got
give gave
go went
have had
hear heard
hide hid
hit hit
hurt hurt
keep kept
know knew
lay laid
lead led
lean leaned
learn learned
leave left
lend lent
let let
lie lay
light lit
lose lost
151 Quartet 1
Index of Language Points and Functions
Adjectives, Comparative and Superlative 13-18

any 102-108
Complaining 144-148
Complimenting 19-21;23
few (a) 102-108
Future: be going to 113-117
Invitations 44-48;50
lot of (a), lots of 102-108
little (a) 102-108
many 102-108
Modals
can/cant (ability) 76-81
can/could (permission and requests) 76-81
much 102-108
Nouns, Countable and Uncountable 87-97
Past
Progressive 138-143
Simple 126-133
Simple, vs. Progressive 138-143
to be 126-133
Present
Progressive 26-33
Simple 2-8
Simple, vs. Progressive 64-70
Promising (will/wont) 118-121
some 102-108
Wh-questions
when/where/why/how 54-59
who/what 39-43;49
153 Quartet 1
Introduction
Quartet 2
reading comprehension activities, guided writing, speaking activities, grammar,
and vocabulary exercises. The book is organized thematically following the topics
of Quartet Online. The result is a fully integrated language learning course. We
III Quartet 2
Map of Quartet 2
Vocabulary Language
Points
Unit 1 Pages 2-24 Types of buildings Modals: have

Old Sites Petra Travel in the desert to / has to & must-
obligation
Part 1: You Must Visit Pages 2-12 used to
Petra!
Part 2: Yesterday and Pages 13-24

Today
Unit 2 Pages 26-48 Natural disasters Modals for advice:

Another Old Site should, shouldnt
Pompeii Connectors of
contrast:
Part 1: Where Should I Pages 26-36 even though,
Go? although, though,
but
Part 2: More About Pages 37-48
Pompeii
Unit 3 Pages 50-72 Stories and

Legends legends Relative Clauses:
which, who, that,
Part 1: About Legends Pages 50-59 whose
Present Passive
Part 2: Urban Legends Pages 60-72
IV Quartet 2
Giving advice and Aqaba Is Not So Discussing travel Preparing a list of

making Far Away plans travel items
recommendations The Desert Discussing Writing about
Obligations The Truth About problems and things you used to
Camels solutions do
Doing a survey
Making up stories
about people
based on pictures
Talking about past
activities
Giving and asking for The History of Talking about Writing a letter of
advice Ancient Pompeii natural disasters advice
Making excuses Role-play: inviting Making a list of
and making things to do during
excuses a disaster
Role-play: Writing about an
interviewing ancient site
someone about a Writing a short
vacation. note making an
excuse
Asking for and giving How the Snake Role-play: Writing a poem
information Lost His Legs interviewing a Writing a new
storyteller ending to a legend
Role-play: Writing your own
interviewing a legend
candidate for an Writing a report
acting job about an incident
Writing a report
about legends in
your culture
V Quartet 2
Vocabulary Language
Points
Unit 4 Pages 74-94 Legends and Result Clauses: so,

Another Legend mythology therefore, sothat,
The Story of suchthat
Persephone Modals: could
Pages 74-83 (permission and
Part 1: In Greek ability), may &
Mythology might (possibility)
Pages 84-94
Part 2: What Really
Happened?
Pages 96-118 Nature and Purpose: in order

Unit 5 adventure to, so that, because
Nature & Adventure vacations Past Passive
Vacations
Pages 96-106
Part 1: Why Do You Do
That?
Pages 107-118
Part 2: It Was Created
Many Years Ago
Unit 6 Pages 120-142 Activities Real Conditions

Hawaii Words describing Time Clauses
islands
Part 1: What If Pages 120-129
Part 2: While I Was in Pages 130-142

the Hawaiian Islands
Unit 7 Pages 144-165 Review Review

Grammar Review
Part 1: More Practice Pages 144-158
Part 2: Test Yourself Pages 159-165
VI Quartet 2
Talking about results The Story of Talking about Writing a

and consequences Persephone: A heroes newspaper article
Talking about ability Letter to the Editor Talking about Writing a myth
Asking for permission Greek gods about a hero
Talking about Writing about
possibility Greek gods
Describing possible
future activities
Explaining the In the Rainforest Talking about a

reason or purpose for camping trip Writing a postcard
doing something Talking about a about the
Apologizing vacation you want rainforests,
Complaints to go on the safari, or the
Discussing a travel Grand Canyon
complaint
Role-play:
apologizing and
asking for
explanations
Talking about Welcome to Role-play: giving Writing a postcard

conditions Hawaii tourist tips from Hawaii
Persuasion Describing a camp Writing an
itinerary advertisement
Role-play:
persuading
someone to
participate in
activities
Review Review Review Review
VII Quartet 2
U N I T
1
Old Sites Petra
U N I T
PART 1: YOU MUST VISIT PETRA!

Language Point
Modals: have to / has to & must - obligation
Before You Start
Tanya: These pictures of your vacation in Petra are fantastic. I really want to go
there.
Meryl: Yes, you really must start traveling you never go anywhere!
Tanya: Well, you can travel all over the world and not work. I have to work.
I must pay the rent and eat before I do anything else.
Meryl: Thats true, but start saving money for a vacation. Traveling is a "must."
Tanya: Well, maybe I can go to Petra in May, after I save enough money.
Meryl: Ah, but this year the holy fast of Ramadan is in May. During this
month, Moslems mustn't eat, drink, or smoke during the day.
Tanya: And tourists?
Meryl: Tourists mustn't eat, drink, or smoke in public places.
Tanya: That's too difficult for me. I don't have to go in May I can go in
June.
2 Quartet 2
U N I T
1. f
__ Tanya must go to Petra.
2. __ Tanya must work.
3. __ Meryl thinks that Tanya must start saving money for a vacation.
4. __ Meryl thinks that Tanya has to start traveling.
5. __ Tanya has to go to Petra in May.
6. __ During Ramadan, tourists mustnt eat or drink in public.
7. __ Moslems mustnt eat at all during Ramadan.
8. __ Meryl has to change her travel plans.
B Choose the correct definition for each sign.
1 2 3
4 5 6
a. You mustnt smoke. e. You mustnt pick the flowers.

b. You mustn't feed the camels. f. You mustnt drive faster than 40
c. You mustn't climb this mountain. miles (64 kilometers) an hour.
d. You mustnt turn left.
3 Quartet 2
U N I T
Some Grammar
Modals - have to / has to & must - obligation
Meryl has to work to pay the rent.

We have to save money for the vacation.
You and your friends must pay the tour guide.
Tanya must send a postcard to her parents.
We dont have to leave until 10 p.m.
Pedro doesn't have to get up early tomorrow morning.
You must not / mustn't feed the camels.
Tourists must not / mustn't take pictures inside the
mosque.
Positive sentences:
We use have to/has to or must to talk about things that are necessary or
that we have an obligation to do.
Examples:
I must leave now.
I have to see a doctor today.
Must can also be used with the following meanings:
Legal obligations
Example: You must stop at a red light.
Moral obligations
Example: In my culture, I must get my fathers permission before I can marry.
Strong recommendations
Example: You really must see that movie its great!
Negative sentences:
We use must not (mustnt) to say that something is not allowed, not
acceptable, or against the law.
We use dont/doesnt have to when we say that something is not an
obligation.
Examples:
During Ramadan, Moslems mustnt eat during the day.
You dont have to go to Jordan during Ramadan if you don't want to.
4 Quartet 2
U N I T
Some Practice
A Match A to B to make complete sentences.
A B
b
1. ___ There arent any trains to a. you must read about it
Petra. before you go there.
2. ___ You must have a passport b. so you have to drive or go by bus.
3. ___ Petra is in the desert c. has to study for many years.
4. ___ If you want to travel a lot, d. in order to travel outside your
5. ___ You must have a visa country.
6. ___ If you want to have a good e. if you want to drive in Jordan.
time in Petra, f. so people must bring lots of water
7. ___ You must have an with them.
international drivers license g. you must save some money.
8. ___ A person who wants to h. to enter some countries.
become an archeologist
B Choose the best sentence to continue the first sentence.

1. You mustn't drink the water in the market.
a. Buy bottled water.
b. The water in the market is good.
2. You don't have to walk to the entrance of Petra.
a. You must go on camelback.
b. You can hire a donkey.
3. At Petra, you must see the famous Treasury building.
a. It's wonderful!
b. Its not very interesting.
4. You must have a visa to enter Jordan.
a. You can get it when you leave Petra.
b. You should get it before you leave home
5. You must also visit Aqaba.
a. You aren't allowed to leave Jordan before you go there.
b. You can go swimming in the wonderful Red Sea.
5 Quartet 2
U N I T
C Are these laws in your country? Check () yes or no.
Yes No
1. People must pay taxes.
2. People mustn't steal.
3. Children mustnt watch too much television.
4. You must have a drivers license to drive a car.
5. Very ill people must go to a hospital.
6. Children must go to school until they are 16.
7. People must stop working when theyre 65 years old.
8. Teachers mustn't hit children at school.
9. People mustn't smoke.
D Mohammad, Meryl's guide in Petra, said that the sentences

below are "musts" for him. Which ones are a "must" for you?
Everyone must get a good education.

Children must always tell the truth.
People must always go to the doctor if they are ill.
Young people must give their seats to old people on the bus.
Working people must have at least one day a week to rest.
Everyone must learn how to drive a car in the modern world.
Students must never cheat on tests.
I must learn English.
People must be kind and polite to each other.
6 Quartet 2
U N I T
E Make a list of other musts together with a partner. Then share

them with the class.
____________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________
Language Function
Sometimes we use should / shouldnt to give advice and to make

recommendations.
Example: You should visit Petra. It is an amazing place.
We also use expressions such as:

I think you should / shouldnt
Why dont you ...?
Have you ever thought about?
Examples:
I think you should read the travel guide before you go there.
Why dont you wake up early tomorrow and go for a walk?
Have you ever thought about visiting Petra?
7 Quartet 2
U N I T
F Whats your opinion? Here are some problems that different

people have. Choose the answers that you think are best. Then
compare your answers with a partner. Do you agree?
1. Larissa is planning to marry Martin in June. Then she finds out that he
sometimes goes out with his old girlfriend Susan. He says that he doesn't
love Susan; she's just a friend. Larissa is hurt and angry. This is what you
tell her.
You should believe Martin. Marry him and dont worry about Susan.
You mustnt marry Martin. Hes lying to you. An old girlfriend is never just
a friend.
Have you thought about postponing the wedding? Then you can wait
and see what happens.
2. Tanya is friendly with Fabrice. They are not close friends, but they often go
out together. Fabrice is usually nice to Tanya. Then one day, he says
something which isnt so nice. Tanya is upset. This is what you tell her.
Why dont you stop seeing Fabrice? He doesnt seem like a nice person.
You dont have to stop seeing Fabrice, but be careful. You mustnt
become good friends.
You shouldnt see Fabrice anymore because you cant trust him.
Without trust, theres no friendship.
You must talk to Fabrice about your feelings. Listen to what he says.
Then decide about being friends with him.
3. Evan works with Karen. She is a good worker and very friendly. She helped
him on his last project. Evan's boss just told him that part of the project was
not done well. It's the part that Karen worked on. Should he tell his boss?
This is what you tell him.
You shouldnt tell the boss. Your work is usually good and you
can't get into trouble because one project is not perfect. It's not fair to
hurt a fellow worker.
I think you should tell the boss. Why get into trouble because of someone
else's mistake?
Don't tell the boss, but you must never ask for Karen's help again.
8 Quartet 2
U N I T
Something to Read
Read the following advertisement. Does Aqaba sound like a good
place to visit?
Some Words
luxurious refreshed rested scuba diving soak
9 Quartet 2
U N I T
f
1. ___ Petra is good for a long vacation.
2. ___ Its cold in Petra.
3. ___ Aqaba is far away from Europe.
4. ___ The sky is always gray at the Red Sea.
5. ___ You have to spend one week in Jordan in order to have a good
vacation.
B Complete the conversation with the words in the box.
enjoy luxurious rested soak scuba diving
Mr. Tibi: Hello, welcome to the Aqaba Palace Hotel. How can I help you?
Julie: I must find a hotel room for tonight. I missed my plane. Now I have to
wait until tomorrow.
Mr. Tibi: No problem. I have a beautiful, (1) ________ room for you. You can
(2) ________ in the bath and have dinner in our restaurant.
Julie: Fine, fine. I'll take it. How much is it?
Mr. Tibi: And tomorrow you will feel (3) ________ . Then you can
go (4) __________ in the Red Sea. You must also see the Mamluk
Fort.
Julie: Do I have to sign in? Can I have the key?
Mr. Tibi: You should also go on a ride on a glass bottom boat and see all the
beautiful fish. You really should (5) __________ Aqaba!
Julie: No, I must catch a plane from Amman tomorrow!
10 Quartet 2
U N I T
C Are these sentences true or false? For help look at Exercise B.
True False Don't

Know
1. Mr. Tibi likes Aqaba.
2. Julie planned to stay in Aqaba.
3. Julie doesn't like Aqaba.
4. Julie is happy to be in Aqaba.
5. Mr. Tibi wants Julie to miss her plane
to Amman.
6. Julie must be at work tomorrow.
7. The Mamluk Fort is in Aqaba.
D Complete the conversation between Mr. Tibi and Julie.
Mr. Tibi: How can I help you

1. ________________________________________?
Julie: I missed my plane and I need a room for one night.
Mr. Tibi: 2. _________________________________________?
Julie: No, I don't have time.
Mr. Tibi: 3. ________________________________________?
Julie: No, not even in the morning. My plane leaves at 9:30 a.m.
Mr. Tibi: 4. ________________________________________?
Julie: First to Amman and then back to London.
Mr. Tibi: 5. _____________________________________?
Julie: No thanks. I'm not hungry. I just want a bath and a bed.
Mr. Tibi: 6. _________________________
Julie: Thanks and goodnight.
Mr. Tibi: 7. __________________________
11 Quartet 2
U N I T
What Do You Think?
General Information
OFFICIAL NAME: the Hashemite Kingdom of Jordan
CAPITAL: Amman
CLIMATE
April-October:
Amman and Petra have sunny, cloudless weather with warm days and cool evenings. Spring and
summer temperatures range between 60-80 in Amman and Petra. Very light and comfortable
clothing is recommended, preferably cotton for day wear. In Amman and in the desert a sweater is
often needed in the evening, even in the middle of the summer.
November-March:
Chilly with rain (and possibly snow). Temperatures range between 32-60 . Aqaba is a winter resort,
temperatures range between 60-75 . Coats, light raincoats, sweaters, jackets, hats, and gloves are
recommended.
DONT FORGET TO PACK:

good sunglasses and a hat with a visor or brim, prescription drugs, eyesight prescriptions and a
spare pair of glasses, suntan lotion, a good camera and lots of film. You should take an extra battery
for your camera. Dont forget a travel alarm clock, a few plastic bags, decaffinated coffee/tea, and a
first-aid kit. For Petra, we also recommend that you pack your hiking boots.
MONEY MATTERS
The Jordanian dinar (or JD) is divided into 1000 fils (or 100 piasters). The value of the dinar is
approximately $1.40 to a dinar. Dollars can be easily converted at all banks, money-changing
offices, and hotels throughout the country.
Though service charges are included, it is customary to tip to show your appreciation to hotel
personnel and to the guide and driver of your tour. A 10% tip in a restaurant is considered correct.
Answer the questions using the information above.

1. What can you say about the weather in Amman and Petra in the summer?
2. How is it different from your country?
3. What can you say about the weather in Amman and Petra in the winter?
4. How is it different from your country?
5. Look at the Dont Forget list. What would you take if you could carry
only five items? Make a priority list and compare it with your neighbors list.
On Your Own
You are planning to go to Petra for three days in the winter.
Prepare your own list of items you would like to pack. Use the
tips above and add more if needed.
12 Quartet 2
U N I T
PART 2: YESTERDAY AND TODAY

Language Point
used to
Before You Start
Yesterday and Today Jordan
PETRA: Petra used to be a large Nabatean city which controlled the trade
routes of ancient Arabia. Now it is the most popular tourist site in
Jordan.
SALT: Salt used to be the capital of Jordan. Now Amman is the capital.
KAN ZAMAN: This walled village used to be a fortress. Now it is a restaurant
and handicraft center in Amman, Jordan.
JERASH: Jerash used to be a Roman city with a large population and
many beautiful buildings. Now there is a folklore festival there
every July among the ruins.
UM QEIS: This town used to be called Gadara and was once a cultural
center. Now visitors go there to look at the ruins of two theaters.
13 Quartet 2
U N I T
A What town am I talking about?

Um Qeis People used to come to my town from far away to meet with
1. _________
poets and to talk to famous philosophers.
2. _________ In northern Jordan, my city used to have a large population and
beautiful buildings.
3. _________ In my small town, the walls used to protect us from danger.
4. _________ The leaders of the country used to live here.
5. _________ We used to meet all the traders traveling from Africa to Asia.
Now we just meet tourists.
B Complete the conversation with the words in the box.
capital festival folk ruins

control fortress handicrafts
Tanya: Did you visit any other part of Jordan besides Petra?
Meryl: Of course. I spent five days traveling around the country after Petra.
We started in Amman.
Tanya: capital of the country?
Isnt that the (1) ________
Meryl: Yes, and its a nice modern city. From there we traveled north to see
the Castle of Ajloun, a (2) ________ built in 1184. It used to
(3) _______ the entire north Jordan valley. Then we went to Jerash.
What a wonderful place!
Tanya: Whats so special about Jerash?
Meryl: There are (4) ________ there from thousands of years ago as well as
from Greek and Roman times. We walked on the original stone streets.
I want to go back in July.
Tanya: Why? Didnt you see everything?
Meryl: The Jerash (5) _______ is in July. People come from all over the
world to see (6)________ dances by local and international groups and
to go to concerts, plays, and poetry readings, and to buy traditional
(7)_____________.
14 Quartet 2
U N I T
Some Grammar
used to
We write used to talk about things that we usually did in the past but do not
do anymore or to say that something was once true.
We write use to (without the d) in negative statements and questions.
The Nabateans used to live in Petra.

Petra didn't use to be such a popular tourist site.
Did they use to grow corn in the desert?
What did they use to do in the summer?
Salt used to be the capital of Jordan.
Some Practice
A Meryl and Tanya are in a Middle Eastern restaurant. Match
Tanyas questions in A with Meryls answers in B.
A B
e
1. ____ Where did you stay in a. No, I used to work with him but this
Jordan? time I got my tickets from Terry
2. ____ Do you know any Arabic? Ringer.
b. Tomorrow. I used to have his
3. ____ Did you travel alone? business card in my wallet but I
left it at home.
4. ____ Was Max Worth your travel c. Not any more. I used to know a bit
agent? when I was at University.
d. I dont know. I used to love salads
5. ____ Can you give me Max but lately I only want to eat rice and
Worths phone number, meat.
please? e. In five-star hotels. I used to stay in
6. ____ Why arent you eating your cheaper hotels but not anymore.
salad? f. Yes. I used to travel with friends but
now I dont.
15 Quartet 2
U N I T
B Fill in the blanks with the correct form of the verbs in

parentheses ( ) and use(d) to where appropriate.
1. I ____________ dont remember
used to know (know) some Arabic. I _________________ (not
remember) anything now.
2. Meryl ___________ (travel) with friends. Today she _____________(travel)
alone.
3. I _____________(get up) at 7 am every morning. In the past,
I_____________(sleep) until 10.
4. Petra _____________ (be) a Nabatean city. Now it ____________(be) a
tourist site.
5. What color __________(be) his hair now? It ____________(be) red.
6. ____________ (you live) on Mortimer Street? Yes, I did, but I
___________(move) here three years ago.
7. How ____________(you get) to work every morning? I __________ (walk).
Now I drive.
C Find out about the people in your group. Fill in the chart. Add
other things that some people used to do or that they do now.
never did does now used to do

1. Climb mountains
Name:
2. Play the piano
Name:
3. Play tennis
Name:
4. Ride a camel
Name:
5. Work in a restaurant
Name:
6.
Name:
7.
Name:
8.
Name:
9.
Name:
10.
Name:
16 Quartet 2
U N I T
D Read the text below and answer the questions.
THE DESERT
Picture the Middle East. What do you see? An endless desert with nomads on
camels? Thats all in movies. Theres still a lot of sand there but most people
travel in cars and trucks.
The camel, the "ship of the desert", used to be the primary way for desert people
to move from place to place. The camel was very important for transport, shade
from the hot sun, milk, meat, wool, and hides. These nomads used to move their
tents made of camel skin, their families, and animals from one place to another
and the camel used to carry everything. Today, many of them live in urban and
rural areas and you wont see long lines of camels in a city or village.
These tribes of wandering people used to wear colorful and unique clothing.
Today the young people usually dress the same as everyone else.
1. Why do nomads live in tents?

2. Why were camels so important for the nomads way of life?
17 Quartet 2
U N I T
E Write a definition or explanation of the words below. Use the

text in exercise D.
1. desert a lot of sand
2. nomads __________________________________________________
3. camel _____________________________________________________
4. urban area _________________________________________________
5. rural area __________________________________________________
6. transport __________________________________________________
7. hides _____________________________________________________
8. primary____________________________________________________
F Look at the two pictures below of a place in the desert. They are
the same place, 100 years apart. Describe the differences
between the two pictures.
Used to be Now
There used to be camels. Now there are cars and trucks.
G Make up your own stories. These four people looked different

ten years ago. They had different jobs. They lived in different
places. With your partner, decide what they do now and what
they used to do.
18 Quartet 2
U N I T
H Read the text. Whats in the camels hump?
Some Words
bad-tempered intelligent patient

good-natured motion pay attention
THE TRUTH ABOUT CAMELS
People used to think that the camel was a bad-tempered animal. Actually, theyre
usually good-natured, patient, and intelligent.
People used to think that the camel didnt hear very well because its ears are
small and it often wont pay attention to a command. In fact, the camel has
excellent hearing!
Why do we call the camel the "ship of the desert"? When it walks, the camel
moves both feet on one side of its body, then both feet on the other. This is like
the rolling motion of a boat.
People used to think that a camel didnt have to eat or drink for weeks or months.
Actually, it can be without food or water for only five to seven days.
And whats the hump on the camels back? People used to think the hump was
full of water. In fact, there is no water in the hump. It is fatty tissue for energy
when there is no food.
19 Quartet 2
U N I T
I Are these sentences true or false?

1. t
____ Camels can be very nice to people.
2. ____ Camels carry their own water.
3. ____ Camels hear very well.
4. ____ A camels walk is like the motion of a boat.
5. ____ A camel can eat nothing for about a week.
6. ____ A camel can go without food because it stores energy in its hump.
J Match A to B.
A B
a Hes very bad-tempered today.
1. ___ a. He is in a bad mood and is shouting
at everyone.
2. ___ He is very good-natured. b. Its funny to see the people moving
slowly.
3. ___ Youre not paying attention. c. You didnt hear anything I said.
4. ___ Lets watch that move in slow d. She always has the time to help
motion. him.
5. ___ She is so patient with that e. He always smiles, is friendly, and
customer. helps everyone.
6. ___ That camel is very intelligent. f. I know that it understands
everything we are saying.
K List facts about camels.
FACTS ABOUT CAMELS
Camels are intelligent.

_______________________________ ______________________________
______________________________ ______________________________
______________________________ ______________________________
______________________________ ______________________________
20 Quartet 2
U N I T
Some Fun
A Get into groups of four and follow the instructions for the game.
roup
in y our g
ple u
e ll the peo ing that yo
T th
some nt do
about do but do hy you
to w
used e. Explain
or t.
anym doing i
ed
stopp
Tell a
p
or the artner abo
o ut you
about ther peop rs
. le you elf
know
about
d iffe re nt partner
Tell a ther
rs elf an d about o
you .
o p le in the group
pe
After y
ou hea
five pe r
ople, t about at leas
you kn ell t
ow abo the class w
ut them hat
.
.
r classmates
Listen to you ard
an y of the facts you he
Did
change?
21 Quartet 2
U N I T
B Fill in the missing words and complete the crossword puzzle.
1 2
M A R R I E D
1
R
3 1
R
4 5 1
R
1
R
6 1
R
7 1 1
R R
1
R
81 1 1 9
R R R
10
11
Across
1. married
He used to be _____________ . Now hes divorced.
5. She used to read a lot. Now she _____________ television.
7. He used to eat meat. Now hes a _____________ .
8. She used to be very _____________ . Now shes often ill.
10. He used to be fat. Now, hes _____________ .
11. She used to save money. Now she _____________ a lot.
Down
2. Computers used to be _____________ . Now theyre much cheaper.
3. It used to be a kitten. Now, its a _____________ .
4. She used to go to work by bus. Now she _____________ .
6. She used to be weak. Now shes _____________ .
9. He used to be _____________ . Now hes old.
22 Quartet 2
U N I T
On Your Own
Make a list of things you used to do that you dont do any more.
Example: I used to watch a lot of television, but I dont watch much television
now. I dont have time.
What Did You Learn?

Facts:
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
Words:
Word Meaning
23 Quartet 2
U N I T
Language points:
Modals: have to
Modals: has to
Modals: must
used to
Crossword Answers
1 2
M A R R I E D
1
R
X
3 1
C R
P
4 5 1
D W A T C H E
R S
1
R T R
N
6 1
I S R
S
7 1 1
V E G E T
R A R RI A N
1
E R R
V
81 1 1 9
S O R E
H R A
R L T H Y
10
T H I N O
G U
11
S P E N D S
G
24 Quartet 2
U N I T
2
Another Old Site Pompeii
U N I T
PART 1: WHERE SHOULD I GO?

Language Point
Modals for advice: should, shouldnt
Before You Start
Gustav: Im going to Italy this summer.

Jania: Ah, you should visit Pompeii. Its a fascinating place.
Gustav: Whats so special about Pompeii?
Jania: The city looks exactly as it did in 79 AD when a volcano erupted.
The ashes from the volcano kept the city exactly as it was
back then. You should go into some of the houses. You can even
see burned loaves of bread and house keys.
Gustav: How exciting! Is there anything that I shouldnt miss?
Jania: You should definitely see the Circus Maximus. They had all of
the chariot races there. And the ancient baths are really amazing. The
Romans had a wonderful lifestyle!
Gustav: Whats the weather like in Pompeii during the summer?
Jania: Its very hot during the day and cold at night. You should bring warm
clothes to wear in the evening, but dont forget the suntan lotion for
the daytime!
26 Quartet 2
U N I T
t
1. _____ A volcano erupted in Pompeii in 62 AD.
2. _____ The weather in Pompeii is always hot.
3. _____ The people of Pompeii had chariot races in the Circus Maximus.
4. _____ Gustav went to Pompeii last summer.
5. _____ Pompeii looks the same as it did 2,000 years ago.
B What should Gustav do in Pompeii? Check () all the things

that Jania talked about.
He should bring warm clothes to Pompeii for the evening.

1. _____
2. _____ He should visit the Colosseum.
3. _____ He should see the ancient baths.
4. _____ He should bring suntan lotion.
5. _____ He should see the volcano.
6. _____ He should see the chariot races.
27 Quartet 2
U N I T
Some Grammar
Modals should / shouldnt
I, You, it, Gustav should drink water.
We, They, It, The tourist shouldnt stay in the sun for too long.
Yes / no questions
Should he, we, Gustav visit the Circus Maximus?
Shouldnt I, they, you, Jania wear shorts?
Wh- questions
Why should they, he, we, Gustav and Jania visit Pompeii?
What shouldnt I, she, they bring on my trip?
When we give advice, we tell people what they should or shouldnt do or

how they should or shouldnt do it.
Examples: You should take a long vacation.
The children shouldnt go outside without putting on
suntan lotion.
When we ask for advice, we ask people what we should do and how we
should do it. When we ask for advice we usually use a question.
Example:
Should I bring warm clothes?
28 Quartet 2
U N I T
Some Practice
A Decide if the person is asking for or giving advice. Check ( )

the correct response. How do you know?
asking giving
1. You should take walking shoes with you.
2. You should use suntan lotion to protect your skin.
3. You should leave the area before it gets dark.
4. Should I leave my passport in the hotel room?
5. You shouldnt leave your passport in the hotel room.
6. Should we contact the tourist information center?
7. Should I buy bottled water?
B Rewrite the sentences below using should or shouldnt.

Example: Its a good idea to read about Pompeii before you go there.
You should read about Pompeii before you go there.
1. Why dont you stay at the Pompeii Seasons? Its a nice hotel.
2. Its not a good idea to drink the tap water in Italy.
3. Dont forget to bring a tourist guide.
4. Its a good idea to learn some Italian before your trip.
5. Its a good idea to eat pasta in Italy.
C Check () the statements that you agree with. Compare your

answers with your partner. Discuss your reasons.
Everyone should travel.
1. ___
2. ___ When you visit a new country, you should learn about the local
culture and history.
3. ___ When people travel, they should visit ancient sites.
4. ___ When you go to Italy, you should see Pompeii.
5. ___ Before you visit a new country, you should learn a little bit of the
language.
6. ___ When you visit a new place, you should meet some of the people
who live there.
29 Quartet 2
U N I T
D Complete the following passage using should or shouldnt.
Dear Ron,
Im glad to hear that youre traveling to Europe this summer. I travel to

Europe often, and Id be happy to give you some advice.
shouldnt
Since youll be carrying your knapsack, you (1) ______________ bring
too many clothes with you. You wont need much, believe me. However,
you (2) ____________ bring clothes for both warm weather and cold
weather. The weather can be very hot or very cold.
You (3) ________________ spend extra money flying from city to city.
You (4) __________ take the train. Its the cheapest, fastest way to
travel.
If you go to Italy, you (5) ______________ visit both Rome and

Pompeii. Theyre both fascinating places. Italy is my favorite country in
Europe.
Oh, and you (6) ______________ take a camera!
Good luck and have fun!

Mona
30 Quartet 2
U N I T
E What is the best advice? Explain your reasons to a partner.

Example:
Melvin wants to travel around the world, but he doesnt have
enough money.
He should borrow money from the bank. Its important to travel. He

can work hard next year and pay back the money.
1. Melvin wants to travel around the world, but he doesnt have enough money.
He should borrow money from the bank.
He should work hard.
He should forget about traveling.
2. Henrietta wants to go to Italy, but she doesnt have a friend to go with her.
All of her friends have to work.
She should go by herself.
She should go with a group from a tourist agency.
She should forget about going to Italy.
3. Marina wants to study archeology, but her parents want her to study
medicine.
She should become an archeologist.
She should study medicine.
She should try to explain her feelings to her parents.
4. Your Italian friend wants to learn English.

He / She should travel to an English-speaking country.
He / She should read books in English.
He / She should take a course.
31 Quartet 2
U N I T
F Read the letter and write a short note giving advice.
Dear Margaret,
I have a problem that I hope you can help

me with. I studied archeology at the
University. When I graduated, I got a great
job in a museum. I really love the job.
Recently, I got an offer to go to Italy for two
months on an archeological dig. Its the
chance of a lifetime. The problem is, Ill
have to give up my job if I go.
What should I do?
Confused
32 Quartet 2
U N I T
Something to Read
Some Words
conquer vacation resort survivor
entertainment lava volcano
erupt rediscover wealthy
The History of Ancient Pompeii

The Oscans, an ancient group of people, built Pompeii in about 600 BC. The
Romans conquered it about five hundred years later in 80 BC. Pompeii soon
became a vacation resort for wealthy Romans. When they wanted a vacation
away from the heat of Rome, they went to Pompeii because it was close to the
sea.
In 62 AD, a terrible earthquake Pompeii. It destroyed the city but the survivors
rebuilt it. In 79 AD, a second earthquake hit Pompeii. Mount Vesuvius, a volcano
nearby, erupted, and the lava completely covered Pompeii. More than 2,000
people died there, but most of the wealthy people were not in Pompeii then. The
city stayed untouched for more than 1,600 years.
In 1748 archeologists rediscovered Pompeii. The city was exactly as it was in
79 AD. They learned a lot about the people there. They learned about their
homes, their food, and what they did for entertainment.
Today, around 2 million tourists visit Pompeii every year and can see the remains
of ancient Roman life.
33 Quartet 2
U N I T
Some Practice
f
1. _____ The Romans built Pompeii.
2. _____ Pompeii became a vacation resort for wealthy Romans.
3. _____ Mount Vesuvius erupted in 90 AD.
4. _____ At least 2,000 people died in Pompeii.
5. _____ The Romans conquered Pompeii in 80 BC.
1. Why did the Romans go on vacation to Pompeii?
2. When did archeologists rediscover Pompeii?
3. What do archeologists know about the Romans and Pompeii?
C Arrange the sentences in the correct order.
3
a. _____ It became a vacation resort for wealthy Romans.
b. _____ The lava from the volcano destroyed Pompeii.
c. _____ Mount Vesuvius erupted.
d. _____ Archeologists rediscovered Pompeii in 1748.
e. _____ The Romans conquered Pompeii.
f. _____ The Oscans built Pompeii.
g. _____ Many people died.
34 Quartet 2
U N I T
D Match the words in A to the definitions in B.

A B
1. g
___ to erupt a. a place where people often go
2. ___ resort for vacations
3. ___ to conquer b. things that amuse or interest people
4. ___ to rediscover c. to find again
5. ___ entertainment d. the hot melted rock that comes
6. ___ lava out of a volcano
7. ___ volcano e. to win a war
8. ___ wealthy f. rich
9. ___ survivor g. to explode
h. a mountain that sometimes
explodes
i. a person who is still alive
What Do You Think?
A Answer the following questions about The History of Ancient

Pompeii.
1. Where do you think this text is from?
2. Do you like to visit ancient sites? Why or why not?
3. For how long did Pompeii lay hidden until it was rediscovered in 1748?
B What do you know about the natural disasters in the pictures

below? Give an example of a disaster that you know about.
hurricane forest fire earthquake flood
35 Quartet 2
U N I T
C With a partner, choose one of the natural disasters in exercise B.

Make a list of at least five things that you think you should do
during a disaster of this kind.
Example: During a flood, you should try to climb as high up as possible.
On Your Own
Find out about an ancient site and write a report about it. Your
report should contain answers to the following questions.
1. Where is the site?
2. What can people see there?
3. Who lived there?
4. When did people live there?
36 Quartet 2
U N I T
PART 2: MORE ABOUT POMPEII

Language Point
Connectors of Contrast: even though, although, though, but
Before You Start
Florence: This is Florence Yargo, reporting live from Pompeii. Im talking to

Guido Palmero, a local tour guide. Guido, tell us about Pompeii.
Is it still the way it used to be?
Guido: Well, Florence, though we try hard to take care of the ruins, it isnt
as nice as it used to be.
Florence: Why is that?
Guido: We have many tourists every year. Even though most of them
respect the site, they still cause damage to the ruins.
Florence: What about the weather?
Guido: The weather also damages the ruins, although it takes a long
time for this to happen.
Florence: What are you doing about the problem?
Guido: Its difficult, but there is a solution. Were repairing the damage.
We want the ruins to stay as nice as possible.
Florence: Great, Guido! I hope it goes well. Thank you for talking to us.
37 Quartet 2
U N I T
Correct these sentences.

Example: Florence Yargo is a tour guide.
Florence Yargo is a reporter. Guido Palmero is a tour guide.
1. Pompeii is not damaged.

2. Tourists and earthquakes damaged the ruins at Pompeii.
3. There is no solution to the problem at Pompeii.
4. The workers at Pompeii are painting the ruins.
Some Grammar
Connectors of Contrast
We had a nice trip. It was cold.

We had a nice trip even though/although/though it was cold.
Even though/although/though it was cold, we had a nice trip.
We were very tired. We continued dancing.

We were very tired but we continued dancing.
We use Connectors of Contrast to show a difference or contrast between

two ideas.
Connectors of Contrast link two ideas.
The clause with although or even though can come first or second in the
sentence.
Examples:
Even though the trip was expensive, we still decided to go.
We decided to go even though the trip was expensive.
But always comes at the beginning of the second clause.

Example:
I like Pompeii, but I prefer Rome.
38 Quartet 2
U N I T
Some Practice
A Match A to B to complete the sentences about Pompeii.
A B
1. c We had a wonderful vacation,
___ a. although it was dangerous.
2. ___ We wanted to visit Pompeii, b. we decided to rent a car and drive.
3. ___ There was an earthquake in c. even though it was too short.
62 AD, d. although the city was not completely
4. ___ Some people remained in destroyed until 79 AD.
Pompeii, e. and no one lived there again.
5. ___ Pompeii was completely f. but we didnt have enough time to
destroyed, go there.
6. ___ Even though there is a very
quick bus to Pompeii from
Rome,
B Where is the contrast? Put the connector in the correct place so

that the sentences make sense. Remember to use capital letters
where necessary.
Although we take care of the city, ______ it still doesnt look nice
1. ________
(although)
2. _______ there is damage to the buildings, ______ we do have a solution.
(though)
3. _______ I work in Pompeii, ______ I live in Rome. (but)
4. _______ the weather damages the buildings, _______this doesnt happen
straight away. (even though)
5. _______ we are repairing the buildings, ___________they wont be as good
as they were in the past. (although)
39 Quartet 2
U N I T
C Choose the best ending for each sentence.
1. Although I travel all over the world,
a. I enjoy traveling.
b. my favorite country is Italy.
2. Even though archeologists know a lot about life in ancient Rome,
a. they still dont know everything.

b. they know how the ancient Romans lived.
3. Although an earthquake hit Pompeii in 62 AD,
a. the volcano erupted in 79 BC.

b. the the city was only destroyed in 79 AD.
4. Archeologists rediscovered Pompeii in 1748,
a. although it was there for more than 1500 years.

b. although many tourists now visit the city.
5. Although Pompeii was a vacation resort for wealthy Romans,
a. most of the wealthy people were not there when the volcano erupted.
b. they liked it because it was next to the sea.
6. Even though we enjoyed our vacation in Italy,
a. we want to go again next year.

b. it was good to get back home.
40 Quartet 2
U N I T
D Imagine that you went on vacation to Italy last summer. Your

partner wants to find out about your trip by asking the questions
below. Answer using although / even though. Then swap roles.
Example: How was the trip to Italy?
The trip was OK, although it rained a lot.
1. Did you have fun in Italy?
2. Did you like the hotel?
3. Was the weather nice?
4. Did you enjoy the food in Italy?
5. Was Pompeii interesting?
E Complete these sentences and compare your answers with a

partner. Discuss your reasons.
1. Although I want to travel, ____________________________ .
2. My favorite place to visit is ____________________________ , even though
____________________________ .
3. Though I like ____________________________ , ____________________.
4. Although I learned a lot about Pompeii in this chapter,
________________________ .
5. Though I want to learn English, ____________________________ .
6. Even though some people say _______________________ is a waste of
time, I ______________________________ .
7. I want to ________________________ , but _____________________ .
41 Quartet 2
U N I T
Language In Use
Sonia: I have two weeks vacation in June. Lets go to Italy. Its supposed
to be a beautiful country.
Michaela: Id love to, but I have to work in June.
Sonia: You havent had a vacation this year. Why dont you ask for time off?
Michaela: I have vacation time, but I cant really go on a vacation.

Theres nobody to take care of my dog.
Sonia: My daughter will take care of your dog. She loves animals.
Michaela: Thats a good idea, but I dont really have the money
to travel right now.
Sonia: It sounds like youre making excuses. Whats the real reason you
dont want to go to Italy?
Michaela: Well, the truth is that Im afraid to get on an airplane!
42 Quartet 2
U N I T
t
1. _____ Sonia wants to go to Italy with Michaela.
2. _____ Michaela has already had a vacation this year.
3. _____ Michaela is afraid to get on an airplane.
4. _____ Sonias daughter doesnt like dogs.
5. _____ Michaela has a dog.
6. _____ Michaela says that she doesnt have the money to travel.
Language Function
We make an excuse when we dont really want to do something or to defend
our behavior. We use words and expressions like:
but
because
Im sorry but I cant
Id love to but
Im afraid I really should.instead of
Some Practice
A Check ( ) the sentences that are excuses.
1.

___ Im late because I missed the bus.
2. ___ I dont want to go to Rome.
3. ___ Id love to meet you at the Colosseum but I dont have time.
4. ___ I cant walk around Rome with you because my legs hurt.
5. ___ I cant go to Italy right now because I dont have any money.
6. ___ Im really tired. I think Ill go back to the hotel and sleep for a while.
43 Quartet 2
U N I T
B Match the invitations in A with the excuses in B.
A B
c
1. ___ Do you want to go to the a. Id love to, but I have to work this
Circus Maximus with me? summer.
2. ___ Would you like to go to Italy b. If only I could. Im afraid Im busy
this summer? tonight.
3. ___ Im eating dinner at the c. Im sorry but I have to take the
Pompeii Seasons tonight. children to the museum.
Would you like to come? d. Thank you, but I dont feel well.
4. ___ Do you want to get the bus e. Id like to go with you but I never
to Rome with me? travel on buses.
5. ___ Would you like to eat at the
Pompeii Caf with me?
C Read the following situations and write sentences making

excuses. Use Im sorry butId like to butI cant because.
Example: You were late for your lesson.

Im sorry that I was late, but I had car trouble.
1. You arent in the mood to go out.

2. You dont really want to travel with your friend this summer.
3. You accepted a dinner invitation a long time ago, but you heard that
someone you dont like will be there.
4. You forgot to pay someone for the shirt that he bought you in Europe.
44 Quartet 2
U N I T
D Invite your partner to the places below using the questions.

You may add your own questions as well. Your partner
must make up excuses explaining why he or she cant go.
Example: Do you want to see a movie about Pompeii?

I dont have my glasses with me, so I cant go to a movie.
1. There is a tour of Rome at 2:00 pm. Do you want to go?
2. Do you want to have dinner at the spaghetti restaurant?
3. I am going on a hike this afternoon. Do you want to come?
4. My aunt and uncle live just outside Rome. Do you want to meet them?
5. Do you want to go shopping? The clothes in Italy are beautiful.
E Pick one of the situations in exercise D and role-play a

conversation. Try to convince your partner to do the activity.
Your partner must think of as many excuses as possible for
saying no. Use the conversation in Before You Start as an
example.
45 Quartet 2
U N I T
Some Fun
Fill in the missing words and complete the crossword puzzle.
Across
3. Another word for rich is _______________ .
7. Another word for very old is _______________ .
8. The __________ built Pompeii.
9. The Romans ______________ Pompeii in 80 BC.
10. TV, plays, shows, and concerts are kinds of __________.
Down
1. To find something again is to _______ it.
2. Mount Vesuvius is this type of mountain.
4. A place to relax is called a _______________ .
5. This comes out of a volcano: _______________
6. A person who visits places around the world is called a
__________________ .
46 Quartet 2
U N I T
On Your Own
Write a short note to a friend, making an excuse. Explain as

nicely as possible why you cant come to an event. Below are
some examples of events that you could use.
his/her wedding
a dinner party
a birthday party
What Did You Learn?
Facts:
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
47 Quartet 2
U N I T
Words:
Word Meaning
Language points:
Modals: should, shouldn't
Contrast Clauses
Crossword Answers
48 Quartet 2
U N I T
3
Legends
U N I T
PART 1: ABOUT LEGENDS

Language Point
Relative Clauses
Before You Start
Sylvia: Excuse me, I wonder if you can help me. Are you the man who is the
expert on African legends?
Ngaida: Yes, Im the storyteller. Do you want to hear a legend?
Sylvia: Id love to. But first, can you tell me a little bit about these legends?
Ngaida: Of course. Many African stories explain the world around us and try to
teach us something.
Sylvia: What types of characters can you find in these legends?
Ngaida: A lot of the stories talk about animals that have human qualities. They
can speak, and they have emotions. Often the stories have evil
characters who are like the characters in legends and myths from all
over the world. Remember the evil stepmother in the Cinderella story?
And the wicked witch in Hansel and Gretel?
Sylvia: Oh yes. I remember those stories from my childhood. Do you
have a favorite legend?
Ngaida: There is one story which I think is wonderful. Its about a snake
whose pride almost ruined him. Maybe Ill tell it to you later
50 Quartet 2
U N I T
1. t
____ Many African legends talk about nature.
2. ____ The Cinderella story is an African legend.
3. ____ Africa is the only country in the world that has legends.
4. ____ There are evil characters in many legends.
5. ____ African legends never talk about animals.
Some Grammar
Relative Clauses
I know a man who loves to tell stories.

There is one story which / that is wonderful.
I spoke to a tourist whose name is Sylvia.
Relative Clauses add information to the sentence. They give information

about a noun (person, animal, place, thing).
Relative Clauses that begin with who describe people.

Example: I know a storyteller who lives nearby.
Relative Clauses that begin with which describe animals and things.
Example: This is a legend which comes from Africa.
Sometimes, the word that can replace who and which.

Example: There are many stories that teach us something.
Relative Clauses that begin with whose show possession. Whose replaces
his, her, or their in a Relative Clause. It can also replace its, when referring
to things.
Example: Theres a man here whose stories are interesting.
When the relative pronoun (who / which) is the the object of the Relative
Clause, we can leave it out. Notice that there is a noun (or pronoun)
between the relative pronoun and the verb in the Relative Clause.
Example: Theres the storyteller who I know.
= Theres the storyteller I know.
51 Quartet 2
U N I T
Some Practice
A Complete the sentences below by underlining the correct word in

parentheses ( ).
1. Ngaida is a storyteller (which, who) lives in Africa.
2. There are many African legends (which, who) are about animals.
3. There were many trees (that, who) died.
4. This story is about a snake (whose, who) legs were taken away.
5. Sylvia is a tourist (which, who) loves to hear stories.
6. I know a legend (who, that) is very interesting.
7. I met a man (which, whose) job is storytelling.
B Put a check () next to the sentences where who or that can be

left out.
Sylvia is the tourist who I talked to today.
1. ____
2. ____ There are many people who listen to his stories.
3. ____ This is the village that we visited on our last vacation to Africa.
4. ____ The story that hes going to tell me is "How the Snake Lost His
Legs."
5. ____ There are thousands of people who travel to Africa every year.
6. ____ Hes the man who told me about legends.
52 Quartet 2
U N I T
C Choose the correct ending to the sentences.
1. Legends are stories

a. that are passed down from generation to generation.
b. who teach us about nature.
2. "Cinderella" is a legend
a. which talks about a beautiful young girl and her evil stepmother.
b. who has a happy ending.
3. There are many storytellers

a. which enjoy talking about legends.
b. who live in Africa.
4. In many legends, there are witches

a. who do evil things.
b. which can fly.
5. There are many legends

a. which try to explain something about the world.
b. who talk about nature.
6. Sylvia is the friend

a. which visited Africa.
b. whose book of legends I borrowed.
53 Quartet 2
U N I T
D Connect the sentences using who, which, whose, and that.

Example: This is a book of old stories.
These old stories come from Africa.
This is a book of old stories that/which come from Africa.
1. In Europe there are many legends about wolves.

These wolves live in the forest.
2. He told us a story about a snake.

The snake used to have legs.
3. Snow White is a story about a beautiful girl.

Her stepmother was evil.
4. Snow White met seven dwarfs.

The seven dwarfs brought her to their house.
5. There is a storyteller in this village.

His stories are interesting.
6. Rapunzel lived in a tall tower.

The tower didnt have any windows.
E Complete the following sentences. Give your own opinion.

Example: I enjoy stories that
I enjoy stories that have happy endings.
1. Countries that have many legends
2. Animals that can talk
3. Africa is a country that
4. People who like to tell stories
5. People who like snakes
54 Quartet 2
U N I T
F Look at the picture and read the poem. Then write your own
poem.
This is the house

That Jack built.
This is the kitchen

That is in the house
That Jack built.
This is the cook

Who cooks in the kitchen
That is in the house
That Jack built.
55 Quartet 2
U N I T
Something to Read
Some Words
ran away frightened proud / pride
evil magical slid
How the Snake Lost His Legs*

Long ago in the land of Africa, the moon looked into the future and saw that there
wouldnt be any rain that year. She told all of the people, birds, and animals that
the area was going to turn into a desert. Because the moon had magical
powers, everyone believed her. They became frightened and ran away. Only the
snake stayed.
At that time, the snake had legs like all the other animals. But the snake was
proud, and wanted to stay in his home. "I am not worried," he said. "I have
strong legs and I can walk for miles. I can leave whenever I want."
Many days passed and there was no rain. The trees began to die and the land
became dry. The snake decided that it was time to leave. He began a long, long
journey through the dry desert. After a while, he became tired and hot and he
couldnt walk anymore. He fell to his knees. He begged the moon to help him get
through the desert. "I am not an evil creature," he said. "I dont deserve to die
alone in the desert." He promised that he would never be proud again. The moon
looked down at the snake and felt sorry for him. She took away the snakes legs,
and the snake slid through the sand and crossed the desert easily.
The snake never walked on two legs again, and from that day on he gave up his
pride.
* When animals are pets or have human characteristics, we can use he, she, and
who.
56 Quartet 2
U N I T
Some Practice
t
1. ____ The snake was very proud.
2. ____ The snake left with the other animals.
3. ____ The moon took away the snakes legs.
4. ____ After the snake lost his legs, he was still proud.
5. ____ The moon felt sorry for the snake.
1. What did the moon see in the future?

2. Why did everyone believe the moon?
3. Why did the snake stay behind?
4. When did the snake decide to leave?
5. Did the snake finally cross the desert? How?
C Match the words in A to their meanings in B.
A B
c
1. ____ slid a. trip
2. ____ proud b. very bad
3. ____ evil c. moved smoothly
4. ____ journey d. afraid
5. ____ frightened e. with special powers
6. ____ magical f. thinking too much of yourself
57 Quartet 2
U N I T
What Do You Think?
A Answer the questions below about the legend How the Snake
Lost His Legs.
1. What does the story try to teach us?

2. How do you know that this story is an African legend?
3. In your opinion, why is the main character in this legend a snake?
4. Can you think of a different title for the legend?
5. Are there any legends about animals in your culture?
B Write at least three sentences giving a new ending to the story.

Share your ending with your partner.
C With a partner, continue the conversation with Ngaida about the

story How the Snake Lost His Legs. Ask the questions below,
or add your own.
Interviewer: Hi, Ngaida. I really enjoyed the story "How the Snake Lost
His Legs." Can I ask you some questions?
Ngaida: Of course.
1. What is a legend?
2. Why is this story a legend?
3. Why is "How the Snake Lost His Legs" your favorite legend?
4. Do you know who wrote this story?
5. Do you think the snake is an evil character?
6. What does the story try to teach us?
58 Quartet 2
U N I T
On Your Own
Choose one of the topics and write your own African legend.
Your story should explain something in nature.
1. What causes rain/clouds/thunder and lightning?
2. Why do elephants have trunks?
3. Why do zebras have stripes?
4. Where does the sun / the moon come from?
59 Quartet 2
U N I T
PART 2: URBAN LEGENDS

Language Point
Present Passive
Before You Start
Dana: Good morning, Professor Tranter. Id like to start my

assignment on urban legends, and I have some questions.
Professor Tranter: What do you want to know?
Dana: What exactly are urban legends?
Professor Tranter: They are stories that are told over and over again. They are
always said to be true by the people who tell them, but they
are usually not true. They usually begin with "a friend of a
friend told me that"
60 Quartet 2
U N I T
3
Dana: Those stories always sound too crazy to be true.
Professor Tranter: Exactly, although they are based on things that

really happened. Like most legends, they help people to
understand the rules and values of society. Often, they are
about things that are feared by the people in a society.
Dana: Can you give me an example, Professor?
Professor Tranter: No problem. Several years ago, many New Yorkers bought
alligators as pets. They later set them free because they
were too difficult to take care of. These alligators went into
the sewer system, and grew larger and larger. Now
theyre living under the city
Dana: Stop, Professor, youre scaring me!
Professor Tranter: But the story is true, I promise! A friend of a friend told it to
me.
True False
1. Dana is one of Professor Tranters students.

2. Most urban legends are true.
3. Alligators live in the sewers of New York City.
4. Urban legends help people understand their
society.
5. Urban legends are about things that are
enjoyed by all the people in a society.
6. Professor Tranter believes the story he told
Dana.
61 Quartet 2
U N I T
Some Grammar
Present Passive
BE Past
present Participle
I am told that the story is true.
The Professor / is asked many questions every day.
He / She
Urban legends / are repeated many times
They
I m not, am not taught by Professor Tranter.
He / She isnt asked to tell stories very often.
These stories arent printed in books.
Am I taught by Professor Tranter?
Is he liked by his students?
Are these legends written in a book?
Where are these legends told today?
Why is that story believed by everyone?
Note:
1. The past participle of regular verbs ends in -ed, like the past tense.
2. The past participle of irregular verbs is often different from the past tense.
See page 167 for a list of irregular verbs.
We use the Passive when the action is more important than the person who
does it.
Example: Urban legends are told in every culture.
We usually use the Present Passive to talk about processes.
Example: Stories are first written by authors and then are sent to a
publisher.
We dont need to say who did the action if it is clear or unimportant.
Example: In my neighborhood, mail is delivered at 8:00 am.
62 Quartet 2
U N I T
Some Practice
A Fill in the missing words. Use the positive or negative form of
am, is, or are.
are told over and over again.
1. Urban legends ______
2. In an urban legend, very often, someone who breaks a social rule _____
punished.
3. Baby alligators ______ kept as pets anymore.
4. Many of societys values _____ explained through legends.
5. Urban legends ______ usually told to small children. Children prefer fairy
tales.
B What is your opinion? Check ( ) yes or no. Compare your

answers with a partner. Explain your answers.
yes no
People are sometimes hurt by urban legends.
Even today, ancient legends are told more often than urban
legends.
Urban legends are enjoyed by everyone.
Urban legends are forgotten very quickly.
Urban legends are repeated too often. They are a waste of time.
C Complete the passage below with the verbs in the box. Use the
Present Passive.
pass down repeat replace teach tell write
Are urban legends similar to the ancient legends we all know and love? Both
are told
types of legends (1) ___________ in every society in the world. Although ancient
legends (2) _______________ from generation to generation, urban legends
usually dont last very long. They (3) ___________________ for a short period of
time, and then they (4) _____________________ by new ones. Although ancient
legends (5) _____ usually ___________ down, urban legends are mostly oral. In
both types of legends, we (6) ______________ something about the values of
our society. This is the main purpose of all legends.
63 Quartet 2
U N I T
D Rewrite the passage using the passive wherever possible.

First an unusual event occurs. It surprises and scares people. The newspaper
writes about the event. The television broadcasts a story about the event. An
author writes a book about the event. A moviemaker makes a movie about the
event. Everyone adds new "facts." In the end, people create a legend.
E Read the notices found on the notice board of The School of

Legends. In groups, answer the questions. Tell the class.
64 Quartet 2
U N I T
Language In Use
Secretary: Birchland College, how can I help you?
Dana: Hello. Im calling to get some information about a course that I

read about. Its called "Ancient and Modern Legends."
Secretary: Oh, yes. Thats a fascinating course. Its only offered this term.
Dana: Can you tell me who teaches the course?
Secretary: The course is taught by Professor Tranter.
Dana: Do you have any idea if the course is offered in the evenings?
Secretary: No, only during the day. Its on Mondays and Wednesdays
from 2:00 - 4:00 pm.
Dana: Could you give me some information about enrolling in the

course?
Secretary: Certainly. You can register in the main office any morning between
9:00 am and 12:00 pm.
Dana: Thank you very much for your help.
Secretary: Youre welcome. Enjoy the course!
A Make the following sentences true.

Example: Dana wants information about a professor at Birchland College.
Dana wants information about a course at Birchland College.
1. The course that Dana wants to study is offered in the evenings.

2. The course "Ancient and Modern Legends" is taught by the secretary.
3. The course is on Friday afternoons from 3:00 - 6:00 pm.
4. Dana has to register for the course in the History Department.
5. The secretary thinks that "Ancient and Modern Legends" is a boring course.
65 Quartet 2
U N I T
Language Function
Here are some of the expressions you can use to get information.
Can / Could you tell me if / when

I'd like to know if/when
Do you have any idea if/when
Could you give me some information about
I need / I'd like to get some information about.
Some Practice
A Check () whether the person is asking for information or giving

information.
asking giving
1. Do you know which legends we are going to talk
about in this course?

2. Dr. Tranter is available at 2:00 pm today.
3. A famous author wrote this story.
4. Could you tell me if this is the History Department?
5. The course begins on September 7.
6. Do you have any idea if every legend has a happy
ending?
7. I wonder if you could tell me what the difference is
between an ancient legend and a modern one.
66 Quartet 2
U N I T
B What do you think is the best place or way to get information

about the subjects below? Explain your answer to your partner.
Example:
facts about ancient mythology for a school assignment
Look in an encyclopedia because it has a lot of information in one place.
1. information about a course that interests you
2. the latest urban legend
3. an ancient legend called "How the Elephant Got His Tusks"
4. an article called "Urban Legends: Are They True?"
C Read the advertisement from The School of Legends and

interview a candidate.
Needed urgently:
AN ACTOR
WHO CAN TELL LEGENDS
Daily performances are required.
Loud and pleasant voice is needed.
Immediate availability!
Call Nick at 555-3389
Use the cues below to ask questions:

previous experience in acting
knowledge of legends
availability
voice training
contact with audience/fear of audience
flexibility in changing the program
67 Quartet 2
U N I T
Some Fun
A Do you know who these people are? Use the answers in the box.
Aesop Peter Pan

Cinderella Rip Van Winkle
Daphne Robin Hood
Example:
Cinderella
Who was the poor girl who married a prince? ________________.
1. Who was the man who slept for twenty years? ________________.
2. Who was the boy who never grew up? ________________.
3. Who was the girl in Greek mythology who became a tree? ____________.
4. Which Greek philsopher wrote stories about animals who can talk?
________________.
5. Who was the hero who stole money from rich people and gave it to the
poor? ________________.
68 Quartet 2
U N I T
B Complete the crossword puzzle using the clues below.

1 2
51
R
6
Across
3. Another word for trip is _______ .
4. This woman might be married to your father, but she is not your mother.
6. Another word for "take the place of" is _______ .
8. Another word for very bad is _________ .
9. Another word for an old story that teaches us something is ______ .
Down
1. Another word for afraid is _____ .
2. Another word for legend is _______ .
5. Witches and wizards have _____ powers.
7. If you do something well, you feel _______ .
69 Quartet 2
U N I T
On Your Own
Write a paragraph about legends in your culture. Answer some of

these questions.
1. Which legends are told over and over again?
2. Do most of the legends in your culture try to teach something?
3. Do any of the legends in your culture talk about nature or animals?
4. Do any of the legends in your culture include evil characters? Who are
they?
What Did You Learn?
Facts:
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
70 Quartet 2
U N I T
3
Words:
Word Meaning
Language points:
Language Point Example
Relative Clauses
Present Passive
71 Quartet 2
U N I T
Crossword Answers (from page 69)
1 2
F M
3
J O U R N E Y
I T
G H
H
4
S T E P M O T H E R
E
51
R
M N
6
R E P L A C E
7
G D P
8
E V I L R
C O
A U
9
L E G E N D
72 Quartet 2
U N I T
4
Another Legend
The Story Of Persephone
U N I T
PART 1: IN GREEK MYTHOLOGY

Language Point
Result Clauses
Before You Start
74 Quartet 2
U N I T
Check () the wrong sentences.
1. ___ The Greek people passed these stories down from generation to
generation.
2. ___ Stories about gods, goddesses, and heroes are called myths.
3. ___ The Greek people believed in gods, so they married them.
4. ___ Gods were ordinary people who could only do good things.
5. ___ Demeter missed Persephone.
6. ___ As long as Persephone was away, the earth was cold and dark.
7. ___ Persephone was the goddess of the flowers and trees.
8. ___ Demeter was the goddess of the harvest.
9. ___ Hades was the King of the Underworld.
Some Grammar
Result Clauses
Cause Result clause

He didn't know you were coming, so he left early.
Nothing grew, therefore there was no food.
She made such a good meal that we all ate it for lunch.
It was so hot (that) I had to go for a swim.
He ran so quickly (that) I couldnt catch him.
In order to show a result or consequence between two clauses we use so,

therefore, suchthat and sothat.
Examples:
Demeter was angry, so / therefore she made the world dark.
= Demeter was angry. As a result, she made the world dark.
Greek legends are such interesting stories that we still read them today.
= Greek legends are interesting stories. Consequently, we still read them
today.
Note that therefore is more formal than so
75 Quartet 2
U N I T
Some Practice
A Check () the sentences that show a result or consequence.
He wanted to find his daughter, so he asked for help.

1. ___
2. ___ They were unhappy when Hades took their daughter.
3. ___ The god who lived in the Underworld fell in love with Persephone.
4. ___ Greek myths are such interesting stories.
5. ___ Nothing grew, so there wasnt enough food.
6. ___ The gods and goddesses were such ordinary people that they fell in
love, got married, and had children.
7. ___ She is interested in Greek mythology, therefore she is studying Greek.
8. ___ She said that the Earth would be cold and dark until Persephone
came home.
B Match the sentence beginning with the sentence ending.
A B
b Legends are so important
1. ___ a. so every society has its own
to us legends.
2. ___ Every society has its own b. that we pass them down from
traditions, generation to generation.
3. ___ We have such a strong c. that we believe that they really
feeling about people in legends existed.
4. ___ The Greek legends had so d. therefore we can learn a lot from
many gods and goddesses them.
5. ___ Legends talk about nature e. that its difficult to remember them
and human nature, all.
76 Quartet 2
U N I T
C Finish the sentences using the adjectives and clauses in the box.
Use so + adjective and that + clause.
Adjectives Clauses
expensive I'm not going to wear it.
old I'm not going to buy it.
heavy everyone knows the answers.
big we can't carry it.
easy everyone is afraid of it.
Example:
so big that everyone is afraid of it
1. The dog is ______________________________________.
2. The table is ________________________________________.
3. The English test is ___________________________________.
4. The sweater is ______________________________________.
5. My grandmother's ring is ______________________________.
D Connect each pair of sentences to show cause and result. Use the
word so.
Example:
I was very excited about my vacation. I couldn't sleep.
I was so excited about my vacation that I couldnt sleep.
1. Demeter missed her daughter. She made the earth cold and dark.
2. The sun didnt shine. Nothing grew.
3. Hades fell in love with Persephone. He took her to the Underworld.
4. The ancient Greeks believed in stories about gods and goddesses.
They told them to their children.
77 Quartet 2
U N I T
E Use such instead of so and write new sentences.

Example:
The book was so good that I couldn't put it down.
It was such a good book that I couldn't put it down.
1. The room is so small that two people can't sleep comfortably in it.
It is _______________________________________________________.
2. The weather is so rainy that I need an umbrella.
It _________________________________________________________.
3. The movie was so boring that I fell asleep in the middle.
It _________________________________________________________.
4. The bus was so crowded that there was no room to sit.
It _________________________________________________________.
F Complete the conversation about Arlene's vacation. Use so and

such.
Jan: Tell us about your vacation, Arlene.

Arlene such a fantastic vacation that we didn't want to leave. The
It was (1) _____
people were (2) _____ friendly, and everyone was (3) _____ helpful.
Jan: What was the weather like?
Arlene: Wonderful! It was (4) _______ hot and sunny that we were in the water
for hours. The water was (5) ________ clean and clear that you could
see right down to the bottom. I dont remember (6) ________clear
water there before.
Jan: Was the food good?
Arlene: The food was (7) ___ good! There were (8) ________ good
restaurants that we didn't know which one to eat in every night. We
didn't stop eating for two weeks.
Jan: I'm so happy to hear that you had (9) ________a good vacation.
Arlene: Yes, we enjoyed everything (10) ________ much.
78 Quartet 2
U N I T
G Read the rules below and play the chain game.
1. Write a sentence with a situation and a result on a piece of paper.

2. Pass the paper to the next person. He / She adds a new situation and result
sentence and passes the paper to the next person.
3. After five to six sentences, stop and read the story. The last person finishes
the story.
Example:
Person A: It started to rain, so Tomas stayed in the house.
Person B: There was nothing to do in the house, so he decided to eat
something.
Person C: He wanted to eat pizza, so he called a restaurant and ordered a
pizza.
Person D: A very interesting woman brought the pizza to Tomas house, so
he invited her to come in and eat the pizza with him.
Person E: She agreed to eat pizza with him, so they had a chance to talk.
Person F: They talked and fell in love, so they got married. Now they eat pizza
together every day.
79 Quartet 2
U N I T
Something to Read
Some Words
accept earth mythology seasons
agree entertaining pomegranate starve
amusing inform powerful
ancient kidnap return
The Story of Persephone: A Letter to the Editor

Dear Editor, the Underworld. Hades finally let
Persephone live on the earth for six
I really enjoyed reading the stories
months a year.
from Greek mythology. It made me
realize that in ancient myths
This legend tells us why we have
anything is possible.
four seasons: winter, spring,
The story I liked the most was "No summer, and autumn. For six
News Like Ancient News" about the months of the year when
kidnapping of Persephone. Why was Persephone lives on earth and her
most of the story about Queen mother is happy, its spring and
Demeter? We already know that she summer. For the other six months
was so sad and unhappy that the when she returns to the
earth became cold and dark. Underworld, its autumn and winter.
There was no food, so people
starved. Kidnapping was then and still is a
very serious problem. It happened in
What about Persephone? Hades
ancient times to powerful gods and it
kidnapped her while she was
still happens today.
picking flowers and took her to the
Underworld. How could such a
Thank you for the amusing stories
terrible thing happen to the daughter
and for informing us about the
of the powerful gods Demeter and
people of ancient Greece.
Zeus? We know that she was
unhappy in the Underworld. At first,
she wouldn't accept any food from
Hades. Finally she agreed to eat the
seeds from a pomegranate, married
Hades, and became the Queen of A pleased reader
80 Quartet 2
U N I T
Some Practice
A Match the words in A with their meanings in B.
A B
1. c
___ ancient a. causing laughter or a smile
2. ___ spring b. have the same opinion
3. ___ mythology c. very old
4. ___ kidnap d. stories handed down from
5. ___ agree generation to generation
6. ___ pomegranate e. round fruit with red seeds
7. ___ return f. to go back
8. ___ amusing g. season when plants start to grow
h. to take a person without permission
B Use the correct form of the words from Something to Read to

complete the sentences.
agreed
1. Hades _____________ to let Persephone return to the earth.
2. There was no food, so everyone ____________.
3. The ___________ Greek people believed stories about gods and
goddesses.
4. The Laurel Chronicle writes stories about ancient Greek
__________________.
5. The people of Greece enjoyed listening to such ____________ stories.
6. Demeter was sad when Hades _______________ her daughter.
7. Every year Persephone ____________ to earth for six months.
8. Demeter was the goddess of all growing things on _____________.
81 Quartet 2
U N I T
C Next to each sentence write (P) Persephone, (D) Demeter, or (H)

Hades.
P
1. ___ I screamed for help and dropped the flowers.
2. ___ I am the goddess of the seasons and the harvest.
3. ___ I live in the Underworld for half the year.
4. ___ I am King of the Underworld.
5. ___ I am so unhappy that nothing grows on the Earth.
6. ___ I gave Persephone the seeds of a pomegranate.
7. ___ I am married to Zeus.
8. ___ I want to make Persephone my wife.
9. ___ I am Zeus and Demeters' daughter.
10. ___ I am Zeus and Demeters son-in-law.
D Match the sentences in A to the results in B.
A B
1. People told stories about the gods a. people didnt have anything to eat.
d
so ___ b. he kidnapped her.
2. Hades came up from the c. spring came to the world.
Underworld so ____ d. they could explain things in the
3. Hades wanted Persephone so __ world.
4. Demeter was sad so __ e. Demeter was happy.
5. The plants died so __ f. he could find a wife.
6. Persephone visited her mother so g. the world became cold.
__
7. Demeter was happy so __
82 Quartet 2
U N I T
What Do You Think?
A According to this story, how did the seasons come into

being?
B Do you know other stories about the seasons of the year? Share
them with the class.
On Your Own
Choose a funny or amusing headline from the newspaper or

create your own. Write a short newspaper article using that
headline.
examples: Flying Horses Help Hero
Three-headed Horse Guards the Underworld
83 Quartet 2
U N I T
PART 2: WHAT REALLY HAPPENED?
Language Point
Modals: could, may, might
Before You Start
84 Quartet 2
U N I T
Old Man: I think that King Hades is a good man. He would never
kidnap anyone. Persephone is in love with him. She
looks happy.
Young Man: I think that Hades kidnapped Persephone, but she

wanted him to do it. She might want to get away from
her mother.
Woman with: Persephone wanted to marry Hades, but she'll

Baby want to see her mother after she has a baby.
Old Woman: Persephone looks very happy now, but we will have to
wait and see what happens. Things may change.
85 Quartet 2
U N I T
A Check () the sentences that are not true.
1. ___ Everyone thinks that Persephone wanted to marry Hades.

2. ___ Everyone thinks that Demeter is very angry.
3. ___ Everyone thinks that Hades is an evil man.
4. ___ Everyone thinks that Hades kidnapped Persephone.
5. ___ Everyone thinks that Persephone is in the Underworld.
6. ___ Everyone thinks that there will be a happy ending to the story.
B Look at the newspaper articles in Before You Start again. Find

the words that answer the questions. When there is no answer,
write "don't know."
The Mythological News The Hades Evening News
1. How does Queen upset, angry, and

angry
Demeter feel? unhappy
2. Where does
Persephone live?
3. What does Demeter
want from her daughter?
4. How does Persephone
feel in the Underworld?
5. How does Persephone
feel about Hades?
6. What will Demeter do
if Persephone does not
return?
86 Quartet 2
U N I T
Some Grammar
Modals
Modal Example Meaning
Could Could I leave the table now? permission - question
He was an excellent tennis player. ability (past)
He could beat anybody.
You could be there on time if you hurried. ability
May It may rain tomorrow. possibility
Might You might fall if you're not careful. possibility
My uncle might not arrive on time.
We use modals with the base form of the verb.
could
We often use could (past ability) as the past of can (=ability).
Example: I cant run fast, but when I was young I could run 100 yards
(91 metres) in ten seconds.
We sometimes use could in questions to request permission.

Example: Could we talk to you for a minute?
We use could with the verbs: hear, smell, see, taste, feel, remember,
understand.
Example: She spoke in a low voice but I could hear everything.
may / might
We use may and might to talk about things that are possible now or in the
future.
Example: We may / might go on a short trip next week.
We use may / might when we are not sure about something.
Example: That may / might be the truth. I dont really know.
87 Quartet 2
U N I T
Some Practice
A Complete the sentences in A with sentence endings in B, adding

could / couldn't.
Example: The Greek gods were like people, and they could do bad
things as well as good things.
A B
1. When Hades was a young man, a. _______ pick flowers

c
he _______
b. _______ make the world
2. Demeter _______ become very cold.
3. Finally Hades agreed that couldnt find a wife.

c. _______
Persephone _______
d. _______ return to Earth every
4. How _______ six months.
5. When Persephone lived on earth, e. _______ such a terrible thing

she _______ happen?
B Circle the modal in each sentence and write its meaning:

ability/permission/possibility
possibility
Example: He may come over tonight. _____________
1. Persephone may love Hades. _____________

2. Could I sit next to you? _____________
3. When she was a little girl, she could dance. _____________
4. Take a sweater with you. It might be cold. _____________
5. May I watch television until midnight? _____________
6. Persephone may miss her mother. _____________
7. Persephone might like living in the Underworld. _____________
8. People could die in the cold weather. _____________
9. Some plants might still be alive after the winter. _____________
88 Quartet 2
U N I T
C Write sentences with may or might.

Example: Perhaps I will go to the Underworld.
I may go to the Underworld.
1. Perhaps I will see my daughter tomorrow.

2. Perhaps it will rain today.
3. Perhaps Hades will forget.
D Read the conversation between Hades and Persephone at dinner.

Complete the conversation with could, couldnt, may, may not,
and might. There is more than one correct answer.
Could / May I leave the table, please? My mother's here to
Persephone: (1) ____________
visit me.
Hades: Your mother's here in the Underworld? (2)__________ she let us
know before?
Persephone: It's a surprise for me too.
Hades: Sorry, my love. No, you (3)__________ leave in the middle of
dinner, but your mother (4)__________ join us.
Persephone: That's not a good idea. You (5)__________ get angry because she
(6)__________ ask me to come back to the earth and leave you.
Hades: You (7)__________ leave if you want to. But you (8)__________
like living on earth anymore. There are no birds or flowers anymore
and it's very cold.
Persephone: I don't know what I want. I (9)__________ try to live there for a
while and then decide.
Hades: Well, I want you to be happy. I have another idea. You
(10)__________ live with me in the Underworld for six months and
then you (11)__________ go to your mother for six months. This
way you (12)__________ enjoy both worlds.
Persephone: Thank you darling. Youre really wonderful.
89 Quartet 2
U N I T
E Write four things you can do now, that you couldn't do five years
ago.
Example: I can drive a car now but I couldn't five years ago.
1. _________________________________________.
2. _________________________________________.
3. _________________________________________.
4. _________________________________________.
F What could Demeter do to get her daughter back? Give her five
suggestions using could.
Example: Demeter could search for her daughter.
1. __________________________________________.
2. __________________________________________.
3. __________________________________________.
4. __________________________________________.
5. __________________________________________.
G Hero myth
1. Each member of your group names one person he/she considers a hero
and describes his/her special characteristics. Tell each other about your
heroes.
2. The group makes up a hero and writes a story which describes the person
and his/her life. Present your hero to the class. Each member of the group
tells part of the story.
90 Quartet 2
U N I T
H Talk to your partner about one of these conversations. What do

you think the gods will say?
1. Demeter tries to convince Persephone to leave the Underworld.
Persephone wants to stay in her new home.
2. Demeter wants Persephone to visit her often. Hades only wants her to visit
once a year.
3. Persephone wants to move back to the Earth with Hades. Hades wants to
stay in the Underworld.
Some Fun
A Read the rules below and play the game.

1. Take a piece of paper and write an opening sentence for a Greek myth.
2. Pass it on to your neighbour. They must read your sentence and add their
own. Make sure they fold the paper over before passing it to the next
person.
3. Continue passing the folded story to at least ten people. Each person may
read only the last sentence before adding a new one.
4. Read the story aloud.
91 Quartet 2
U N I T
4
B Fill in the missing words and complete the crossword puzzle.
1
4 5
10
Across
4. Another word for very old is _____________ .

6. Another word for come back is ______.
7. What you think about something is your ____ .
9. Another word for very strong is _____________ .
10. This is the opposite of disagree.
Down
1. In some places it snows during this season.

2. Green things that grow are called _____ .
3. A woman is married to her ______ .
5. A word that means very bad.
8. This is a warm season - not summer.
92 Quartet 2
U N I T
On Your Own
A Write at least five sentences about things you may or might do

this year.
_____________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________
B Write at least three sentences about Demeter, Persephone, and

Hades. What is your opinion of this myth?
_____________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________
What Did You Learn?
Facts:
_____________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________
93 Quartet 2
U N I T
4
Words:
Word Meaning
Language points:
Result Clauses
Modals: may
Modals: might
Modals: could
Crossword Answers
1
W
I
2
P N
3
L T H
4 5
A N C I E N T U
N R E S
6
R E T U R N R B
S R A
7
O P I N I O N
8
S B D
9
P O W E R F U L
R E
I
N
10
A G R E E
94 Quartet 2
U N I T
5
Nature & Adventure Vacations
U N I T
PART 1: WHY DO YOU DO THAT?

Language Point
Purpose: in order to, so that, because
Before You Start
T h e P r o f e s s i o n a l T r a v e l e r
A Balloon Safari in Namibia, Africa

By Clark Trinton look at the desert plants later visit the rock
and animals. On the third paintings.
Our Namibian safari day we flew over the On day five we flew from
started in Windhoek where dunes and the surrounding Damaraland to Ongava
we got on the hot air area. At noon we stopped Lodge for two days. This
balloon. Our first stop was at Swakopmund in order lodge has small houses
the Sossusvlei wilderness to tour the town and have with bathrooms and air-
camp, built near the top of lunch. That afternoon we conditioning. It is very
a mountain overlooking flew to the Damaraland popular with tourists
20,000 acres of open Camp. Its a very because you can sit on
plains and tall mountains. comfortable place with your private balcony and
We stayed there for two large tents and bathrooms. watch animals drinking at
days so that we would The next day we got up the water hole. This time
have enough time to visit early so that we could go we saw only a few animals
the Sossusvlei Dunes and on a long nature drive and because there wasnt
much water. For two days
we relaxed, watched the
animals, and went on a
short drive in the Etosha
National Park. Because it
was so hot, we rested in
the afternoons. On day
seven, my friends and
I flew from Ongava back to
Windhoek in order to
catch a plane home.
96 Quartet 2
U N I T
A Circle the correct answer.
1. Clark traveled to the Sossusvlei Camp by: hot air balloon, car, donkey,
camel.
2. Clark traveled: alone, with other people, with animals.
3. They were in the balloon: seven times, five times, four times.
4. They saw animals drinking at a water hole at: Swakopmund, Damaraland
Camp, Ongara Lodge.
Some Grammar
Purpose Clauses
We use the words so, that, in order to, and because to answer the question
"what for?" and show the reason/purpose for an action.
So that and because connect two sentences. In order to is followed by the

infinitive. The terms so that and because are followed by subject + verb.
Examples:
I work at the bank because I make a lot of money there. = reason
I study geography so that I can be a tour guide. = purpose or intention
Clark Trinton went on the safari in order to see
the sights of Namibia. = purpose or intention
97 Quartet 2
U N I T
Some Practice
A Read Clark's diary and complete it. Use in order to, so that or
because.
1. We went to Sossusvlei Dunes ____________ we could see the wild life
there.
2. We stopped at Swakopmund ____________ we wanted to tour the town.
3. We spent a day in Damaraland Lodge ____________ we wanted to relax.
4. We also stayed at the camp ____________ its in a good location and
____________ you can go on nice trips from there.
5. We continued to Ongava Game Reserve ____________ we could see the
Dolomite Hills.
6. We spent another day at the Ongava Lodge ____________ enjoy a night
walk and drive through the Etosha National Park.
B Travelog Radio Station is interviewing Clark about his trip to

Namibia. Read the interview and fill in the missing words.
Radio interviewer: Welcome to our program once again.
Clark: Thanks a lot.
Radio interviewer: So Clark, why did you go on this balloon safari in Namibia?
Clark: I went on the safari in order to see the country
(1.) ___________________________________________.
Radio interviewer: And why didn't you fly in the hot air balloon every day?
Clark: (2.) ___________________________________________.
Radio interviewer: Why didnt you drive through Namibia instead of flying?
Clark: (3.) ___________________________________________.
Radio interviewer: Why did you fly over the Sossusvlei Dunes?
Clark: (4.) ___________________________________________.
Radio interviewer: And why did you have to rest every afternoon? Youre still
very young.
Clark: (5.) ___________________________________________.
Radio interviewer: This really sounds like a fantastic tour. What are your future
plans? Our listeners want to know.
Clark: I can't really tell you (6.) ___________ I dont know myself.
98 Quartet 2
U N I T
C Fill in so that, in order to, or because. Then check ( ) the

answers that are true for you.
A d v e n t u r e To u r C l u b
The one made just for you!!!!
Join the Adventur e Tour Club. Read the following questions
and check ( ) the cor r ect answer for you.
1. Why do you want to join the club?
_____________________ meet new people

_____________________ I wont have to plan my own trips
_____________________ enjoy unusual trips
2. How do you want to travel?
by car _____________________ I like my comforts

by jeep _____________________ I can get to many exciting new
places
by hot air balloon _____________________ I want to see every
thing from above
3. How are you joining us?
with a friend _____________________ I don't like to travel alone

alone _____________________ I wont need to think of anyone
but myself
with my relatives _____________________ I want to spend some
time with them
4. When do you want to travel?
in the winter __________ there aren't many tourists then

in the summer __________ it's the only time I have a vacation
any time is OK __________ I'm not working now
99 Quartet 2
U N I T
D Compare your answers from exercise C with a partner. Do you

both have the same answers?
E Answer some of the questions below and read the answers to

your group. Explain.
1. Do you like adventure vacations?
2. Do you read travel guides before vacations?
3. Do you read mystery stories?
4. Do you like to travel by boat/plane/balloon/train?
5. Do you watch nature programs on television?
6. Do you want to learn English?
100 Quartet 2
U N I T
Something to Read
Some Words
bottom climate layers tribes
breathe extinction pollution vegetation
ceiling humid reserves
1.
The worlds rainforests are located around the equator because the weather there
is humid and wet. The temperature is 80 degrees Fahrenheit all year and the
rainforests get 180 - 400 inches (457 to 1016 centimeters) of rain per year.
2.
The largest rainforests are in Brazil, Zaire, and Indonesia. Smaller ones are in Hawaii
and the islands of the Pacific and Caribbean.
3.
The people who live in the rainforests are Indian and native tribes of other origins.
There are a thousand or more groups of people who live in the forests around the
world. Their numbers are going down every year, and in some places they are close
to extinction.
4.
The tropical rainforest is divided into three main layers: the canopy, which is the
green ceiling of the forest, the understory, where the young trees grow, and the
forest floor at the bottom of the forest where the vegetation grows.
5.
The rainforests are very important. They influence and control the worlds climate
and water reserves. They also help avoid pollution. Without rainforests we wouldnt
have clean drinking water or be able to breathe fresh air.
101 Quartet 2
U N I T
Some Practice
A Answer the questions. Write the number of the paragraph where

you found the answer.
1. What is a rainforest? ___________________________________________
2. What kind of climate do you need for a rainforest? ___________________
3. Why are the rainforests important? ________________________________
B What other questions can you ask about the rainforests? Write
them down and ask your partner. Report on any new facts you
have.
C Which of the two sentences has the same meaning as the

numbered sentence?
1. The rainforests help avoid pollution.
The rainforests keep the air clean.
___
___ The rainforests make the air dirty.
2. The rainforests influence the worlds climate.
___ The worlds weather is influenced by the rainforests.
___ The weather of the rainforests influences the worlds weather.
3. Some tribes who live in the rainforests are close to extinction.
___ There are fewer and fewer native people.
___ There are fewer and fewer rainforests.
4. The tropical rainforests are divided into three layers.
___ There are three parts to the rainforests.
___ There are three types of rainforests.
5. The climate in the rainforests is hot and humid.
___ The climate in the rainforests is like the climate in the desert.
___ The temperature is usually around 80 degrees Fahrenheit and theres
a lot of rain.
6. In some parts of the world, there are only limited reserves of water.
___ In some places, theres no water for drinking and farming.
___ In some places, there isnt a lot of water for drinking and farming.
7. Theres a lot of vegetation at the bottom of the rainforests.
___ You can find plants at the lowest level of the rainforests.
___ You can find plants below the rainforests.
102 Quartet 2
U N I T
D Clark is visiting the Amazon rainforests and Lewis, the radio

interviewer, is on a safari trip in Africa. Their postcards got
confused. Read the sentences and put them in the correct place in
the table below.
1. Im sending you this postcard so that you can see where I am right now.
2. Its always wet here.
3. A vacation like this is the best way to enjoy fishing, hunting, and sightseeing.
4. Start saving your money so that you can come and join me on my next trip
to South Africa.
5. You were right about the beauty of the safari animals. The elephants,
lions, impala, and buffalo are fantastic.
6. Regards to everyone at work.
7. The visit to the safari museum is great. You can see the local jewelry.
8. The postcard shows one of the last rubber tapper tribes in the Amazon.
9. You can see the pictures when I get home.
10. Ill call you as soon as I get back.
About the safari About the rainforests In both postcards

1
103 Quartet 2
U N I T
E Read the advertisement below and talk to a partner. Would you

like to go on a camping vacation like this? Why? Why not?
104 Quartet 2
U N I T
F What does the tour offer? The advertisement in exercise E tells

you what you can and cant do and the things you can see in
the Grand Canyon.
Fill in the missing information.

What you can do What you cant do What you can see
sleep in the open air eat hamburgers the Colorado River
What Do You Think?
Talk to a partner about a vacation you want to go on. Choose

any of the vacations mentioned in the unit or any other possible
tour. Explain why you want to go on this vacation. You can start
this way:
I want to go to so that / because I
105 Quartet 2
U N I T
On Your Own
Write a short postcard to a friend using the information in this

unit about the rainforests, the safari, or the Grand Canyon.
106 Quartet 2
U N I T
PART 2: IT WAS CREATED MANY YEARS AGO
Language Point
Past Passive
Before You Start
107 Quartet 2
U N I T

1. t
___ The website was rated as very good.
2. ___ Many people visit it.
3. ___ You can get a free vacation if you visit the site.
4. ___ It lists people who want to go on a tour with the company.
5. ___ The site was created by the World Wide Web.

1. Do you know who the web visitors are?
2. Is it important to know who they are?
Some Grammar
Past Passive
I, He, She, It was, wasnt asked to leave.

You, We,They were, werent told to read the whole story.
I, He, She, was , wasnt picked up by a friend.
You, We,They were, werent picked up by a friend.
Was, Wasnt I, he, she, it taken to the reef?
Why/When were you, they invited to the party?
Why/When was, he, she followed by a detective?
We use the Past Passive when we want to focus on the action and not on
the person who did it, or when the person who did the action is unknown.
Examples: These shoes were made by hand, not by machine.

The cake was eaten as soon as it was brought to the table.
108 Quartet 2
U N I T
Some Practice
A Here are some facts about the Wilderness Tour in Australia. Are
the sentences Active or Passive?
Active Passive
1. The tour starts at 9:00 a.m.

2. The tourists are picked up at their hotel.
3. The tours that were booked ahead of time
leave first.
4. Everyone gets a tape with an explanation
about the reef.
5. All the guides were trained by the Australian
Ministry of Tourism.
6. You can join the tour three times a day.
B Match the questions in A to the answers in B.

A B
d
1. Where is the rest of the group? ___ a. Were very careful here at
Adventure Bungee Tour." Our
bungee was tested with heavy
weights, so you don't have to worry
at all.
2. Is this bungee safe? ___ b. They were discovered in the
rainforest of the Mossman Gorge
near the reef.
3. Where were the cave paintings c. A special Australian meal was
found? ___ prepared for you. We hope you
enjoy it.
4. Who invented the special d. The other tourists were taken to the
Australian natural medicines? ___ Daintree rainforest.
5. How do we know about these e. The secret of the medicines was
medicines today? ___ passed on from father to son.
6. What are we going to eat while we f. The medicines were developed by
are on the tour? ___ the people of the Kuku Yalanji tribe.
109 Quartet 2
U N I T
C Use the verbs in parentheses ( ) to complete the description of

the Great Barrier Reef.
THE GREAT BARRIER REEF
The Great Barrier Reef is in the Coral Sea off the coast of Australia. It is
more than 1,250 miles (2,012 kilometres) long.
was created
It (1) ______________ (create) over 2,000 years ago. It (2) ___________ (form)
by the bodies of millions of tiny sea animals. During the years, many of the coral
reefs (3) ___________ (cover) by mud and (4) ___________ (destroy) by it.
In order to save the reef, a team of specialists (5) ___________ (form). They
prepared a plan to save the reefs. Money (6) ___________ (raise) through
donations and government gifts. Thanks to the actions that (7) ___________
(take), the site (8) ___________ (reopen) in 1965.
D Fill in the missing verbs. Use Active or Passive verbs in the past.
were trained (train) by the Ministry of Tourism.

1. The guides on the tour ___________
2. The buses for the tour _______________ (leave) on time.
3. All the tourists ___________ (meet) in front of the hotel.
4. The tourists ___________ (tell) not to smoke on the bus.
5. The tourists ___________ (take) bottled water with them.
6. All the people on the coach _________________ (introduce) to each other.
7. Each person ___________ (ask) to tell his name and profession.
8. The bus ___________ (return) on time.
9. The tourists ___________ (be) very happy with their guide.
10. The guide ___________ (give) a large tip.
110 Quartet 2
U N I T
E Write the correct form of the verb in parentheses in the Past

Passive.
Tourist: Excuse me for being late for the tour. I (1) _______________ (give)
the wrong directions. I (2) _______________ (send) to another tour,
not to this one.
Guide: Did you call the office? I (3) ____________ (not give) a message.
Tourist: I tried calling your office but my phone (4) _____________
(disconnect).
And the car I rented (5) ____________ (tow), so I had to find a taxi.
Guide: But you (6) ____________ (tell) not to rent a car. They arent very
good in this town. OK. Youre here now. You only missed the
introduction which (7) ______________ (give) by a person from the
Kuku Yalani tribe.
F You are on a walking tour and can't hear some of the things the
guide is talking about. Fill in any suitable verb in the Past
Passive.
Welcome to Kuku Yalanji Dreamtime Tours. I would like to start this tour of the
Mossman Gorge Reserve by telling you that the Kuku Yalanji tribes used to live in
the area of Cooktown and (1) ________________ to this area by the
government. In this one-hour walking tour, you will see the cave paintings that (2)
________________ by these tribes. The Kuku Yalanji are also famous for the
paintings and medicines that (3) ________________ by their ancestors.
You are welcome to visit our shop. All the items in the shop (4)
________________ by the people of the Kuku Yalanji tribe. Thank you for your
cooperation, and have fun on your tour!
G Answer the questions.

1. How long is the tour?
2. What are the tribes famous for?
111 Quartet 2
U N I T
Language in Use
Read the dialog. You have $185 and want to go on the tour
tomorrow. Is that possible? Why or why not?
Day trips and river cruises to Kuranda Daintree.

Operates daily.
Small groups.
Trained guides specializing in the nature of
the Australian reefs and rainforests.
Prices start from $125 per person.
Fully air-conditioned buses.
Tourist: Excuse me, can I reserve a tour for tomorrow?

Clerk: Sorry, we don't have a tour tomorrow.
Tourist: But your advertisement says that you have one every day.
Clerk: Please excuse us but the guide is sick.
Tourist: What do you mean? Do you only have one guide?
Clerk: Sorry, the others are on vacation.
Tourist: On vacation? This is high season.
Clerk: Please forgive me, but I'm new here.
Tourist: What about the tour for Tuesday?
Clerk: No problem.
Tourist: Good. How much is it?
Clerk: $185
Tourist: But your advertisement says $125.
Clerk: I'm terribly sorry. Youre looking at an old advertisement.
Tourist: Well, maybe we should just forget about it.
Clerk: But why, sir? Its a great tour!
112 Quartet 2
U N I T
Language Function
When we feel bad about something we have done, we apologize and say that
we are sorry. We sometimes add an explanation. We also apologize when we
hear a complaint. Some expressions of apology are:
Im sorry
Please excuse me.
Forgive me for
Examples: Im very angry that there is no tour today. = complaint

Sorry, we dont have a tour today, because the = apology
guide is sick.
Please excuse me, but I must leave right now. = apology
Please forgive me, but Im in a terrible rush to
get home. = apology
Some Practice
A Read the conversation on page 112 again and fill in the table.
Complaints Apologies
But your advertisement Im terribly sorry. Youre looking

says you have one every day. at an old advertisement.
113 Quartet 2
U N I T
B Read the advertisement and the conversation on page 112 again.

Compare the promises made in the advertisement to the
conversation. Fill in the missing information.
Promises in the advertisement Facts in the conversation
C With a partner, role-play the dialog on page 112. You may make
changes.
D Write an apology under each picture.
1 2
3 4
114 Quartet 2
U N I T
E Read the apologies and guess what the complaints were. Write
the complaints.
1. Sorry about the delay. We usually start the tour on time. I think its the traffic.
2. Sorry for interrupting you, but this is an emergency.
3. Excuse me for losing your new map. I think I can get you a new one at our
next stop.
4. Excuse me, but this is a non-smoking area.
5. Sorry to intrude, but I was here first.
6. Excuse me. I think youre in the wrong place.
Im extremely angry. Why are we late again?

1. ____________________________________________________
2. ____________________________________________________
3. ____________________________________________________
4. ____________________________________________________
5. ____________________________________________________
6. ____________________________________________________
F Role-play a situation.
Student A: Apologize and give a reason.
Student B: Accept your partners apology.
1. You were late for the tour meeting. Your group is very angry with you.
2. You promised to cook dinner and forgot all about it.
3. You lost your friends guidebook. He/she is angry with you.
4. You lost your way because you didnt listen to the guide.
115 Quartet 2
U N I T
Some Fun
Fill in the missing words and complete the crossword puzzle.
Across
4. When you are sick, this can make you feel better.
7. A place where it rains a lot most of the year.
8. Tall hills of sand are called ______ .
Down
1. Another word for the disappearance of an animal or native tribe is ______ .
2. Another word for very wet is ______ .
3. The weather conditions in a given place.
5. To open something again is to ______ it.
6. Millions of tiny sea animals died and formed coral _______ .
116 Quartet 2
U N I T
What Did You Learn?
Facts:
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
Words:
Word Meaning
Language points:
Purpose Clauses
Past Passive
117 Quartet 2
U N I T
Crossword Answers
1
E
2
H X
3
U T C
4
M E D I C I N E L
I N I
5
D C R M
6
T E R A
7
R A I N F O R E S T
O P E E
N E F
8
D U N E S
118 Quartet 2
U N I T
6
Hawaii
U N I T
PART 1: WHAT IF
Language Point
Real Conditions
Before You Start
120 Quartet 2
U N I T
A Check () the facts that are correct, incorrect or dont appear in

the text.
correct incorrect not in the text

The helicopter is safe.

The company is at least
ten years old.
You get a light meal on the

flight.
The flight saves you

a ferryboat ride.
The helicopter leaves

from Waima canyon.
You get a free hat.
1. Where can you find a text like this?
2. According to the advertisement, what is the best way to tour Hawaii?
3. Why are the Hawaiian Islands a good place for a vacation?
4. What do they grow on the Hawaiian Islands?
C In your opinion, what kind of person usually goes on a tour like

this? Compare your answer with other students in the class.
121 Quartet 2
U N I T
Some Grammar
Real Conditions
Present - Condition clause Result

If you join us, youll save money.
If you like helicopter rides, you can join us on the tour.
If he doesnt buy a plane ticket soon, he wont be able to come to Hawaii

with us.
If it rains, will he go on the cruise?
If youre in Hawaii, visit the volcanic mountains.
If you dont go on a tour, you wont see the islands.
We use if clauses to talk about conditions.
For a condition that is real or possible, we use if with the Present (not with
will. )
Sometimes the if clause comes at the beginning of the sentence, and

sometimes it comes at the end.
Examples:
If you join us, youll save money. = Youll save money if you join us.
If you enjoy fresh fruit, = Come to Hawaii if you enjoy fresh
come to Hawaii. fruit.
122 Quartet 2
U N I T
Some Practice
A Match A to B to complete the sentences.
A B
1. If people want to see something a. theyll choose the Hawaiian

c
exciting in Hawaii, ___ Islands.
2. If people want a vacation with b. youll find them growing on the
good weather, ___ island of Oahu.
3. If you want to try pineapple and c. theyll go to the Hawaii Volcanoes
sugarcane, ___ National Park on the "big island."
4. If you see the Mauna Lao d. youll also want to see the other
volcano, ___ two volcanoes on the "big island."
5. If you want to improve your e. visit the health resorts on the
health, ___ island of Hawaii.
B Check () the sentences that are true for you.

Compare your opinions with other students in
the class.
1. __ Volcanoes sound exciting. If I have enough money,
Ill visit the Hawaiian Islands.
2. __ I have enough money. If I have enough time, Ill go to the Hawaiian
Islands for a vacation.
3. __ There are many places I want to visit more than the Hawaiian Islands.
But if there is a movie about the Hawaiian Islands, Ill go and see it.
4. __ I dont like hot places. If I have enough time and money, Ill go to a cold
place like Alaska.
6. __ I like to stay home and read. Ill read a book about the Hawaiian
Islands if I can find one in the library.
7. __ I have many other things to think about. Ill consider visiting the
Hawaiian Islands if I have time.
123 Quartet 2
U N I T
C Read the three messages and use the words in the box to fill in
the missing if clauses.
Ill
arrives Im not
Ill call
If do get back
ask
will will dont get
back
Jennie,
on Hi Kosta ,
(2 ) _ _ ______
ht
If____ my flig ilo at
(1) _ _
_ __ _ be at H I was in a
_
3) ____ to wait
for terrible ru
time, ( n e e d sh to leav
e for the
s no helicopter
0 0 pm . There te.
tour. If you
(1) _____
4: t if Im la early, (2) ___
irpo r ________
he a ime,
me at t _ _ _ _ __ on t _______ m
you pleas
e (3)
_
______ ______
___ e a favor
If (4) _ u (6 ) Tell him (4
and call M
ark?
_ yo
5 ) _ __ ______ t o keep m
y ) _______
_ him if I (5
( o te l ________
he h )
e p e ople at t ___ too la
te.
th
room? ark Thanks a
Love, M lot,
Greg
D Complete the conversation. Use the items in parentheses ( ).

Kosta: Hi, Mark. Greg called. (1) Hell meet you later if you are free this evening
______________________________________.
(meet you later - be free this evening)
Mark: Where did he go?
Kosta: On the helicopter tour. (2) _______________________.(sky clear - see
everything)
Mark: Will he be able to see the volcanic mountains?
Kosta: I dont know. (3) ___________________.(go on the special tour - be able
to see the whole island) (4) _____________________. (go on the short
flight - only see the city)
Mark: Are you going to meet him later?
Kosta: Maybe. (5) ______________. (go to a nightclub - not return too late).
Mark: But you dont have any money.
Kosta: Yes, so (6) ___________.( have to pay - want me to go with him)
124 Quartet 2
U N I T
E Read the safety rules and write sentences with if clauses.

Example: If you dont drink bottled water, youll get sick.
Safety Rules in Hawaii

1. Drink only bottled water.
2. Travel with companies that have trained
guides (ask for a certificate).
3. Rent cars from well-known companies.
4. Use licensed taxis.
5. Ask for receipts.
6. Dont carry too much money with you.
7. Leave your passport at the hotel.
1. ________________________________________________
2. ________________________________________________
3. ________________________________________________
4. ________________________________________________
5. ________________________________________________
6. ________________________________________________
7. ________________________________________________
125 Quartet 2
U N I T
Something to Read
Some Words
abundant exotic flow majestic
edge(s) fertile guided worth seeing
126 Quartet 2
U N I T
Some Practice

1. t
___ Lava from volcanic eruptions created fertile land in Hawaii.
2. ___ Volcanoes in Hawaii arent active.
3. ___ Hawaii is sometimes called the "Paradise of the Pacific."
4. ___ There are no coral beaches in Hawaii.
5. ___ There are exotic foods and fresh fish in Hawaii.
B Answer the questions about Something to Read.

1. Where can you see a text like this?
2. Underline the words that describe the different places and things on the
island of Hawaii.
3. How does the writer feel about the island of Hawaii?
4. In your opinion, is it dangerous to visit the island of Hawaii?
C Match the words in A to the definitions in B.
A B
f
1. ___ abundant a. different or unusual
2. ___ majestic b. a good thing to see or visit
3. ___ to guide c. to lead or show someone the way
4. ___ exotic d. the place where something ends
5. ___ worth seeing e. able to produce good crops
6. ___ edge f. a big amount
7. ___ fertile g. large and magnificent
127 Quartet 2
U N I T
D Read the conversation and fill in the missing words.
edge fertile worth seeing

exotic flows
Nadia: After all this reading, I think I would like to see the island of Hawaii
first.
Boris: Why?
Nadia: I want to see the west part of the "big island" where they grow fruit. I
edge of the island, the one that
also want to see the area at the (1) _______
has the coral reefs.
Boris: But its a health resort, and Im not interested in (2) _______ fruits
and vegetables. I want a good piece of meat. Lets start in Hilo. I hear
its (3) _________________ because its the largest city on the island
of Hawaii.
Nadia: Id like to see the volcanoes. I hear that when they erupt the lava
(4)_________ onto the land below. This makes the land very
(5)_________ here.
Boris: You dont think any of the volcanoes are going to erupt, do you?
E Boris is planning a vacation to Hawaii and is preparing a list of

tourist tips. Complete his list and then write sentences with if
clauses.
Example:Visit the reefs. If you visit the reefs, you will see many types of fish.
TOURIST TIPS What to see in Hawaii

Visit the reefs
_________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________
128 Quartet 2
U N I T
What Do You Think?
A For each of the following places, write at least one thing you
know.
Example: There are three volcanic mountains rising out of the Pacific Ocean.
1. coral reefs 4. fertile land on the island

2. damage to the land on the 5. the island of Hawaii
island 6. the largest city in Hawaii
3. exotic foods 7. volcanic mountains
B Give your partner tourist tips about your

country/city/town or any other country/city/town that you
choose.
Example: If you go to Paris in the springtime, you will have wonderful weather.
On Your Own
Write a short postcard from Hawaii to a friend. Use the
information about the Hawaiian Islands from this unit.
129 Quartet 2
U N I T
PART 2: WHILE I WAS IN THE HAWAIIAN

ISLANDS
Language Point
Time Clauses
Before You Start

Read what Nadia and Boris wrote in their diaries. One is a morning person
and one is a night person.
130 Quartet 2
U N I T
A Check () when the activities take place.
Morning Afternoon Evening Not in the text
sail boat ride around

the coast of the island of
Hawaii
swimming lessons
glass-bottom boat cruise
bird-watching trip
sunset dinner cruise
visit to the Hawaii
Volcanoes National Park
fishing trip
sunrise walk on the beach
yoga class
snorkel adventure around
the coast
1. In your opinion, which diary entry belongs to Boris and which belongs to
Nadia? Why do you think so?
2. Are you a morning person or a night person? Compare with other people in
the class.
131 Quartet 2
U N I T
Some Grammar
Time Clauses
When we were on the boat, we saw a whale.

Before I go on the hike, Ill look at the guidebook.
Well meet at the beach after you eat lunch.
We bought new swimsuits before we went to Hawaii.
After I finished my dinner, I went on a sunset cruise.
While I was walking, the sun rose.
I was hiking on the island when I saw a strange-looking animal.
Time Clauses begin with after, before, when, or while.

Time Clauses describe the time relation between two actions.
Example: Ill call you before I leave my house.
Time clauses can be either the first or the second clause in a sentence. We
only use a comma to separate two parts of a time clause if the time word
comes at the beginning of the sentence.
Examples:
After I had three cups of coffee, I felt more awake.
= I felt more awake after I had three cups of coffee.
When talking about the future, we use the Present Simple after the time
words. Remember: dont use will after the time word.
Example: When I have time, Ill go to Hawaii.
We sometimes use when and while to show that one action interrupts
another action. Notice that the first action is in the Present Progressive and
the action that interrupts is in the Present Simple.
Example: When / while I was relaxing on the beach, it started raining.
We usually use while when two long actions occur at the same time.
Examples:
Nadia was sailing while Boris was having lunch.
132 Quartet 2
U N I T
Some Practice
A Match A with B to complete the sentences.
A B
f
1. ____ While she was watching the a. I dried off and relaxed on the
sun rise, beach.
2. ____ After I went swimming, b. after lunch
3. ____ Well send postcards to our c. our guide fell in the sea.
friends d. when I go dancing.
4. ____ While we were sailing e. well read about volcanoes in the
around the coast, guide book.
5. ____ I usually get home late at f. he was sleeping.
night g. when we have time to write
6. ____ Before we go to the Hawaii to them.
Volcanoes National Park,
7. ____ Ill go for a swim
B Complete the sentences using after, before, when, or while.

Remember to use capital letters where necessary. There may be
more than one correct answer.
1. when
Well make plans for the evening ____________ we get back to the hotel.
2. __________ we were sailing, the sun was shining.
3. __________ we had dinner, we went dancing in the hotel nightclub.
4. Well take a helicopter ride around the island _____________ we finish our
lunch.
5. Ill visit Oahu ___________ I have a chance. Right now, Im enjoying Hawaii
Island.
6. Ill write some postcards _______ I get back from the cruise. I dont have
time now.
7. _______ I get home, Ill show you the pictures from the vacation.
8. On my next vacation, Ill read the travel guide ______ I leave home. Ill
enjoy the vacation more.
133 Quartet 2
U N I T
C Complete the letter. Use after, before, when, or while. There

may be more than one possible answer.
Dear Wallis,
Greetings from Hawaii. Im spending two weeks at a photo camp on Hawaii

Island. I arrived yesterday and Im having a terrible time. Heres what
happened on the first day of my vacation.
When I arrived at the camp, they put me in a room with six other kids.
(1) ______
I was unpacking my clothes (2) __________ two of the kids started an
argument. (3) ___________ the argument continued for a few minutes,
the other kids got involved. The room got so noisy that I couldnt even
think. I left the room and went to eat lunch.
(4) __________ lunch, I went swimming in the sea. (5) ___________ I was
splashing around in the water, I saw a huge fish nearby. I thought it was a
shark, so I started screaming. (6) ___________ I got out of the water, I
realized that it was only a dolphin. Everyone laughed and I was so
embarrassed.
(7) ______________ I went to bed last night I called my parents and

asked them to get me out of here! Ill call you (8) __________ I get home.
See you soon,

Roland
134 Quartet 2
U N I T
D Look at yesterdays camp itinerary for the Hawaii Photo Camp.

Describe Rolands and Harveys day to your partner. Use before,
after, when and while.
Examples: After he ate breakfast, Roland had swimming lessons.
While Roland was swimming, Harvey was snorkeling.
The Hawaii Photo Camp
time Roland Harvey

8 a.m. breakfast breakfast
10 a.m. swimming lessons snorkeling
12 p.m. "get comfortable with your lunch
camera" class
2 p.m. lunch animal photography class
4 p.m. nature photography class nature photography class
6 p.m. free time expert photographers class
8 p.m. barbecue on the west part of barbecue on the west part
the island of the island
10 p.m. lights out lights out
E Complete the following sentences with information about

yourself.
Example: Before I go swimming
Before I go swimming, I check to see if the water is warm enough.
1. When I go on vacation, I like

2. After I wake up in the morning, I often
3. Before I went on my last vacation, I
4. While I was eating dinner last night
5. When I have time, Ill
6. After I came back from my last vacation, I
7. When I finish my English course, I
8. Before I go to bed, I usually
135 Quartet 2
U N I T
Language in Use
Agent: Can I help you?

Tourist: Yes, Ill be here for a week and I would like to see as much as I can.
Agent: We have this very exciting Go Gliding tour.
Tourist: Oh no. That sounds very scary.
Agent: Why don't you try it? It's lots of fun!
Tourist: No chance! Im afraid of flying.
Agent: Then why not go on the "Voyager Submarine" tour?
Tourist: Sorry, I dont like to be in closed places.
Agent: Are you really sure you can't go on this tour? It's very safe.
Tourist: Really, no. I need something in the open air.
Agent: Then, why dont you try the "Volcano Adventure Tour"? Its perfect
for you.
Tourist: You must be joking! You want me to walk on a volcanic mountain?
Agent: Come on! It's a great tour. Everyone goes on it.
Tourist: Im afraid not. Can't you find me a pleasant, quiet tour?
Agent: Then let me recommend the Luxury Limousine Service. Theyll take
you everywhere and youll never have to leave the car.
Tourist: Thats perfect!
136 Quartet 2
U N I T
A Which of these tours does the tourist choose?

1. The Volcano Adventure Tour
2. The Voyager Submarine Tour.
3. The Luxury Limousine Tour.
4. The Go Gliding Tour.
B The agent is trying to persuade the tourist to take different kinds

of tours and the tourist is unhappy with most of them. How do
they say it? Fill in the missing information in the table.
Agent: persuasion Tourist: refusals
Why don't you try the gliding tour? No chance! I'm afraid of flying.
Language Function
When we want someone to do something, we give them reasons why its a
good thing to do. We try to persuade them.
Examples:
Why dont you try the snorkeling
tour / snorkeling? No way. (informal)
Why not try the snorkeling tour? Really, no.
Are you really sure that you cant go? Sorry but I cant.
Why dont you try the gliding tour / gliding? You must be joking! (informal)
Let me recommend the submarine tour. Im afraid not.
Come on. You can do it. (informal) No I cant.
137 Quartet 2
U N I T
Some Practice
A Mr. Carter is trying to persuade Boris to rent a car so that he can

tour the island. Complete the conversation using the words in the
box.
Why dont you Come on Please

Let me recommend Why not
Mr. Carter: Why dont you

(1) ____________________ rent a car while you are here?
Boris: But I don't know my way around.
Mr. Carter: (2) ________________ that you get a good map of the island.
Boris: I'm on vacation! I don't want to work hard.
Mr. Carter: (3) _____________! Ill give you a free map with all the tourist sites.
Boris: Sorry. I'm afraid I am not going to accept your offer. But thanks
anyway.
Mr. Carter: (4) ____________ use a taxi to see the island?
Boris: That's a great idea.
B Practice persuading your partner. Give him / her reasons for doing
certain activities. Your partner has to accept or reject your
suggestions. Here are some ideas:
go on a catamaran trip around the island
see a movie that you like
eat in a Polynesian restaurant that you like
rent a car and travel around the island
visit the volcanoes
Example:
You: Why dont you try the catamaran trip around the island?
Its lots of fun.
Your partner: Sorry, but I dont like boat trips.
138 Quartet 2
U N I T
C You want to go to the Hula Show but your partner is

tired and wants to go back to the hotel to sleep. Read the
advertisement and persuade your partner to go with you.
Hula Show
The island of Oahu is of the historical part 1937 and is popular
the home of the of the island while with both residents
famous Hula Show, professional Hawaiian and tourists. Theres
performed outdoors dancers do their seating for 2,000
not far from Waikiki famous Hula dance. people.
Beach. Enjoy the view The show started in
139 Quartet 2
U N I T
Some Fun
Crossword puzzle 1
2 3
Across
1. A relaxing trip
on a boat is
called a _____ .
4
4. Places that are
far away from
the center of
the island are
5
_____ .
5. This comes
out of a 6
volcano
when it erupts. 7
7. You can cross

the water in
this.
8. Land 8
surrounded by
water is called
an _____ .
9. Not man-made.
9
Down
1. A person who shows tourists around is called a ____ .
2. A large, yellow fruit grown in Hawaii is a ____ .
5. Another word for place is ____ .
6. Another word for a lot of is ______ .
140 Quartet 2
U N I T
On Your Own
Using the information that you learned in this chapter, write an

advertisement trying to persuade someone to come to Hawaii.
You may want to choose one specific island or a tourist site that
you liked.
What Did You Learn?
Facts
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
141 Quartet 2
U N I T
6
Words:
Word Meaning
Language points:
Time Clauses: when
Time Clauses: while
Time Clauses: after
Time Clauses: before
Real Conditions
Crossword Answers
1
G
2 3
P C R U I S E
I I
N D
4
R E M O T E
A
5
P L A V A
P O
6
L A C
7
F E R R Y B O A T
U T
N I
8
I S L A N D O
A N
N
9
N A T U R A L
142 Quartet 2
U N I T
7
Grammar Review
U N I T
PART 1 : MORE PRACTICE
A Fill in the correct positive or negative form of the Present

Simple. You can use words more than once.
Some Words
do have spend agree
get know think
go out love understand
loves
Alina (1) ______________ computers. She (2) ______________ a lot about
them, and she (3) ______________ a lot of time playing computer games. She
(4) ______________ very often, because she is always at home in front of her
computer.
When she (5) ______________ home from work, the first thing that she
(6) ______________ is to turn on the computer and check her e-mail. Then she
(7) ______________ an hour or more on the Internet.
Her roommates in the apartment really (8) ______________ her. They
(9) ______________ that she (10) ______________ a problem. But Alina
(11) ______________ . She is very happy.
144 Quartet 2
U N I T
B Who are these people? Read the sentences and decide which
person goes with each picture.
Both Sam and Virginia like to run, but Sam is faster than Virginia.
Philip is older than Mike.
Mike is taller than Philip.
Virginia is older than Philip.
Anita is the oldest.
Anita is taller than everyone except Sam.
Sam is the tallest and also the youngest.
Virginia is the shortest.
A B
Name: ____________ Name: ____________

Born: April 25, 1980 Born: November 17, 1971
Height: 5 feet 11 inches (180 cm). Height: 5 feet 7 inches (170 cm).
Profession: chef Profession: electrical engineer
Interests: French and Chinese Interests: computer games, sports,
cooking, traveling, classical music building model airplanes
C D E
Name: ____________ Name: ____________ Name: ____________

Born: April 24, 1974 Born: January 10, 1958 Born: September 9, 1965
Height: 5 feet 5 inches Height: 6 feet (183 cm) Height: 6 feet 4 inches
(165 cm). Profession: lawyer (193 cm).
Profession: dog trainer Interests: mystery books, Profession: nurse
Interests: animals, baking movies, dancing Interests: sports (especially
bread and cakes, running running), music, gardening
145 Quartet 2
U N I T
C Look at the picture. Using the Present Progressive, describe what

the people are doing. Use the words below to help you.
feed birds read a newspaper talk on the telephone

play ball sit in the park
lie on the grass sleep
Example: A woman is feeding the birds.
______________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________
146 Quartet 2
U N I T
D Ask a partner questions about a book or a movie he/she knows.

Write down his/her answers.
Example: Who is the main character?
The main character is Tom Sawyer.
E Complete the passage using Present Simple (she works) and

Present Progressive (shes working).
It is Wednesday afternoon in the Pizanti family house.
4:00 PM:
Annette (1) ______________ (wash) the dishes. She always (2) __________
(wash) the breakfast dishes when she (3) __________ (come) home from school.
She usually (4) is washing (do) many things in the house because she
__________
(5) __________ (want) to help her mother.
Her younger brother Harry (6) __________ (watch) television now. He never
(7) __________ (help) in the house after school. He (8) __________ (think) that
housework is for girls, but he never (9) __________ (say) that to his sister.
5:00 PM:
Elizabeth Pizanti is now home from work. She (10) __________ (cut) vegetables
for supper and Annette (11) __________ (help) her. Harry (12) __________
(set) the table. He still (13) __________ (think) that housework is for girls, but his
mother (14) __________ (not agree) with him. When his mother (15) __________
(tell) him to do something, Harry usually (16) __________ (do) it.
6:00 PM:
The Pizanti family (17) __________ (sit) at the table and eating supper. Harry
(18) __________ (try) to tell his mother that he (19) __________ (not have) any
homework, but his mother (20) _______________ (not listen). She (21)
__________ (know) that he (22) __________ (have) an English test to study for.
147 Quartet 2
U N I T
F Match the questions in A to the meanings in B. Do not use all the

meanings.
A B
h
1. __ Can I help you? a. You know where the movie is
2. __ Could I borrow fifty dollars? playing, so tell me.
3. __ Can I see that picture? b. I want you to give me back the
fifty dollars that you borrowed.
4. __ How can I repair the car?
c. I wanted you to give me fifty
5. __ Where can we see that
dollars.
movie?
d. I want to see you. Tell me
6. __ How could you give her fifty
when it is a good time for you
dollars?
to meet me.
7. __ When can you give me back
e. I am asking you for help.
my fifty dollars?
f. I want to look at the picture
8. __ When can we meet?
that you have.
9. __ Can you help me?
g. I am surprised that you gave
her fifty dollars.
h. Tell me if you want me to do
anything for you.
i. I don't know how to repair cars.
j. I am asking you to give me fifty
dollars and I will give them
back to you another time.
k. I dont know how to repair the
car and I think that you know
how to do it.
148 Quartet 2
U N I T
G Check () the correct answer. Decide if the sentences are ability

or not.
Yes No
1. Can I open the window?
2. Can this medicine help me?
3. I can carry the suitcase for you.
4. I can speak ten languages.
5. Too many vitamins can harm your health.
6. Can I speak to you for a minute?
7. I cant talk to you now, Im very busy.
8. He cant come to the meeting tomorrow.
H Check () the words that are countable nouns and the words
that are uncountable nouns.
Words from the text Countable Noun Uncountable Noun

1. coffee
2. food
3. friends
4. money
5. musicians
6. parties
7. people
8. person
9. rooms
10. time
149 Quartet 2
U N I T
I Make two different versions of the passage using some / any /

much / many / a few / a little and a lot of. There are many
possibilities.
Harold is a very unusual person. He works very hard but he doesnt have
a lot of money. He has (2)__________ friends, but he doesnt have
(1) ________
(3)__________ time to be with them.
He has (4)__________ parties in his house and he always invites (5)__________

friends to his parties. He also invites (6)__________ people who he does
business with.
The parties are terrific. There is always (7)__________ delicious food and
(8) ______ to drink. There is (9)__________ good music because Harold knows
(10)__________ excellent musicians who are happy to play at his parties.
J Complete the passage using be going to or the Present

Progressive.
Ron: going to do (do) this summer?
Hi, what are you (1) _____________
Lisa: I (2) _______________ (travel) to the Dead Sea.
Ron: Are you (3) _______________ (travel) alone?
Lisa: No, Claire (4) _______________ (join) me.
Ron: Isnt Claire (5) _______________ (work) this summer?
Lisa: No, she (6) _______________ (work) now to make some money for
the vacation. She (7) _______________ (take care) of her sister's
children.
Ron: (8) _______________ (she study) next year?
Lisa: She doesn't know yet. She only knows that she (9) _______________
(not work) with children.
150 Quartet 2
U N I T
K Complete the passage using Past Simple (We built a new

house) and Past Progressive (We were living with a friend.)
Last night I (1) _________________ (not go) out because I was very tired.
didnt go
I (2)____________ (stay) home and (3) ____________ (watch) television.
While I (4) ________ (watch) a murder show, I fell asleep. While I
(5)___________ (sleep) I (6) ____________ (dream) that someone
(7)____________ (try) to kill me.
In my dream I (8)____________ (run) away and (9)____________ (hide) in a
small boat near a lake. The killer (10)____________ (look) for me near the lake
but he (11) ____________ (not see) me.
While he (12) ____________ (look) for me, a cat (13) ____________ (run) out
and (14) ____________ (make) some noise. The killer (15) ___________ (think)
that it was me and shot his gun in the direction of the boat where I
(16) ____________ (hide).
The noise of the gun (17) ____________ (wake) me up. Now I dont know if I was
killed in my dream or not.
151 Quartet 2
U N I T
L Read what Henias mother and Peters mother think. Choose the
right word in each pair.
Henias mother lives in the city. This is what she thinks.
I think that Peter and Henia (1) should / must sell their house in the country and
move to the city. Henia has a new job in the city. That means she
(2) should / must have a car to get to work from their house because there arent
any buses that go to the city regularly. A car is very expensive and she
(3) have / has /should to pay a lot for gas and insurance on the car. She also
(4) should / must drive for a long time to get to and from work every day. If they
live in the city, she wont (5) have to / should own another car and she wont have
to drive a long time every day. A house in the country is very nice, but they
(6) should / must have the time and money to enjoy it.
Peters mother lives in the country near Peter and Henia. This is what she thinks.
I think that Peter and Henia (7) should / must keep their house in the country.
They love the country and their children love the country. If they move to the city
they will (8) have to / should pay a lot of money for a very small apartment. They
(9) should / must spend the money on another car and live in a place that they
love. In addition, Henia (10) should / must be at work very early. That means that
she goes home early, too. She doesnt (11) have to / must drive during rush hour.
152 Quartet 2
U N I T
M Complete the passage. Use used to where appropriate.

plays
Gregory (1) ___________ used to be
(play) tennis every week. He (2) _____________ (be)
a great player, but now he (3) _____________________ (not play) very well.
He (4) ___________________ (practice) every day, but now he only
(5)_____________________ (practice) on weekends and during vacations.
Sam (6)____________________ (study) at the university. He (7)__________

(go) to the library every day, but now he (8) __________________ (go out) with
his friends instead. He (9) ___________________ (get) good grades, but now he
(10) __________ (do) badly.
Wanda and her husband have four children. Wanda (11) ______________ (work)
in a bank, and her husband (12)________ (own) a clothes store. They
(13)__________________ (go out) all the time when they were in college, but
now they (14) _____________________ (not have) time. Now they
(15)__________ (work) hard all day and spend time with their children at night.
N Complete the passage using the words in the box. There is more
than one answer.
though even though although but
but
1. Paris is a big city _____________ Bombay is much bigger.
2. _______ I heard the movie Casablanca is wonderful, I dont think Ill go to
see it.
3. _______ the weather in Alaska was very cold, we enjoyed the visit.
4. Mark asked me to join him, _____ he did it in a very strange way.
5. _____ David doesnt speak French, he managed very well on his visit to
Paris.
6. _____ Richard knew about the risks of traveling alone in the Canyon, he still
didnt ask anyone to go with him.
7. _____ Mario apologized, I didnt forgive him.
8. Nancy doesnt have a great sense of humor ____ she is very popular.
153 Quartet 2
U N I T
O Put the sentences together and make one long sentence.

Example: England is a democracy.
This democracy also has a queen.
England is a democracy that/which also has a queen.
1. The artist will be famous one day.

His painting won first prize.
2. This movie was made in Hong Kong.

Its about Kung Fu.
3. Millions of Native American people died from simple diseases.

The European settlers brought simple diseases with them.
4. Many people disapprove of fur coats.

Fur coats are made of animal skins.
P Complete the passage using the Present Passive.
is called (call) Judo.

One of the Japanese sports of fighting without weapons (1) _______
The sport (2) _________________ (base) on skill, not mystery. This skill
(3) ______________________ (develop) through constant training and practice.
In contests, points (4) _________________ (score) by throwing the opponent
onto his or her back. The level of each sportsperson (5) _______________
(show) by the color of his or her belt. Different colors (6) _______________
(wear) at each level.
154 Quartet 2
U N I T
Q Fill in the missing clauses.

Use: so, suchthat, so..
that
1. They were so happy about the good news _______they decided to throw a
party.
2. Some of the legends we hear sound so real ______ we believe they are
true.
3. Hes interested in being an astrologist, ______ hes doing a course.
4. Hes such a good cook _______ hes thinking of turning it into a profession.
5. It was _____ cold in Alaska that we decided to cut our visit short.
6. Nothing grows in the desert, _____ you must take food with you.
7. Istanbul is _____ an interesting city that you need at least a week to see it.
R You have won a Dream Trip. decide where youll go and what
youll do.
1. I might ___________________________________________ .
2. I may ____________________________________________ .
3. I could ___________________________________________ .
155 Quartet 2
U N I T
S Answer the questions using: in order to, because, and so..that

Example:
Why did you go on a safari?
I went on a safari because I wanted to see Africa.
... so that I could see Africa.
... in order to see Africa.
1. Why are you taking so many suitcases with you?

Im taking so many suitcases ____________________________.
2. Why didnt you walk through the trails of the canyon?

I didnt walk through the trails ____________________________.
3. Why are you spending so much time in the Grand Canyon?

Im spending so much time there ____________________________.
4. Why are you studying geography?

Im studying geography ____________________________.
5. Why did you take your family on such a long and difficult trip through the
canyon trails?
I took my family on this trip ____________________________.
T Fill in the missing verbs with Past Passive.
was invented (invent) in 1760 in Belgium. It (2)_____________

Roller skating (1)____________
(develop) by the Americans in the beginning of the 18th century. As a sport, roller
skating (3) ____________ (develop) in the late 19th century. In the 1970s the
shape of the skates (4) _______________ (change), and the wooden and metal
wheels (5) _______________ (replace) with plastic ones. Roller blades took the
place of roller skates.
156 Quartet 2
U N I T
U Complete the sentences with the correct form of the verb in

parentheses.
1. If you _____________ (visit) Hawaii, you _____________ (understand) why
it is called the Paradise of the Pacific.
2. If the volcano _____________ (erupt), the lava _____________ (cause)

damage to the land.
3. We _____________ (can, see) dolphins if we _____________ (go) on

the snorkel adventure cruise.
4. Ill _____________ (go) on vacation next month if I _____________

(get) a raise at work.
5. If he _____________ (carry) his passport around with him, he

_____________ (might, lose) it.
6. If we _____________ (drink) the water, we _____________ (could, get)

sick.
7. Ill _____________ (call) you from the airport if the plane _____________
(land) on time.
8. If you _____________ (pay) for the tour in advance, we _____________

(give) you a 10% discount.
157 Quartet 2
U N I T
V Fill in the blanks with: before, after, when, while. Use capital
letters where necessary.
before
1. I bought my new suitcase ________________ the trip to Africa.
2. We saw a good movie _________ we were flying to New York.
3. _________ the teacher entered the room, the students were talking to each
other.
4. We saw hundreds of lions _______ we were flying over the park in the
hot air balloon.
5. _______ I get back from my vacation next week, I will start the new project.
6. I fell asleep _______ I was reading the guidebook.
7. I want to snorkel at the coral reef _______ it is cleaned up.
158 Quartet 2
U N I T
PART 2: TEST YOURSELF

A Choose the right word for the blank space.
Questions 1-4:
1. Leroy always __________ home from work if the weather is good.

a. walk b. is walking c. walks d. walked
2. Its a long walk, but Leroy __________ walking.

a. enjoys b. enjoyed c. will enjoy d. is enjoying
3. Yesterday it __________, so Leroy didnt walk.

a. rains b. was raining c. rain d. is raining
4. He __________ the bus.

a. catches b. was catching c. will catch d. caught
Questions 5-8:
5. Listen to that song! That is Lucys voice. She __________ .

a. sang b. sings c. is singing d. are singing
6. She usually __________ when she is happy.

a. sing b. is singing c. sings d. dont sing
7. She has the __________ voice in our family.

a. beautiful b. more beautiful c. most beautiful d. too beautiful
8. She __________ stay at the party until very late because she is having a
good time.
a. must b. may c. has to d. used to
159 Quartet 2
U N I T
B Choose the one question that you cannot answer in each

sentence or group of sentences.
9. Sally lost her watch last week. It was on her wrist and the catch broke.
a. When did she lose it?
b. Where did she lose it?
c. Why did she lose it?
d. Who lost the watch?
10. Derek is going to go to Alaska. He wants to make a lot of money.

a. Why is he going to Alaska?
b. Where is he going?
c. Who is going to Alaska?
d. When is he going?
11. Joels sister wants to be a doctor. She is planning to go to medical school.

a. What is her name?
b. What does she want to do?
c. Why does she want to go to medical school?
d. Where does she want to study?
160 Quartet 2
U N I T
C Choose the right word for the blank space.

12. How ____ video cassettes did you take for the weekend?
a. much b. many c. any d. some
13. Do you have ___ milk in the house?

a. many b. a c. any d. the
14. I want to buy ____ apples.

a. any b. an c. much d. some
15. Tom is ____ than Dick.

a. taller b. tallest c. very tall d. as tall as
16. Elizabeth is the ____ of the five sisters.

a. as old as b. older c. more old d. oldest
17. The book _____ in Russian.

a. was written b. wrote c. was writing d. writes
18. This radio ____ and I cant fix it. Youll have to buy a new one.
a. is breaking b. is broken c. broke d. breaks
19. Dont worry about me. ____ I get hungry, Ill buy some pizza.
a. If b. Unless c. But d. Must
20. I am going to be home by 3:00 ____ I have to make dinner tonight.

a. if b. as soon as c. because d. so
21. Joe ____, but he doesnt have time for skiing anymore.
a. have to ski b. is skiing c. was skiing d. used to ski
22. Sandra met a man ____ used to be an actor. Now he teaches actors.
a. who b. but c. which d. what
23. Jenny wants to buy a dog ____ she loves animals, especially dogs.
a. so b. although c. because d. if
24. John bought a house near the beach ____ he could swim every day.
a. but b. so that c. even if d. unless
25. Bob and Sam want to go on a long trip ____ they finish college.
a. after b. unless c. but d. that
161 Quartet 2
U N I T
D Match the definitions to the words.
Questions 26-28:
26. ___ costs a lot of money
27. ___ not the same
28. ___ free time
a. vacation
b. accept
c. different
d. expensive
e. building
Questions 29-31:
29. ___ a person who doesnt eat meat
30. ___ not sick
31. ___ very old
a. spend
b. vegetarian
c. healthy
d. ancient
e. remains
Questions 32-34:
32. ___ a collection of old stories
33. ___ hills of sand
34. ___ to cause something new to exist
a. civilization
b. compliments
c. mythology
d. dunes
e. to create
162 Quartet 2
U N I T
E Complete the paragraphs using the words in the box. Dont use
all of the words.
ancient is interesting modern traveled

are speaking is spending speak was interested
is going to go languages spent
Questions 35-41:
When Professor Hartfeld was a young man, he (35) ___________ in archeology

and (36) ________________ . Every summer he (37) ____________ to different
countries to dig for the remains of (38) ______________________ civilizations.
He (39) _______________ time in Greece, Italy, Egypt, and Turkey. He knew the
ancient languages of these places and he knew the (40) ___________________
languages that the people of today (41) _____________ . He also went to China
and other places in Southeast Asia.
are interested is connected is interested which

biology is connecting knows who
connected going to be reads
Questions 42-48:
Ruth is only sixteen years old, but she (42) _____________ what she wants to
do with her life. She is (43) _____________ a biologist. She (44) ____________
all kinds of books about (45) _____________. She goes to a special class at the
university for young people who (46) _____________ in science. She works on
special projects with scientists (47) _____________ want to help pupils in high
school learn more. She is very excited about everything that (48) ____________
to biology.
end lot of practice lot of time
Questions 49-50:
This is the (49) _____________ of the test. We hope that you have done well. If
there is something that you dont understand, go back and study the material
again. It takes a long time and a (50) _____________ to learn English. Good
luck!
163 Quartet 2
U N I T
7
ANSWER KEY (50 items, 2 points each item)
1. c. walks
2. a. enjoys
3. b. was raining
4. d. caught
5. c. is singing
6. c. sings
7. c. most beautiful
8. b. may
9. b. Where did she lose it?
10. d. When is he going?
11. a. What is her name?
12. b. many
13. c. any
14. d. some
15. a. taller
16. d. oldest
17. a. was written
18. b. is broken
19. a. If
20. c. because
21. d. used to ski
22. a. who
23. c. because
24. b. so that
25. a. after
164 Quartet 2
U N I T
7
26. d. expensive
27. c. different
28. a. vacation
29. b. vegetarian
30. c. healthy
31. d. ancient
32. c. mythology
33. d. dunes
34. e. to create
35. was interested
36. languages
37. traveled
38. ancient
39. spent
40. modern
41. speak
42. knows
43. going to be
44. reads
45. biology
46. are interested
47. who
48. is connected
49. end
50. lot of practice
165 Quartet 2
Appendix

beat beat set set
come came swim swam
cut cut take took
do did tear tore
draw drew tell told
feed fed wear wore
feel felt win won
forget forgot
forgive forgave
get got
give gave
go went
have had
hear heard
hide hid
hit hit
hurt hurt
keep kept
know knew
lay laid
lead led
lean leaned
learn learned
leave left
lend lent
let let
lie lay
light lit
lose lost
167 Quartet 2
Advice, asking for and giving 7-8; 26-32

Apologizing 112-115
Complaining 112-115
Clauses
Contrast: even though, although, though, but 37-41
Relative: who, which, that, whose 50-55
Result: so, therefore, sothat, suchthat 74-79
Time 130-135
Excuses 42-45; 47
Information, asking for and giving 65-67
Modals
could (permission, ability, past ability) 84-91
have to/has to (obligation) 2-8
may (possibility) 84-91; 93
might (possibility) 84-91;93
must (obligation) 2-8
should, shouldnt (for advice) 7-8; 26-32
Past Passive 107-111
Persuading 136-139; 141
Present Passive 60-64
Purpose: in order to, so that, because 96-100
Real Conditions 120-125
used to 13-18; 21-23
169 Quartet 2
Introduction
Quartet 3
reading comprehension activities, guided writing, speaking activities, grammar
and vocabulary exercises. The book is organized thematically following the topics
of Quartet Online. The result is a fully integrated language learning course. We
III Quartet 3
Map of Quartet 3
Vocabulary Language
Points
Unit 1 Pages 2-26 Celebrations Talking about the

Celebrations Music and concerts Past: Past Simple,
Past Progressive,
Part 1: The Running of Pages 2-14 Past Passive, was
the Bulls able to, used to,
could, had to
Part 2: Were Going Pages 15-26 Talking about the
to Salzburg! Future: Present
Simple, Present
Progressive, can,
will, be going to,
might
Opinions, agreeing
and disagreeing
Unit 2 Pages 28-52 Celebrations Present Perfect

The Chinese in the Culture and history with for, since and
U.S. in the city other time
expressions
Part 1: About the Pages 28-41 Present Perfect
History of Chinatown Progressive
Part 2: What Have Pages 42-52

You Been Doing?
Unit 3 Pages 54-76 Describing and Present Perfect

Unusual Buildings of repairing buildings with time
the World expressions
Present Perfect vs.
Part 1: The Leaning Pages 54-65 Past Simple
Tower of Pisa and
Angkor Wat
Part 2: Pages 66-76

The Amsterdam Arena
IV Quartet 3
Reading Speaking Writing
Activities Activities
Tourists Injured by Interviewing a Completing a story

Bulls of Pamplona partner about past Writing your
activities opinion about the
Discussing the Running of the
Running of the Bulls in Pamplona
Bulls in Pamplona Writing an entry in
Role-play: deciding a travel diary
which concert to Writing an e-mail
see at the Salzburg about the Salzburg
Festival Festival
Writing about a
celebration
Chinatown Daily Role-play: Writing an

Historical and interviewing a explanation for a
Cultural Tour partner using a tour to a museum
How Chinese New questionnaire Writing about a
Year Began: A Role-play: a cultural celebration
Chinese Legend conversation Describing the
between a guide facts of your life
and a tourist Writing a letter to a
Find someone friend
who Writing notes to
Role-play: a prepare for a job
conversation interview
between two old
friends
An Archeologist Discussing a Writing a police

at Angkor Wat mystery report
Role-play: an Writing a report
interview between about an unusual
an archeologist building
and a reporter Writing a
Administering a questionnaire
questionnaire Writing about a
sports event
V Quartet 3
Vocabulary Language
Points
Unit 4 Pages 78-102 Buildings and Past Perfect

The Seven Built architecture Gerunds and
Wonders of the infinitives
Ancient World
Part 1: a Great Pages 78-89

Pyramid, a Hanging
Garden, and a Giant
Lighthouse
Part 2: The Seven Pages 90-102

Wonders on the Big
Screen
Unit 5 Pages 104-128 Markets Non-defining

Great Bargains! Buying and selling relative clauses
Review of Modals
Part 1: Buying and Pages 104-115
Selling
Part 2: Bazaars and Pages 116-128

Special Gifts
Unit 6 Pages 130-150 Review Review

Review
VI Quartet 3
The Lighthouse of Talking about a Writing about a building

Alexandria historical event that you think is a
Deciding which "wonder"
story is false Writing a conversation
between a tour guide
and a traveler
Writing about a building
that youve seen
Mias Travel Guide: Adding information Writing an article

Buying and Selling to an advertisement recommending a shop
at the San Jose Inventing your own or market
Flea Market flea market Writing an
advertisement
The Critics Talk: Talking about work Writing about your plans
The Sun Also experiences Writing a letter about a
Rises Role-play: a vacation
Chapter 23: The conversation Writing a letter about a
Temple of Artemis between a funny experience
Unit 19: The policeman and a Writing an accident
Temple of Artemis truck driver report
Its About to Role-play: a job Writing a letter giving
Happen interview health advice
Writing an
advertisement for an
unusual job
Writing a text criticizing
a book
Writing about a
historical event
Writing an ending to a
story
Writing a story
VII Quartet 3
Vocabulary Language
Points
Unit 7 Pages 152-166 Test Test

Tests
Test 1 Pages 152-158
Test 2 Pages 159-166
VIII Quartet 3
Test Test Test
IX Quartet 3
U N I T
1
Celebrations
U N I T
PART 1: THE RUNNING OF THE BULLS

Language Point
Talking about the Past
Before You Start
Reporter
This is the Channel 6 News, reporting from Pamplona, Spain. This week is the
Fiesta of San Fermin in Pamplona, when the famous Running of the Bulls event
takes place. Every morning during the Fiesta, all types of people run in front of
the bulls as they are on their way to the bullring. This morning, I interviewed
several people who took part in the run. The question that I asked was: how did
it feel to run with the bulls? This is what they told me:
2 Quartet 3
U N I T
Torin
I loved it. It was so exciting. While I was running, the
crowd was screaming all around me. I enjoy doing
dangerous things.
Marco
I was frightened. To be honest, I didnt really want to join
the run. I felt like I had to, because I came all the way to
Pamplona for the Fiesta. I used to do dangerous things
all the time, many years ago, but I dont like to anymore.
This was definitely my last run with the bulls.
Salo
When I was younger, I could run for hours and not get
tired. I felt the same way during the run. Even though it
was a dangerous thing to do, it really made me feel alive.
Gerald
While I was running, I fell on the ground and couldnt get
up. Luckily, I was helped to my feet by some of the
people in the crowd and I watched the end of the run
from the street. Even though I wasnt able to finish the
run, I still enjoyed the excitement.

1. t
___ The Running of the Bulls takes place in Pamplona, Spain.
2. ___ Marco loved running with the bulls.
3. ___ Salo could run for hours when he was younger.
4. ___ Gerald felt excited during the run.
5. ___ Marco used to do dangerous things.
6. ___ Gerald fell during the run.
3 Quartet 3
U N I T
B Who do you think said the following things?

Match the statements in A to the people in B.
A B
a. Marco
b During the run, I felt like I was
1. ___ b. Salo
young again. c. Torin
2. ___ Were you frightened during the d. the reporter
run? e. Gerald
3. ___ I had a good time watching the
run.
4. ___ I didnt enjoy the Running of the
Bulls.
5. ___ This was one of the most exciting
days of my life!
4 Quartet 3
U N I T
Some Grammar
Talking about the Past
Form Usage Comments
Past Simple They ran with the bulls in to talk about things that time expressions:
Pamplona. happened at a definite yesterday, the day before,
time in the past last week, last month, two
regular verbs: add ed years ago
irregular verbs: see table
at the back of the book.
Past 1. While he was running 1. for an activity that was We sometimes use when
Progressive with the bulls, the crowd in progress at a specific and while in clauses with
was screaming. time in the past or when the Past Progressive.
two actions occur at the
2. While I was watching
same time
the run, one of the
runners fell. 2. for an action that was
interrupted by another
3. The bulls were running action in the past
down the street.
3. for background
descriptions
Past Passive Luckily I was helped to to focus on the action and Note: The third form of
my feet by some people not on the person who did many irregular verbs is
in the crowd. it listed on page 167.
was able to When I was younger, I to talk about something Was/ Were able to is the
was able to win races we had the ability to do in past form of is/are able to
easily. Now I only win the past and can.
once in a while.
used to I used to enjoy doing to talk about things that

dangerous things, but we usually did in the past
now I prefer to be safe. but dont do anymore
could Last year, I could run for to talk about things that Could is the past form of
miles every day. Now, Im we were capable of doing can.
lucky if I can run a mile. in the past
had to Im sorry I couldnt meet to talk about things that Had to is the past form of
you at the hotel yesterday. we had an obligation to have to/has to. It is also
I had to watch the end of do in the past used as the past form of
the Running of the Bulls! must, to show obligation.
5 Quartet 3
U N I T
Some Practice
A Complete the sentences by underlining the correct form of the

verb.
1. While my friends (ran, were running) with the bulls, I (was watching,
could watch) from the street.
2. He (stayed, was able to stay) home during the Running of the Bulls,
because he (used to be, was) ill.
3. A friend of mine (hurt, was hurt) during the run, so he (had to, could) go to
the doctor.
4. I (used to, had to) enjoy watching the Running of the Bulls, but now it
bothers me to see people get hurt.
5. Several people (were interviewed, were interviewing) by the reporter after

the run.
6. Thousands of people (visited, were visiting) Pamplona last year to see the
Running of the Bulls.
7. Im thrilled that I (was able to, used to) watch the Running of the Bulls in
person yesterday. Last year I couldnt travel to Pamplona, so I (could, had
to) watch it on television.
8. The reporter (watched, was watched) the Running of the Bulls from her
balcony. After the run (was, used to be) over, she (was speaking, spoke) to
some of the runners.
9. The Running of the Bulls (could be, was) very short. It only (could last,
lasted) for about three minutes.
10. The bulls (ran, used to run) much faster than the men. They (had to, were
able to) pass the men easily.
6 Quartet 3
U N I T
B Check () the sentence that means the same thing as each

statement.
1. One of the bulls was hurt during the run.
a. ___ The bull hurt someone.
b. ___ The bull didnt get hurt.
Something hurt the bull.
c. ___
2. The bulls could run faster than any of the men.

a. ___ The men were able to run faster than the bulls.
b. ___ The bulls were able to run faster than the men.
c. ___ The bulls were not able to run.
3. While the bulls were entering the bullring, the runners were jumping out of
the way.
a. ___ First the bulls entered the bullring, then the runners jumped out of
the way.
b. ___ First the runners jumped out of the way, then the bulls entered the
bullring.
c. ___ The runners jumped out of the way as the bulls entered the
bullring.
4. While the crowd was cheering, the bulls started to run.

a. ___ The bulls started to run, then the crowd started cheering.
b. ___ The crowd started cheering, then the bulls started to run.
c. ___ The bulls started to run before the crowd started to cheer.
5. He was able to run much faster last year. Now he isnt in shape.
a. ___ He could run faster last year.
b. ___ He can run faster this year.
c. ___ He cant run.
6. I used to enjoy the Running of the Bulls.

a. ___ I enjoy the Running of the Bulls.
b. ___ I enjoyed the Running of the Bulls in the past, but now I do not.
c. ___ I didnt enjoy the Running of the Bulls in the past, but now I do.
7 Quartet 3
U N I T
C Complete the conversation with the correct past form of the

verbs.
Monica: were you in the run last year?

Torin, (1) _______
Torin: Yes, and the year before as well.
Monica: (2)______ (do) you enjoy it?
Torin: It (3)_________ (be) fantastic. I (4)_________ (feel) so alive when I

was running. I didnt even know how fast I (5)________________
(can run) until I started coming to Pamplona during the Fiesta.
Monica: I (6)_____________ (hear) that someone

(7) ___________________ (be hurt) last year. Is that true?
Torin: Well, at least one person gets hurt every year. Last year, a friend of
mine (8)______________ (break) his leg. But thats the risk of
running with the bulls.
Monica: You know I really dont need to prove anything to anyone. Id

rather watch the run on television. Good luck, Torin!
8 Quartet 3
U N I T
D Interview your partner about what he/she used to do in the past,

using the prompts below. Then report your answers to the rest
of the class.
Example: enjoy dangerous sports
Did you use to enjoy dangerous sports when you were young?
1. run/fast
2. travel more
3. be frightened of animals
4. work all the time
5. study a lot
6. sleep a lot
E Pick one of the openings and complete the story, using your
imagination. Share your story with the other students in the
class.
1. It was a hot July afternoon in Pamplona, during the Fiesta of San Fermin. I
was standing with a crowd of people, and we were all waiting for the start of
the Running of the Bulls. Suddenly
_____________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________
2. We decided to go on vacation early this year, so we flew to Pamplona in

July. I was walking around the city, enjoying the sights, when suddenly
_____________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________
9 Quartet 3
U N I T
Something to Read
Some Words
bullring injure spectator
event participate trample
horn protest
Tourists Injured by Bulls

of Pamplona
T wo tourists were
trampled yesterday
during the main event of the
bulls to lead them into the
bullring.
Kenneth Astor was watching
"It was a crazy thing to do,"
said Melvin, "but I had to do
it. I used to run in races all
Fiesta of San Fermin in the run when he got in the of the time when I was
Pamplona, Spain: Melvin way of a bull. The bull younger. I wanted to tell my
Jackson was participating carried him down the street friends that I ran with the
in the famous Running of the on its horns and then bulls."
Bulls event and Kenneth dropped and trampled him.
Astor was a spectator. Kenneth broke his arm and Several animal rights groups
The well-known Running of several ribs. American protested against the event
the Bulls takes place from tourist Melvin Jackson was this week. They said the
July 7-14 every year. Each running when he fell in front event is cruel to animals, and
morning, thousands of of one of the bulls. The bull asked people not to attend
spectators watch a group of trampled him and injured next year.
people run in front of the his leg.
10 Quartet 3
U N I T
Some Practice
1. t The Running of the Bulls is part of the Fiesta of San Fermin.
____
2. ____ Three tourists were trampled during the Running of the Bulls event.
3. ____ Melvin Jackson was a spectator.
4. ____ Kenneth Astor broke his arm and several ribs.
5. ____ Animal rights groups dont like the Running of the Bulls event.
6. ____ Kenneth Astor used to run when he was younger.

1. What is the Running of the Bulls?
2. When does the Running of the Bulls take place?
3. How was Melvin Jackson injured?
4. How was Kenneth Astor injured?
5. Why did Melvin participate in the Running of the Bulls event?
6. Where might you see a text like this?
A B
1. b
___ bullring a. to hurt
2. ___ event b. the arena where bullfights are
3. ___ horn held
4. ___ to injure c. to say that you disagree with
5. ___ to participate something
6. ___ to protest d. to take part in an event
7. ___ spectator e. someone who watches an event
8. ___ to trample f. to run over someone or
something with your feet
g. a hard pointed part that grows
out of the heads of many animals
(bulls, for example)
h. something important that
happens
11 Quartet 3
U N I T
Language Function
Opinions, Agreeing and Disagreeing
GIVING OPINIONS
I think / believe / feel (that) you
In my opinion
As far as Im concerned
To my mind
AGREEING
Strong Agreement Strong Disagreement

I (totally) agree with you. I (totally) disagree with...
I couldnt agree more. You must be joking! (informal)
No chance!/ Nonsense! (informal)
Weak Agreement Weak/ Tactful Disagreement

You might be right... Thats an intesting point, but...
I suppose so... I dont quite agree with you.
Im afraid I dont see it that way.
What Do You Think?
A Discuss these two questions with a small group of students. How

many people agree with you?
1. In your opinion, why do people participate in the Running of the Bulls? Why
do people watch the event?
2. Would you enjoy running with the bulls? Why or why not?
12 Quartet 3
U N I T
B Pick one of the statements. With a partner, discuss at least three

reasons why you EITHER disagree OR agree. Compare your
answers with other students in the class. Use expressions from
the language function box on page 12.
1. The Running of the Bulls is a dangerous event.

2. People who participate in the Running of the Bulls are brave.
3. People do dangerous things because they need excitement.
4. The Running of the Bulls is cruel to animals.
C Write a paragraph giving your opinion about one of the

statements in exercise B.
13 Quartet 3
U N I T
On Your Own
You were a spectator at the Running of the Bulls event where

the two tourists were injured. Write an entry in your travel diary
explaining what happened.
14 Quartet 3
U N I T
PART 2: WERE GOING TO SALZBURG!
Language Point
Talking about the Future
Before You Start
Sally: I am finally doing it! Im flying to Salzburg in a few days to see the
Salzburg Festival. My plane leaves at 8:00 pm next Monday night. I
might even see Placido Domingo in person!
Dinah: Thats great, Sally. I didnt know that you were a fan of opera music.
Are you going to buy tickets for some of the classical music concerts
as well?
Sally: I may try a few classical concerts while Im there. Theres a Mozart
concert on the program that looks fantastic. You should come to
Salzburg with me. I know you have some vacation time.
15 Quartet 3
U N I T
1
Dinah: I can take some time off work next week if I want to, but Id rather
spend my vacation on the beach. Thanks for the offer, though.
Sally: There are some great jazz concerts on the schedule for next week. I
know how much you like jazz.
Dinah: Thats true, but I still cant come. I dont really have the money to
travel right now.
Sally: Didnt you know? I won two free tickets to the festival in a contest.
Everything is organized and paid for the airfare, the hotel, the meals,
and the concerts.
Dinah: Oh. Well its just that Im very busy right now
Sally: Maybe next time. Hey Dinah, look at this. It says here that the famous
rock band, "The Flying Peppers," is playing at the Salzburg auditorium
next week! Thats during the festival.
Dinah: "The Flying Peppers"! Thats my kind of music. I think Ill come with
you after all!

Example: Sally is flying to Pamplona next Friday afternoon.
Sally is flying to Salzburg next Monday night.
1. Sally is only going to buy tickets for the opera in Salzburg.

2. Dinah cant take any time off work.
3. "The Flying Peppers" is the name of a famous opera.
4. Dinah would rather spend her vacation in Salzburg than on the beach.
5. Dinah won free tickets to Salzburg.
1. Why is Sally flying to Salzburg on Monday?

2. What types of music can people hear in Salzburg next week?
3. Is Dinah going to fly to Salzburg? Why or why not?
16 Quartet 3
U N I T
Some Grammar
Talking about the Future
Form Usage Comments

Present My plane leaves at to talk about fixed When we talk about
Simple 7:00 am tomorrow. schedules in the future the future, we use
time expressions such
as tomorrow, tonight,
later, soon, the day
after tomorrow, in a
few days, in 20 years,
next June, next week
(year, month), next
summer.
Present Were meeting at the to talk about definite See comments for
Progressive concert at 3:00 pm plans for the future Present Simple above.
tomorrow. Do you
want to join us?
be going to Im going to travel to to talk about

Austria to attend the something that is
Salzburg Festival. pre-planned or that we
intend to do
will 1. Is that the phone? 1. for decisions made
Ill answer it. at the moment of
It might be Sara, speaking
calling to tell us if
2. for offers and
she got the concert
choices
tickets.
2. Ill buy the concert
tickets if you pay for
dinner.
can I can introduce you to talk about See comments for

to the musicians something that we are Present Simple above.
tomorrow night. able to do in the future
Theyre friends of
mine.
17 Quartet 3
U N I T
Form Usage Comments

should You should go to at to give advice about See comments for
least one opera at the the future Present Simple above.
festival next week.
may I may go to the to talk about things See comments for
outdoor jazz concert that are possible in Present Simple above.
tonight, if it doesnt the future
rain.
might I might go to the to talk about things See comments for

Mozart concert that are possible in Present Simple above.
later today, if Im not the future
too tired.
Some Practice
A Underline the correct form.

1. The jazz concert (starts, will start) at 8:00 pm tonight. Do you want to go?
2. Placido Domingo (is singing, can sing) at the opera house next Monday
night. The show starts at 8:00 pm.
3. It (may, will) rain tonight during the outdoor concert. The sky looks a little
cloudy.
4. - I dont have enough money for the concert.
-Thats OK. (I am going to, Ill) buy your ticket.
5. We (can, are going to) travel around Europe after the festival. We plan to
visit as many countries as possible.
6. You really (are going to, should) go to the jazz concert tonight. Its supposed
to be fantastic.
7. I (might, can) go and see The Flying Peppers tonight. It depends on
whether we can get tickets.
8. The pianist (isnt playing, doesnt play) at the auditorium tonight, so he (can,
cant) give us a private concert.
18 Quartet 3
U N I T
B Check () the sentence that means the same thing as each

statement.
1. He is playing piano with the Vienna Philharmonic tonight.
Hell definitely play piano with the Vienna Philharmonic tonight.

a. ____
b. ____ He might play piano with the Vienna Philharmonic tonight.
c. ____ He wont play piano with the Vienna Philharmonic tonight.
2. He can sing that part in next months opera.
a. ____ He isnt able to sing that part in next months opera.

b. ____ Hes able to sing that part in next months opera.
c. ____ Hes going to sing that part at sometime in the future.
3. I may go to the Salzburg Festival this year.
a. ____ It is a good idea to go to the Salzburg Festival this year.

b. ____ Ill possibly go to the Salzburg Festival this year.
c. ____ I wont go to the Salzburg Festival this year.
4. We should buy tickets to the Mozart concert, or theyll be sold out.
a. ____ We intend to buy tickets to the Mozart concert.

b. ____ Its a good idea to buy tickets to the Mozart concert.
c. ____ We cant buy tickets to the Mozart concert, because the tickets are
sold out.
5. Im going to hear Placido Domingo sing tonight.
a. ____ I have definite plans to hear Placido Domingo sing tonight.

b. ____ I might hear Placido Domingo sing tonight.
c. ____ Im able to hear Placido Domingo sing tonight.
19 Quartet 3
U N I T
C Complete the notice below by filling in either be going to or

might.
Here are a few last-minute changes to this weeks performance schedule.

might
We are sorry for any inconvenience that the changes (1) _________ cause.
Tonights church choral concert in the large auditorium (2)__________ start
a few minutes late because the singers only arrive in Salzburg late this
afternoon.
The Strauss concert scheduled for tomorrow night (3)____________ be
canceled because the conductor isnt feeling well. Check the notice board
tomorrow to see if the concert (4)______ take place as scheduled.
We were just told that the Salzburg Philharmonic (5) _____________ play
Verdis Don Carlos tonight. Instead, they will play La Traviata.
The outdoor jazz concert planned for tonight (6)_________ be moved
indoors if it rains.
There (7)__________ be a wine and cheese party after tomorrows
performance of Tristan and Isolde. The conductor said that he
(8)_________ join us at the party, but hes not sure yet.
20 Quartet 3
U N I T
D Together with your partner, use your imagination to write a

question/questions for each of the following answers. Use the
future forms of can, may, should, will, be going to, or might, or
the Present Progressive / Present Simple.
Example: Yes. Ill see you there! (a concert)
Are you going to go to the concert with us? OR
Can you go to the concert with us this evening?
1. At 8:00 pm this evening. (train to Vienna)
2. No. I dont like jazz. (the concert)
3. Only comfortable clothes. (Austria)
4. Three on Monday night. (classical concerts)
5. Sure. When do you want to move it? (piano)
6. Of course you can come with us. (the opera, Don Giovanni)
E Complete the passage below with the correct future form. Use
Present Progressive, should, may, might, or be going to. In
some cases, there may be more than one right answer.
Jazz spotlight at the festival this year:

Wallis Fitzgerald!
should
If you love jazz, you (1) __________ definitely plan to see Wallis Fitzgerald at
this years festival. He (2) ____________________ perform at the outdoor
stadium every day next week. He (3) ________________ play most of his old,
well-known songs, as well as a few new ones. If we are lucky, there
(4)_______________ even be a few surprises!
If you plan to see Wallis live, you (5) ______________ buy your tickets well in
advance. His performances (6) _________________ sell out fast!
21 Quartet 3
U N I T
F Oliver and his father are in Salzburg. Olivers father is there on business,
and Oliver is there for the festival. They want to go to a concert together
next week. With a partner, role-play a conversation between Oliver and his
father where they decide which concert to see. Use the information and the
schedules to help you.
Oliver
Oliver is a night person. He wakes up at 1:00 pm and goes to sleep at 3:00 am.
He likes jazz and classical music, but he hates opera. Oliver has the concert
schedule for the Salzburg festival.
Olivers father
Olivers father is a morning person. He wakes up at 6:00 am and goes to bed at
10:00 pm. He likes opera and jazz. He doesnt like classical music.
His business schedule is on page 23.
Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday
9:00 am - 10:00 am Live jazz: Wake Mozart in the Jazz in the park:
up with Wallis! morning Wallis and
company
12:00 pm - 2:00 pm The Salzburg

Orchestra:
Strauss
3:00 pm - 4:30 pm The Vienna Jazz in the park:

Symphony Wallis and
Orchestra company
6:00 pm - 9:00 pm The Opera House The Vienna The Opera House
presents: Philharmonic: presents:
Don Giovanni Bach Don Giovanni
10:00 pm - 11:30 pm An evening of An evening of The Opera House The Vienna

jazz: jazz: presents: Philharmonic:
Wallis Fitzgerald Wallis Fitzgerald Tristan and Isolde Tchaikovsky
22 Quartet 3
U N I T
Nov 18 WEEKLY PLANNER

Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday
8:00 am - 10:00 am prepare for prepare for
meeting meeting
11:00 am - 1:00 pm lunch business sales lunch business lunch with

meeting presentation meeting Victor
3:00 pm - 5:00 pm sign contract

with Vienna
Systems Ltd.
6:00 pm - 8:00 pm marketing marketing dinner with

seminar seminar Sales
Coordinator
9:00 pm - 10:00 pm review notes for meet with

presentation Director of
tomorrow Vienna Systems
Ltd.
G You are at the Salzburg festival. Look at the concert program

in exercise F and decide which concerts you want to see. Write an
e-mail to a friend telling him or her what you are going to do at
the festival.
23 Quartet 3
U N I T
Some Fun
1
3 4
5 6 7
10
A Fill in the missing words and then complete the crossword

puzzle.
Across
2. Traveling to different countries by plane is exciting.

___________
5. Running with the bulls can be very d___________.
7. I was t___ that Wallis Fitzgerald was playing tonight.
8. When people are given w_____________, they are told of dangers.
9. Sometimes dangerous activities are also very e____________.
10. All the details of the celebration were carefully p______________ and
organized.
Down
1. Afraid means to be f____________.

3. The big celebration in Rio de Janeiro is called the _________.
4. Mozarts music is known as c____________ music.
6. If a celebration is well o______________, it will probably be successful.
24 Quartet 3
U N I T
On Your Own
Write about a celebration in your culture. Your report should

answer some of the following questions:
When does the celebration take place?
Where does it take place?
What is done during the celebration?
What is the purpose of the celebration?
What Did You Learn?
Facts:
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
Words:
Word Meaning
25 Quartet 3
U N I T
Language points:
Language point Examples

Talking about the
Past:
Past Simple
Past Progressive
was able to
used to
could
had to
Language point Examples

Talking about the
Future:
Present Simple
Present Progressive
can
will
be going to
might
Crossword Answers
1
f
2
t r a v e l i n g
3 4
c i c
5 6 7
d a n g e r o u s t o l d
r h r a
n t g s
8
i e w a r n i n g s
v n n i
9
a e x c i t i n g c
l d z a
e l
10
p l a n n e d
26 Quartet 3
U N I T
2
The Chinese in the U.S.
U N I T
PART 1: ABOUT THE HISTORY OF

CHINATOWN
Language Point
Present Perfect with for, since and other time expressions
Before You Start
The biggest Chinatown in the United States is in San

Francisco. It has been the center of Chinese social and
cultural life since 1850 when it was established. The tourist
Chinatown has existed for about one hundred years and is
actually a site that was "invented" and created by the tourists.
In the beginning, when the Chinese people came to America,

they had no legal rights and lived in bad conditions. Since
1960, things have changed. Activists fought for rights and
respect for their people and against poverty. San Franciscos
Chinatown has become more prosperous over the last forty
years and has improved a lot.
This year, moviemaker Yan Lee, who was born in Californias

Chinatown, made a documentary movie about the history of
Chinatown. Since it came out, people havent stopped
talking about it.
They realize that the

Chinese have suffered
for years without complaining.
28 Quartet 3
U N I T

1. Where did the center of Chinese culture in America begin?
2. When was it established?
3. What type of conditions did the Chinese live in when they first came to San
Francisco?
4. What is the condition of Chinatown now? How do you know? Underline the
sentence in the text that gives you the answer.
5. What is Yan Lees movie about?
6. Why is it an important movie?
B Make the following sentences true.

Example:
The Chinatown in New York is the biggest one in the United States.
The Chinatown in San Francisco is the biggest one in the United States.
1. The tourist site of Chinatown has existed since the day the city was
established.
2. Chinese people have always had legal rights.
3. The Chinese people in Chinatown never needed to fight for their rights.
4. The movie about Chinatown hasnt influenced anyone.
5. The movie doesnt really describe life in Chinatown.
6. The creator of the movie doesnt know the subject very well.
C Fill in the blanks with one of the words in the box.
Some Words
activists improve prosperous rights
established poverty respect suffered
established
1. San Franciscos Chinatown was ______________about 150 years ago.
2. At first, the people were very poor and they _______________ a lot.
29 Quartet 3
U N I T
2
3. There was a lot of _________ and sickness. But the people didnt
complain.
4. A few years ago, the situation began to _________.
5. Many Chinese _________ began to work for changes.
6. They demanded their ____________ and the chance for a better life.
7. Today, Chinatown is much more ________________.
8. People there feel that they are getting the _____________ that they deserve
and they know now that it is important to be heard.
Some Grammar
Present Perfect: have/has + Past Participle
They have / havent spoken Chinese for many years.
She has / hasnt celebrated Chinese New Year since she was a
child.
Has he spoken to you in the past few

days?
Have you lived here all your life?
How long have you known Lee?
How long has she lived here?
30 Quartet 3
U N I T
Short Forms
I / You / We / They have just left. I've / You've / We've / They've just left.
He / She / It has arrived. Hes / Shes / Its arrived.
Note: The contraction of: hes, shes, and its, should not be confused with he
is = hes or she is = shes or it is = its
We use the Present Perfect with for and since when we want to describe
something that started in the past and is still true or relevant in the present.
We often say how long a situation has been true (with for and since).
Example: They've worked in the same job for 16 years since they left high
school.
We use for to describe the length of time the action has taken.
Example: Cindy has lived in the same house for twenty years. Shes still
living there now.
We use since to indicate when the action began in the past.

Example: He's been here since 5:00 am. He arrived at 5:00 am and is still
here.
We also use expressions such as: in the last year, over the past twenty
years, all day/week/month.
Example: He's worked hard all week/month/year.
We often use how long to ask questions about the Present Perfect with for
and since and other time expressions.
Examples: How long have they had this tradition?
For centuries.
Since the beginning of the century.
31 Quartet 3
U N I T
Some Practice
A Yan Lee, the creator of the movie The Secret City of San
Francisco, describes the movie in Famous People magazine.
Underline the sentences that are in the Present Perfect.
I ve lived in this city since and I hope now that they, as well as
I was born. For years Ive others, will understand the history
felt that the story of the city should of this place. Since the movie was
be told and have tried to find some- shown, Ive received thousands of
one to help sponsor the movie. Last letters. More and more people are
year I got the money to make the interested in the life of the Chinese
movie. I am so happy that I could living in the U.S.
finally do something for my people
B Rearrange the words to form correct sentences.

Example:
years / for / I / lived / have / Chinatown / in / 20.
I have lived in Chinatown for 20 years.
1. you / many / have / How / letters / received?
2. China / havent / We / from / heard / family / our / in the past year / in
3. the beginning / since / their / for / have / The Chinese / fought / legal rights /
of the century
4. Chinatown / in / long / How / Lyn / lived / has?
5. centuries / for / kept / traditions / old / Chinese / have / their / The
32 Quartet 3
U N I T
C Make sentences using the items in the box. Use the Present
Perfect. Add your own words
Example: I've lived in this city for many years.
I live for many years.

My closest friend work since last year.
My family travel over the past few years.
The police arrest since the robbery.
I not see since Monday.
D Yan Lee is being interviewed for Famous People magazine.

Complete the missing part of the conversation using the Present
Perfect.
Interviewer: How long have you lived in Chinatown?
Ms. Lee: I've lived in Chinatown since I was a child.

(1)__________________________________________________
Interviewer: How long have you wanted to make this movie?
Ms. Lee (2)__________________________________________________
Interviewer: How have you felt since you finished the movie?
Ms. Lee: (3) _________________________________________________.
Interviewer: One last question. What kind of responses have you received
since the movie came out?
Ms. Lee (4)__________________________________________________
33 Quartet 3
U N I T
E Student A is interviewing student B. Student A creates his/her

own questions using the cues in the questionnaire. Then the
students change roles, compare their answers, and report to the
class.
Example: How long have you known Rick?
Ive known him for years.
less than more than more than

a year a year five years
1. lived in the same house
2. lived in the same neighborhood
3. lived in the same city/country
4. had the same job
5. had a car / bike / motorcycle / other
6. known your best friend
34 Quartet 3
U N I T
Something to Read
Some Words
architecture culture in spite of
community destination introduce
Chinatown Daily Historical and Cultural Tour
Our tour company has been around for over America. Over the past few years, both
100 years and is the best!! places have exhibited a large collection of
Our tour introduces you to the most famous pictures which show Chinese-American
Chinatown in the world! San Franciscos culture. We enjoy taking our tourists there
Chinatown has been the largest Chinese and are proud to show them our culture.
community outside Asia for more than a The next building to see is the Bank of
hundred years. Since 1850 it's been the Canton. It's very important to see this
home of people from Southeast Asia, China, building because it's the only one here that
and Taiwan. Over the years, it has was built according to traditional Chinese
developed its own schools, hospitals, architecture. It has survived for more than
nightclubs, and even a Chinese telephone 100 years in spite of the earthquake and
company called the China 5. fire of 1906.
Since the beginning of the century, When we reach Grant Avenue, we will give
Chinatown has become the second most you time to walk around this colorful and
popular destination for visitors to San exciting shopping area.You'll enjoy visiting
Francisco (after the Golden Gate Bridge). the herbal shops, food markets, excellent
Our tour starts from Portsmouth Square. jewelry stores, restaurants, and tea shops.
This Square has been the meeting place for We will meet again on Ross Alley to see the
the Chinese since the town was founded in Golden Gate Cookie Factory. This factory
1850. There you can see the older has existed since the first days of Chinatown
generation of Chinese playing cards and and hasnt changed very much since then.
Chinese chess. It is one of the highlights of our visit.
We then move on to the Chinese Culture
Center and the Chinese Historical Society of
35 Quartet 3
U N I T
Some Practice

1. What kind of a text is this?
2. If you had to choose only one place to go to on this tour, where would you
go? Why?
B Divide the information in the brochure into two lists: facts about
the history of the Chinese in Chinatown and sites to see in
Chinatown. Fill in the table.
The History of the Chinese in Sites to see in Chinatown

Chinatown
Chinatown in San Francisco is the Chinese Cultural Center

largest Chinese community outside
Asia.
36 Quartet 3
U N I T
C Fill in missing words from the box to see what information the
tour guide gives her group.
architecture culture introduce

community destination
"Good morning to you all and welcome to the Chinatown Historical and Cultural
introduce you to some Chinese

tour. My name is Amy and I would like to (1) __________
history and (2)______________. Before you start the tour, just a few words. Our
first (3) ____________ is the Bank of Canton. This bank is famous for its original
Chinese (4)_________________ and because it is one of the only buildings
which survived the earthquake and fire in 1906. We will then move on to see the
markets and see how the Chinese (5)____________________ lives and works in
Chinatown. We will end the tour with a visit to two museums. We hope you enjoy
the tour and thank you for choosing Chinatown Daily Historical Tours."
D Pretend you are a private guide and your partner is a tourist.

Find out what he/she generally likes to do on a tour in a city.
Change roles.
Example: Do you like to visit museums?
No, I don't.
37 Quartet 3
U N I T
Something More to Read
Some Words
decorations monster scare away
firecrackers protect swallow
How Chinese New Year Began:

A Chinese Legend
There was once a very large monster named Nian. He had a very big mouth and
he used to swallow people in one bite. He would start to eat people at the
beginning of spring. People were very frightened.
One day, an old man came and told the people that he could help them. The old
man was really a god. He went to Nian and said, "Youre very strong. Why have
you wasted your time eating little people? You can eat some very big animals."
38 Quartet 3
U N I T
2
Nian listened to the old man, and he decided to eat large animals instead of
people. The old man got on Nians back and rode away, but before he left he told
the people to buy red paper and put red decorations on their windows and
doors. He told them to paint the doors and windows of their houses red. He told
the people that Nian, the monster, was afraid of the color red. He also said that
Nian was afraid of light and noise.
Since that time, Chinese people have always decorated their houses with red.
Theyve always used firecrackers to make a lot of noise, and theyve kept lights
on all night on New Years Eve to scare away Nian. The red decorations, fire
crackers, and light have protected people against Nian the monster, and bad
luck.
A Are the following sentences true or false?

1. f The old man told the monster to eat people.
____
2. ____ The people were frightened of the monster.
3. ____ The monster was frightened of the color red.
4. ____ People put red paper on their furniture to scare away Nian.

1. Why were people afraid of Nian?
2. Who saved the people from Nian?
3. What was Nian afraid of?
4. What do people do to scare away Nian?
C Which of the following is the main idea of the story? Explain

your answer.
1. People fear monsters in every culture.
2. The Chinese were afraid of Nian and the old man helped them.
3. Why the Chinese use decorations and firecrackers on New Years Eve.
4. The Chinese New Year celebrates the victory over Nian.
39 Quartet 3
U N I T
D Complete the passage using the words from the box.
decorations monster swallow

firecrackers protect scare away
monster named Nian. Everyone was

The Chinese have a legend about a (1) _________
afraid of Nian because he used to (2) _________________ people in one bite. An
old man tried to (3)__________________ the people by talking to the monster.
He told the monster to eat large animals instead of people. Now every year on
New Years Eve, Chinese people light (4)__________________ and put colored
(5)________________ on their doors and windows. They believe that this will
(6)_________________ Nian.
40 Quartet 3
U N I T
On Your Own
A Use the facts below to make a brochure for the Pacific Heritage
Museum.
The Bank of Canton of California
The architecture of the building is as interesting as the displays inside the

museum.
The building used to be the U.S. mint (= the place where money is printed)
during the 1870s.
It later became the Treasury Building.
In 1970 it became the Bank of Canton of California.
It was the only building to survive the earthquake in 1906.
It became a museum in 1984.
It has eight important displays documenting the history of the building.
It displays architectural plans, photos, coins, artwork, and furniture.
B Write a report about a popular celebration in your culture.

Answer the following questions in your report.
1. When is the celebration?
2. How long has the celebration existed?
3. Why does the celebration take place?
4. How do people prepare for the celebration?
5. What do people do to celebrate?
41 Quartet 3
U N I T
PART 2: WHAT HAVE YOU BEEN

DOING?
Language Point
Present Perfect Progressive
Before You Start

Getting ready for the Chinese New Year
Lee and Amy are on the phone. Read about these people and find out what
theyve been doing to get ready for the Chinese New Year.
Lee: Hi! What have you been up to? I havent heard from you since eight
oclock this morning. What have you been doing all day?
Amy: Ive been cleaning the house and I've nearly finished.
Lee: I havent done that yet. What about the food? Have you been cooking
all day too?
Amy: Actually my kids are doing that. For the last two hours theyve been
preparing the sweet cakes and dumplings. Its my mothers traditional
recipe and its a lot of work.
Lee: Whats that noise?
Amy: Oh, those are the coins in the red envelopes. I've been saving them
for the past year to give to my friends for good luck.
Lee: Well it looks like youre nearly ready for the festival.
Amy: Not really, I don't have the firecrackers or decorations.
Lee: Dont you remember? You asked me to buy the firecrackers and
decorations. Thats what Ive been doing since this morning.
42 Quartet 3
U N I T
Answer the questions.

1. Where is Amy?
2. Are both women busy?
3. What has Amy been doing since eight oclock in the morning?
4. What have Amy's children been making?
5. What has Lee been doing all day?
Some Grammar
Present Perfect Progressive
They have / havent been watching TV since lunchtime.
She has / hasnt been listening to that tape for the last two
hours.
Has he been living there since 1966?
Have you been waiting for me all day?
How long have you been sitting there?
How long has she been washing the car?
Short Forms
I / You / We / They have been Ive / Youve / Weve / Theyve been
He / She / It has been Shes / Hes / Its been
43 Quartet 3
U N I T
Note: the contraction of hes, shes, its, should not be confused with he is
= hes or she is = shes or it is = its
We use the Present Perfect Progressive to show a connection between the

past and the present. When we use the Present Perfect Progressive we do
not say exactly when the past action happened.
Example: I've been shopping all day.
We use the Present Perfect Progressive for actions that started in the past
and continue into the present. They may still be going on in the present.
Example: I've been cooking for hours.
We use the Present Perfect Progressive for very recent activities which
have just finished and still influence the present.
Example: Lee has been standing on her feet all day (and her feet are
hurting).
We use the Present Perfect Progressive when it is clear that the action is
continuous.
Examples:
They've been cooking since lunchtime. (Present Perfect Progressive
because the action is continuous.)
They've made sixteen sandwiches since lunchtime. (Present Perfect
because the action is complete.)
Some verbs are not used in the progressive tenses. These verbs describe
a state or situation, not an action. They are used in the Present Simple even
if they describe a situation that is true at the moment of speaking or of
writing.
Some examples:
Verbs of thought: believe, agree, understand, know, realize, wonder
Verbs of feeling: want, wish, like, love, hate, prefer, feel
Verbs of perception: smell, taste, sound, see, hear
Verbs of possession: have, own, belong
Others: cost, weigh, seem, appear, need, be
Example: I've loved chocolate since I was a child.
44 Quartet 3
U N I T
Some Practice
A Fill in the missing information about the conversation in Before

You Start.
has been doing Hasnt done yet
Amy has been cleaning all day.
Lee
B Lee and Amy are reading an astrology column in the newspaper.

It describes the year of the Rabbit. Complete the text using the
correct form of the Present Perfect Progressive.
This is the year of the Rabbit. It's a year of persuasion and force. It's
also a year of comfort and relaxation. People
have been asking (ask) me about money because the year of
1. ________________
the Rabbit is supposed to be a year of riches and prosperity. Those
of you who 2. ________________ (make) a lot of money should be
careful. If you 3. ________________ (spend) a lot of money, you
should remember to give some to charity. This will bring you good
luck. Those who 4. ________________ (study) and 5. ___________
_________ (do) well this year will not be surprised. The year of the
Rabbit is a good year to learn new things.
45 Quartet 3
U N I T
C Lee is talking about her mother. Fill in the blanks with the correct
form of the Present Perfect Progressive using the verbs in the box.
dream take tell

record talk think
has been telling

In the last few years, my mother (1) ____________________ me about life in
China when she was a child. Since the autumn, she (2) ____________________
a lot about her childhood. I enjoy her stories, but I dont understand what is
happening to her. She says that she (3) ____________________ about her
childhood at night.
I asked her if she had any pictures to show me, but she doesnt. I thought about
that and decided that I wanted pictures to show my children. So, since then, I
(4) ____________________ pictures wherever I go. I (5) ______ also _________
_________ my mothers stories. Now I can listen to her stories whenever I want
to. Maybe Ill write a book.
Something else has also happened. I (6) ____________________ about going to
China to visit places which my mother mentioned. Maybe Ill ask her to go with
me. She speaks Chinese very well. That would make the visit easier and more
fun.
D Move around the classroom and find someone who has been
doing the things described.
Example: Have you been living in the same house since you were born?
Find someone who:
has been living in the same house/city all their life.
has been working in the same place for over five years.
has been working out for at least six months.
has been studying English for at least a year.
has been dreaming of going on a long trip around the world.
46 Quartet 3
U N I T
E Complete the telephone conversation between Sue and Jing with

the correct form of the Present Perfect Progressive.
Sue: Hi! Its good to see you. What have you been doing all these
years?
Jing: I've been living and working in San Francisco. (live / work /
1. ______________________________________
San Francisco)
Sue: How is your sister?
Jing: Shes fine.

2. ____________________________________________.
(live / Taiwan / for 15 years)
Sue: Really! Have you gone to Taiwan to visit her yet?
Jing: 3. ________________________________________________.
(think about)
Sue: And what about you? Are you still painting?
Jing: 4. ______________________________________________.
(paint and write) What about you? What have you been doing
with yourself?
Sue: 5. _________________________ (teach / art) since you last saw

me.
Jing: Congratulations! You're a real success! And where does your son
live?
Sue: 6. _______________________________________________,
(live / my house) but he's going to move soon.
Jing: That sounds terrific! I have to go now. Lets meet soon.
Sue: OK. That sounds good. How about next week?
47 Quartet 3
U N I T
F In pairs, write a conversation using the prompts below. You can

use the conversation on page 47 to help you.
Lin meets Mei*
Lin and Mei greet each other. They havent met for a long time and are
surprised and pleased to see each other.
Lin asks Mei about the last few years.
Mei answers and gives details.
Lin asks Mei about her present situation.
Mei answers and asks similar questions.
Lin answers and says that she has to leave for an appointment.
Mei says that she regrets this.
Lin and Mei arrange to meet again soon and say goodbye.
*Lin and Mei are Chinese names for girls. You may use boys names, such as Li,
Hu, Jing-Quo and Yong.
48 Quartet 3
U N I T
G Use the Present Perfect Simple or Progressive with since and for
to talk about Lee and Yin.
Example: Lee has been teaching Chinese for 10 years.
Moved twice.
Is teaching Chinese
at the university.
Started 10 years ago.
Also works for the local Moved to Chinatown in 1950.
Chinese newspaper. Running a Chinese restaurant
Started 2 years ago. since 1970.
Married since 1980. Started volunteering as a
Traveling in China for one tour guide two years ago.
month. Writes to her cousins in
Shanghai (since she left
China)..
H In groups of three, write your own note describing facts about

your life that started in the past and are related to the present.
Give it to the person sitting near you. Each of you then reports
to the third person in the group.
49 Quartet 3
U N I T
Some Fun
A Game
1. Divide your group into two teams.
2. Team A decides on an activity you've been doing, e.g. swimming, eating,
using a computer.
3. Team B asks yes / no questions to guess the activity, e.g., Have you been
playing a game? Have you been running?
4. If team B guesses the activity, they get one point. If they cant guess the
activity, team A gets the one point.
5. Next, team B decides on an activity and team A asks questions.
6. The first team to get five points is the winner.
B Crossword puzzle
1 2
3 4
Chinese New Year 5
Across 6
3. We use these to send
letters in the post.
e _________ 7
5. You put this in your
tea to make it sweet.
s ______
7. The Chinese use
these to celebrate. 8
They make noise and
light. f ________ 9
9. Another word for rich

or successful is
p_________ .
10. Another word for
cheerfulness is h
_____________ . 10
Down
1. Another word for festival is c _______________
2. R _______ is the color of danger
4. This year is the Year of the R ___________ . (Hint: It is a small furry animal.)
5. Another word for frighten is s ___________ .
6. If you give money to charity, you will have good l ________ .
8. This mythical animal is an important Chinese symbol. d _________ .
50 Quartet 3
U N I T
On Your Own
A You are looking for a job and want to prepare for a job
interview. Think of things you've been doing all/most of your life
that are important in a job interview. Write them down.
Example: I've been studying English for five years.
B Write a letter to a friend and tell him/her what youve been

doing for the last few months since you saw him/her.
What Did You Learn?

Facts:
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
Words:
Word Meaning
51 Quartet 3
U N I T
2
Language points:
Present Perfect
Present Perfect
Progressive
Crossword Answers
1 2
c r
3 4
e n v e l o p e r
5
l d s u g a r
6
e l c b
b u a b
7
f i r e c r a c k e r s i
a k e t
t
8
i d
9
p r o s p e r o u s
n a
g
o
10
h a p p i n e s s
52 Quartet 3
U N I T
3
Unusual Buildings of the World
U N I T
PART 1: THE LEANING TOWER OF PISA

AND ANGKOR WAT
Language Point
Present Perfect with time expressions: ever, never, just, recently, lately,
already
Before You Start
Save the the tower may break if

they do too much work
If you want to support
the campaign to save
Leaning Tower! on it. He explained that our tower, please send a
Pisa, Italy the tower isnt very donation to the "Save
strong. However, they Pisa" fund care of The
Experts have recently will continue to try to Pisa News, 45 Malta
begun a new campaign straighten the tower. Street, Pisa, Italy.
to save our leaning
tower. The ground under The tower has been
the tower has always leaning since it was built
been unstable, and this in 1173. In 1990, the
has caused the tower to tower was closed to
lean to one side. Lately, tourists because the
some architects and lean was already 16 feet
engineers have decided (4.9 meters). Since then,
to repair the lean by architects have already
taking out some of the made some successful
soil. repairs. But if we want to
A famous architect has save the tower, we must
already warned the continue to correct the
team that the walls of lean.
54 Quartet 3
U N I T

f The Leaning Tower of Pisa has already fallen over once.
1. ____
2. ____ There have already been a few successful repairs.
3. ____ Experts have recently begun a new campaign to save the tower.
4. ____ The tower has become unstable only recently.
5. ____ Experts have recently decided to take away some of the soil under
the tower.
6. ____ The architects and engineers need money to do the repairs.

1. What are experts planning to do to save the Leaning Tower of Pisa?
2. What is the danger of this plan?
3. When did the Leaning Tower start leaning?
55 Quartet 3
U N I T
Some Grammar
Present Perfect
Experts have already to save the tower.
begun
The tower has always unstable.

been
The Leaning hasn't fallen yet.
of Tower Pisa
Have you sent a donation to the

yet?
"Save Pisa" fund
Hasn't the Leaning been painted recently?
Tower
What have they decided to do about the

lean?
Short Forms
I/You/We/They have just left. I've/You've/We've/They've just left.
He/She/It has finished already. She's/He's/It's finished already.
Note: the contraction of: hes, shes, its, should not be confused with he is =
hes or she is = shes or it is = its
We use the Present Perfect to show a connection between the past and the
present.
We use the Present Perfect when we are referring to a past action which
took place in a period of time "up to now." The following indefinite time
adverbs can be used with the Present Perfect:
lately, just, ever(never), recently, yet (not yet), already, always, often,
sometimes, rarely, hardly ever, since, for, all day/week/month, ever since.
Yet is only used in negative sentences and questions.
Examples:
Have they repaired the tower yet?
Yes, theyve already repaired the tower.
No, they havent repaired it yet.
56 Quartet 3
U N I T
Some Practice
A Complete the sentences by circling the correct time expressions.
More about the Leaning Tower of Pisa
1. Architects have (never, just, yet) begun a new project to repair the Leaning
Tower of Pisa.
2. The Leaning Tower of Pisa has (always, never, yet) been straight. It has
leaned since the day it was built.
3. Critics have (yet, always, never) warned that its dangerous to work on the
tower. They give the same warning every time architects try to repair it.
4. The citizens of Pisa have (never, always, just) been proud of their tower.
They have treasured it since 1173.
5. Have you heard the news? The Commission for Saving the Leaning Tower
of Pisa has (just, never, always) said that the project needs more money.
6. The Pisa News has (always, recently, never) begun a campaign to help
repair the tower. They started collecting money last week.
7. Has the government approved the new project (ever, always, yet)?
8. The tower has begun to lean more than usual (just, recently, always). There
has been a lot of rain in the last few weeks and the ground under the tower
has become unstable.
B Choose the sentence that means the same thing as the opening
phrase.
1. An Italian author has recently written a book about the history of the
Leaning Tower of Pisa.
a. The book is finished

b. The book is not written yet.
2. The government has just announced that the architects will begin to work
on the tower tomorrow.
a. The government is about to make an announcement.

b. The government made an announcement.
57 Quartet 3
U N I T
3
3. A rich citizen has recently made a big donation to the "Save Pisa" fund.
a. A rich citizen doesnt want to give money to the "Save Pisa" fund.
b. A rich citizen gave money to the "Save Pisa" fund.
4. The architect has just met with the head of the building committee.
a. The architect wants to meet with the head of the building committee soon.
b. The architect and the head of the building committee met.
5. We have already visited the Leaning Tower of Pisa.
a. We want to visit the tower.

b. We saw the tower.
6. Architects havent finished the repairs yet.
a. They repaired the tower.

b. They still have to finish the repairs.
58 Quartet 3
U N I T
C Complete the interview by writing the reporters questions.

Reporter: Im reporting from the Leaning Tower of Pisa and I am interviewing
one of the architects who is working on the project.
Thank you for speaking to me today, sir.
Architect: Youre welcome. I think its important to tell everyone about the
work that we are doing here.
Reporter: Has the team begun to work on the tower

I agree. (1) ______________________________________ yet?
Architect: Yes, we have already begun to work on the tower. We started

working last month and have been working every day since then.
Reporter: (2)__________________________________________ yet?
Architect: Yes, weve just started to dig under the tower.
Reporter: (3)___________________________________________ yet?
Architect: Yes, there has already been an improvement in the situation.

We hope well be able to continue the project.
Reporter: (4)____________________________________________ yet?
Architect: Yes. Ive recently spoken to several members of the government

about getting more money for the project.
D Underline the time expressions other than yet in the interview

above.
59 Quartet 3
U N I T
E One of the architects working on the new building has recently

disappeared with the plans for the building. The police have just
searched his room to try to discover what happened. They found
these objects. Discuss the objects with a partner and make a list
of clues.
Example: The architect has recently bought a plane ticket.
60 Quartet 3
U N I T
F Write a police report explaining what you think happened to the

architect who disappeared with the plans.
61 Quartet 3
U N I T
Something to Read
Some Words
attack missionaries sculpture uncover
carvings moat serpent
fertility restore symbol
An Archeologist at Angkor Wat
Diary Entry
July 28
I arrived at the city of Angkor Wat this morning. It is 191 miles (307 kilometers) to
the northwest of Cambodias capital, Phnom Penh. Ive already met the other
members of the team. We discussed our plans to restore the temples.
Fortunately, the temples arent in bad condition despite the civil war that ended in
1998, and the direct attack on the temples in 1975.
There are many temples in this area, but the main temple, also called Angkor
Wat, is especially beautiful. It looks like a pyramid with a moat around it. Next to
the entrance, there are giant serpent-like structures which are symbols of
fertility.
The main temple has several smaller buildings and five large towers. The walls
are carved with scenes from Hindu mythology. The temple was built in honor of
the Hindu god Vishnu, and most of the carvings have pictures of this god.The
temple is truly a wonder of architecture.
The history of the temple, Angkor Wat, is just as interesting as the architecture.
King Suryavarman built the temple in the middle of the 12th century in honor of
the Hindu religion. He also planned and developed the city of Angkor Wat. The
temple itself took about 30 years to build. Over the next 200 years, the city of
Angkor Wat got much bigger and many more temples were built there. Finally, in
1389 AD, a group of people from Thailand attacked Angkor Wat and took over
the city. After that, everyone gradually left the city. By 1431 AD, Angkor Wat was
completely empty.
French missionaries in Cambodia found the temples in 1860, and started to

restore them. The stone sculptures and the carvings on the walls have already
told archeologists a lot about the history of Cambodia. Im hoping that our
current project will help us uncover more of the mysteries of Angkor Wat.
62 Quartet 3
U N I T
Some Practice

1. Where is Angkor Wat?
2. Why is the archeologist at Angkor Wat?
3. Describe the main temple in the area.
4. Who built the temple and why?
5. What did the stone sculptures and the carvings on the walls of the temples
tell archeologists?

f The archeologist has already restored the temples at Angkor Wat.
1. ___
2. ___ The archeologist has already met the members of his team.
3. ___ The stone sculptures and the carvings on the wall have already told
archeologists a lot about the history of Cambodia.
4. ___ Angkor Wat was built in honor of the Buddhist religion.
5. ___ The attack in the area seriously damaged Angkor Wat.
C Match the words in A with the definitions in B.
A B
1. b
___ an attack a. works of art made by cutting stone or wood.
2. ___ carvings b. an attempt to hurt someone or a group of people
3. ___ fertility physically.
4. ___ missionaries c. a snake
5. ___ a moat d. a person, animal, or object shaped out of wood,
6. ___ to restore clay, or metal.
7. ___ a sculpture e. something which represents something else.
8. ___ a serpent f. to repair something and make it look new again.
9. ___ a symbol g. people who are sent to a foreign country to teach
10. ___ uncover their religion.
h. to find out, or to take a covering off something.
i. a man-made body of water that surrounds a
building.
j. the ability to have children
63 Quartet 3
U N I T
What Do You Think?

1. Why do you think that the main temple at Angkor Wat is considered an
unusual building?
2. Based on the description of Angkor Wat, what could you say about the
people who built this temple? What types of things were important to them?
3. Why do you think that archeologists are interested in Angkor Wat?
B The archeologist lost his journal in the temple. To help him

remember what he wrote, write at least one fact for each
heading. You may reread the text on page 62.
the main temple Angkor Wat is the main temple, but there are many smaller ones.
the carvings
the moat
King
Suryavarman
giant serpent-like
structures
French
missionaries
the Hindu god

Vishnu
the stone
sculptures and the
wall carvings
the archeologists
current project
64 Quartet 3
U N I T
C With a partner, role play a conversation between the archeologist

and a reporter. Use the information in exercise B on page 64 to
form questions and answers.
Example:
Reporter: Which is the main temple in the area?

Archeologist: The main temple is Angkor Wat, but there are a number of smaller
temples as well.
On Your Own
Write a report about a building that you consider unusual.

Describe how the building looks and write a little bit about its
history. Explain why you think the building should be included in
the "Unusual Buildings Hall of Fame."
65 Quartet 3
U N I T
PART 2: THE AMSTERDAM ARENA

Language Point
Present Perfect vs. Past Simple
Before You Start
The New
Amsterdam Arena!
Amsterdam, Holland
The citizens of Amsterdam have always

been big soccer fans. Since the opening
of the new arena in 1996, they have
enjoyed the matches even more.The new
Amsterdam Arena is a soccer lovers
dream, as well as being a fantastic
entertainment center. They built two levels that include
shopping centers, movie theaters,
Architects designed the arena for soccer restaurants, and two day-care centers.
lovers in our city. The old DeMeer Stadium They constructed the large roof which
was too small to hold Amsterdams soccer can be opened and closed in less than 15
fans and the Olympic Stadium didnt have minutes. The weather is always perfect in
enough entertainment. the arena.
The builders traveled all over the world to The only problem left is the demand for
visit sports stadiums everywhere before seats. This year again, we have received
they planned the arena. They designed it too many requests for season tickets. We
to be both a 50,000-seat soccer stadium may have to build a larger arena
as well as an all-day entertainment center.
66 Quartet 3
U N I T

t The builders traveled to arenas all over the world before building the
1. ____
Amsterdam Arena.
2. ____ DeMeer Stadium was too big for the number of soccer fans in
Amsterdam.
3. ____ Architects designed the arena to be both a soccer stadium and an
all-day entertainment center.
4. ____ There have always been empty seats in the new arena.
5. ____ The roof of the arena can open or close in 15 minutes.

1. Why did the people of Amsterdam need a new arena?
2. What is special about the arena?
3. What is the problem with the new arena?
Some Grammar
Present Perfect vs. Past Simple
We use the Present Perfect with time expressions that do not talk about a
specific time. We use the Past Simple with time expressions that define a
specific time.
Non specific (with Present Perfect): for, since, lately, recently, just, not yet,
ever, already.
Specific (with Past Simple): yesterday, a week ago, last week, last month, in
1960, when I was a child.
Examples: I'm so happy. I have just watched the soccer match at the arena.
I was so happy yesterday. I watched the soccer match at the arena.
67 Quartet 3
U N I T
Some Practice
A Complete the sentences by underlining the correct verb.

More about the Amsterdam Arena
1. The Amsterdam Arena (opened, has opened) in June 1996.

2. Thousands of people (have already visited, already visited) the Amsterdam
Arena.
3. Even though its still early in the season, we (already opened, have already
opened) the roof several times.
4. In 1996, the city of Amsterdam (spent, has spent) 202 million Dutch guilders
to build the Amsterdam Arena.
5. Many soccer teams (have already played, played) in the Amsterdam Arena.
6. Several rock bands (played, have played) at the arena last year.
B Choose the sentence that means the same thing as the opening
phrase.
1. I saw a fantastic jazz band at the arena last week.

a. The concert is over.
b. The concert isnt finished yet.
2. Weve already bought tickets for tonights soccer match.

a. We need to buy tickets for the match tonight.
b. We have tickets for the match tonight.
3. Ive always liked soccer.

a. I dont like it anymore.
b. I still like it now.
4. Soccer teams played in the Olympic Stadium before the arena was built.
a. They dont play in the Olympic Stadium now.
b. They still play in the Olympic Stadium.
68 Quartet 3
U N I T
3
5. Theyve opened the roof today!
a. The roof is open.
b. They are opening the roof now.
6. Architects built the arena in the southeast of Amsterdam.

a. They finished building the arena.
b. They are still building the arena.
7. The arena has always sold thousands of tickets for each soccer match.
a. They still sell thousands of tickets for each soccer match.
b. They dont sell thousands of tickets for each soccer match anymore.
C Complete the letter below with the Past Simple or the Present
Perfect.
To the manager of the Amsterdam Arena,
I am writing to thank you for building such a beautiful and useful arena in
ve already gone
Amsterdam. 1. I_________________ (already go) to several matches so far this
year, and I 2. _________________ (be) very impressed with the facilities. I
3. ____________________ (always be) a big soccer fan. I 4. ___________ (go)
to DeMeer Stadium a few times last year, and I 5. _____________ (not be)
happy with it. I like the shops in the new arena. The last time I 6. _________ (go)
to the arena, I 7. ___________________ (go shopping) after the match.
I have several questions, and I would appreciate answers as soon as possible.
8. _________________________ (you, decide) what to do about the large

number of people who want season tickets?
When you built the arena, why 9. ___________________ (you, decide) to build a
glass wall on the second level?
Why 10. _________________________ (you, not start) any sports programs for
young people yet?
Why 11. ________________________ (you, not open) the roof during the last
two matches? The weather was very mild both days.
Yours truly,
An Interested Citizen
69 Quartet 3
U N I T
D Complete the response to the letter in exercise C using the

Present Perfect or the Past Simple. Use the cues to answer the
"interested citizens" questions.
Dear "Interested Citizen",
have worked (work) very
Thank you for your letter about our new arena. We (1)____________
hard to give Amsterdam a stadium that we can be proud of. Below are the
answers to the questions that you (2)_______________ (ask) in your letter.
We (3)______________________________(not decide) what to do about

the large number of people who want season tickets yet.
We built the glass wall because we (4)______________________________

(want to protect) soccer fans from getting hurt.
We (5)_________________________________(not plan) a young

peoples sports program yet.
The roof (6)__________________ (break) a few weeks ago, and we

(7)________________(have) to repair it. It will be open the next time the
weather is nice.
Yours,
The manager of the Amsterdam Arena.
E Interview a partner. Use the cues below and the Present Perfect.
Your partner can answer using both the Present Perfect and the
Past Simple.
Example: Have/be/Holland
Have you ever been to Holland?
Yes, Ive been to Holland. I was there last year.
1. What/countries/visit?
2. Which/interesting buildings/read about?
3. Which/interesting buildings/see?
4. What/tallest building/seen?
5. Have/see/Amsterdam Arena?
6. Have/be/soccer match?
70 Quartet 3
U N I T
F Work with a partner. Interview each other using the

questionnaire and then use the scoring key to add up your
scores.
Are you a Sports Lover?

True False
1. Ive been to at least one sporting event
this year.
2. Ive often thought about a career in sports.
3. Ive played sports all my life.
4. Ive missed at least one date this year
because I was watching a sports event.
5. Ive read many books about sports.
6. Ive spent a lot of money on sports
equipment.
7. Ive asked at least one famous sports
personality for his/her signature.
8. Ive watched the Olympics more than
twice in my life.
9. Ive had at least one sports injury.
10. Ive bought more than ten sports
magazines this year.
Scoring key:
Give yourself one point for every "true" answer and zero for every "false" answer.
0-4 You arent much of a sports lover. There are many other things
that you like more.
5-7 You like sports, but you have other hobbies as well.
8-10 You are a true sports lover. You spend a lot of time thinking about,
playing, and/or watching sports.
G Write your own questionnaire called "How much of a traveler

are you?" Use the Present Perfect in your questions. Invent your
own scoring key and then interview a partner.
71 Quartet 3
U N I T
Some Fun
1
A Crossword puzzle 2 3
4 5
8 9
10
11
Have you ever ?
Across
3. The opposite of taken is g _________ .
4. The opposite of boring is e _________ .
6. Something that is wonderful or special is f _____________ .
8. If you have been to your grandmothers house, you have v _____________ her.
10. Where have you b _________ ?
11. Have you ever r __________ a horse?
Down
1. Another word for started is b _____________ .
2. Have you d _________ your homework yet?
5. When you have gone somewhere, you have t _________ .
7. Mom isnt home. She has g _______ to work.
9. Have you ever s __________ a soccer match?
72 Quartet 3
U N I T
B Look at the list and check () the unusual buildings that you
have heard of. Add any other buildings you have visited or heard
of which you consider unusual.
EUROPE
____ The Parthenon (Athens, Greece)

____ The Colosseum (Rome, Italy)
____ Chartres Cathedral (France)
____
____
ASIA
____ The Red Fort (Delhi, India)

____ The Blue Mosque (Istanbul, Turkey)
____
AFRICA
____ Temple of Karnak (Luxor, Egypt)

____ Lalibela Rock Churches (Ethiopia)
____
NORTH & CENTRAL AMERICA
____ Museo Nacional de Anthropologa (Mexico City)

____ Hearst Castle (California, U.S.A)
____ Kennedy Space Center (Florida)
____
SOUTH AMERICA
____ Teatro Coln (Buenos Aires, Argentina)

____ La Compaa Church (Quito, Equador)
____
____
AUSTRALIA
____ Sydney Opera House

____
73 Quartet 3
U N I T
On Your Own
Write about the most exciting sporting event you have ever seen.
Did you watch the event on television or in an arena? What type
of event was it, and what made it exciting?
What Did You Learn?
Facts:
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
74 Quartet 3
U N I T
Words:
Word Meaning
Language points:

Present Perfect with
ever
never
just
recently
lately
already
Present Perfect vs.
Past Simple
75 Quartet 3
U N I T
Crossword Answers
1
b
2 3
d g i v e n
o g
n u
4 5
e x c i t i n g
r
6
f a n t a s t i c
7
v g
8 9
v i s i t e d s o
10
l b e e n
e e e
11
r i d d e n
76 Quartet 3
U N I T
4
The Seven Built Wonders of the
Ancient World
U N I T
PART 1: A GREAT PYRAMID, A HANGING

GARDEN, AND A GIANT LIGHTHOUSE
Language Point
Past Perfect
Before You Start
The Great Pyramid of Khufu at Giza, Egypt
Tour Guide: The Great Pyramid of Khufu, built around 2560 BC, is the oldest
of the Seven Ancient Wonders, and the only one that's still in one
piece. Years before he died, the Egyptian Pharaoh, Khufu, had
asked for a huge tomb as his burial place. Historians believe that
the tomb was built over a twenty-year period and that a giant
ramp was used to put the bricks in place. Are there any
questions?
78 Quartet 3
U N I T
4
Molly: Before I decided to come to Egypt, I had already read a lot about
the Great Pyramid but I hadnt realized how big it was. Is it true
that its filled with secret passages?
Tour guide: Good question. Kings were often buried with gold and treasures,
and because of this, secret passages were built to confuse
thieves.
Wallis: Has anyone ever found treasure in the Great Pyramid?
Tour guide: Many people have looked for treasure in the Great Pyramid, but
nobody has ever found anything. Its now believed that thieves
had already stolen everything valuable by the time archeologists
opened the tomb.
Wallis: Whats that door over there for?
Tour guide: What door? Theres no door over there, just a wall.
Molly: Hes right. You see, along the wall you can see the outline of an
entrance.
Tour guide: Youre right! I think you may have found a new secret passage...
1. t The Great Pyramid is the oldest of the Seven Ancient Wonders.

___
2. ___ Archeologists found gold and treasure in the Great Pyramid.
3. ___ The Great Pyramid was a tomb for the Egyptian Pharaoh Khufu.
4. ___ A giant ramp was used to build the Great Pyramid.
5. ___ The Great Pyramid took 100 years to build.
6. ___ The Great Pyramid is the only ancient wonder that is still standing.
1. Why did the Egyptians build the Great Pyramid?

2. Why are there secret passages in the Great Pyramid?
3. What do archeologists believe happened to the treasure in the Great
Pyramid?
79 Quartet 3
U N I T
Some Grammar
Past Perfect
Before he died, he had asked for a huge tomb as his

burial place.
When archeologists first entered the they saw that other people had
Great Pyramid, already been there.
Until I saw the Great Pyramid, I hadnt realized how big it was.
The tour guide hadnt seen the door until Wallis showed it to him.
Had you heard of the Great Pyramid before you visited Egypt?
Had you seen any of the ancient before you visited the Great
wonders Pyramid?
We use the Past Perfect to show that an action in the past happened before
another action in the past.
Example: By the time I arrived at the airport, my plane had already left.
Past Perfect Past Simple
first action second action

____________________________________________________________
my plane had already left I arrived at the airport
We often use time words such as until, by the time, and when in sentences
with the Past Perfect.
Example: Before the Pharaoh died, the Egyptians had built his tomb.
80 Quartet 3
U N I T
Some Practice
A Complete the sentences with the correct form of the verb. Use
either Past Simple or Past Perfect.
went (go) to Egypt, Egyptian
1. When the Greek traveler Herodotus _______
had built (build) the Great Pyramid.
guides told him that slaves ________
2. The guides ____________ (say) that giant machines ____________ (lift)
the stones into place.
3. Later on, scientists _________________________ (figure out) that the
Egyptians ________________________ (not use) slaves or machines to
build the Great Pyramid.
4. Historians _________________ (write) that the Egyptians _________
probably __________ (use) a giant ramp to build the Pyramid.
5. Many thieves _______________ (think) that the Egyptians
__________________ (hide) Khufus gold and treasure in the Great
Pyramid.
6. The thieves __________________ (search) the Pyramid before
archeologists _______________________ (discover) it. They
__________________ (decide) that the thieves _____________ (find)
whatever treasure was hidden in the Pyramid.
B Which event happened first? Check () the sentence that means

the same thing as each statement.
1. By the time the Pharaoh died, the Egyptians had already built the Great
Pyramid.
The Egyptians built the Great Pyramid first and then the Pharaoh
a. ____
died.
b. ____ The Pharaoh died and then the Egyptians built the Great Pyramid.
2. The Egyptians had buried their past kings in giant tombs for years before
they built King Khufus Pyramid.
a. ____The Egyptians built King Khufus pyramid and then they buried their
past kings in giant tombs.
b. ____ The Egyptians buried their past kings in giant tombs and then they
built King Khufus Pyramid.
81 Quartet 3
U N I T
4
3. By the time I left the Great Pyramid, I had already finished my entire roll of
film.
a. ____ First I left the Great Pyramid and then I finished my roll of film.
b. ____ First I finished my roll of film and then I left the Great Pyramid.
4. By the time I was 25, I had already visited five of the Seven Wonders of the
Ancient World.
a. ____ I turned 25 and then I visited five of the Seven Wonders of the
Ancient World.
b. ____ I visited five of the Seven Wonders of the Ancient World and then I
turned 25.
5. The tour guide hadnt visited the Great Pyramid until he started working as a
travel agent.
a. ____The tour guide started working as a travel agent and then he saw
the Great Pyramid.
b. ____ The tour guide saw the Great Pyramid and then he started working
as a travel agent.
6. Before I visited Egypt, I had seen pictures of the Great Pyramid.
a. ____ I visited Egypt and then I saw pictures of the Great Pyramid.
b. ____ I saw pictures of the Great Pyramid and then I visited Egypt.
C Complete the following passage, using the Past Simple and the
Past Perfect.
The Hanging Gardens of Babylon
Nebuchadnezzar ruled Babylon from 605-562 BC. Years before, the kingdom
had reached (reach) its peak under his father, King Naboplashar, who
1. ___________
2. __________________ (rule) from 625-605 BC. When Nebuchadnezzar took
over, he 3. ________________ (build) the Hanging Gardens of Babylon for his
wife. For many years before she 4. ___________________ (marry), Amyitis
5. ______________ (live) in the kingdom of Medes. She 6. _________________
(not want) to leave her beautiful home, but she 7. _________________ (marry)
Nebuchadnezzar because she 8. __________________ (want) to create a
connection between the two countries. When she 9. _________________ (arrive)
in Babylon, she 10. _____________________ (not like) the dry, flat land. Babylon
was a dreary, colorless place to her. She 11. ___________________ (be) used
to the green, beautiful trees and fields of her homeland. To make her happy, her
husband 12. _______________ (decide) to make Babylon more like her home
and he built a man-made mountain with beautiful gardens.
82 Quartet 3
U N I T
D Answer the questions about The Hanging Gardens of Babylon.

1. Why did Nebuchadnezzar build the Hanging Gardens of Babylon?
2. Where had Amyitis lived before she moved to Babylon?
3. How did Amyitis feel when she arrived in Babylon?
4. What had Amyitis been used to in her homeland?
5. Many people say that the Hanging Gardens of Babylon never really existed.
What do you think?
83 Quartet 3
U N I T
E Read the timeline and write at least four sentences below.
3100-2950 BC The Egyptian state came into being.

The Egyptians wrote the first hieroglyphic writing.
2950-2575 BC The Egyptians built the first pyramid - the Step pyramid.
The Egyptians built the great city of Memphis.
2575-2150 BC The Egyptians built the Great Pyramids at Dahshur and Giza.
2125-1975 BC Egypt broke up into two smaller states.
1975-1640 BC Mentuhotep reunites Egypt.
1539-1075 BC A woman, the Pharaoh Hatshepsut, ruled Egypt for 22 years.

Ramsses II ruled Egypt for 67 years.
715-332 BC Persians conquer Egypt. (525 BC)
332 BC- 395 AD Alexander the Great occupies Egypt.

Ptolemy, Alexanders general, becomes king of Egypt.
The Rosetta Stone is carved. (196 BC)
Cleopatra VII rules Egypt. (51-30 BC)
Egypt becomes a province of the Roman Empire. (30 BC)
By the time the Egyptians built the first pyramid, they had
already written the first hieroglyphic writing.
1. ________________________________________________________ .
2. ________________________________________________________ .
3. ________________________________________________________ .
4. ________________________________________________________ .
5. ________________________________________________________ .
6. ________________________________________________________ .
84 Quartet 3
U N I T
F Think of a historical event or a period in history that

influenced you when you heard or learned about it. Tell your
partner how it affected you, using the Past Perfect.
Example: I hadnt realized how beautiful the Great Pyramid was until I saw it in
person.
85 Quartet 3
U N I T
Something to Read
Some Words
collapse develop mysterious skyscraper
damage harbor repair
destroy lighthouse rumor
The Lighthouse of Alexandria
Near the famous city of Alexandria in Egypt, there's a small, mysterious island
called Pharos. Centuries ago, one of the ancient wonders of the world was built
there and towered high above the harbor: The Lighthouse of Alexandria.
The Lighthouse of Alexandria no longer exists, but it was one of the last ancient
wonders to be destroyed. We know that it was completed in 290 BC, several
decades after the death of Alexander the Great. In 332 BC, when Ptolemy Soter
was the ruler of Egypt, Alexandria had already developed into an international
city. It had a busy and active harbor, and a lighthouse was needed to guide ships
86 Quartet 3
U N I T
4
through the dark. Many people call the lighthouse "the worlds first skyscraper"
because it was the tallest building in the world next to the Great Pyramid.
How was the lighthouse destroyed? Most historians believe that it collapsed in
1326 AD after an earthquake. Reports also suggest that two earlier earthquakes
had already damaged the lighthouse. The building wasnt repaired following the
first two earthquakes, so it was very fragile. Thus, it was easily destroyed by a
third disaster.
Although this is the official story, many people believe that in 850 AD, the
Emperor of Constantinople spread a rumor that there was a treasure under the
lighthouse. When the current ruler of Alexandria heard the rumor, he destroyed
the lighthouse and searched for the treasure. He never found it, and the
lighthouse was lost forever.
Some Practice

t
1. ____ The Lighthouse of Alexandria was completed in 290 BC.
2. ____ The Lighthouse of Alexandria was the first of the Seven Ancient
Wonders to be destroyed.
3. ____ Many people call the Lighthouse of Alexandria the first skyscraper.
4. ____ Alexander the Great built the Lighthouse of Alexandria.
5. ____ The Lighthouse of Alexandria was on the island of Pharos.
6. ____ The Lighthouse of Alexandria was destroyed in a fire.

1. Where was the Lighthouse of Alexandria built?
2. Why did Alexandria need a lighthouse?
3. Why was the Lighthouse of Alexandria referred to as the first skyscraper?
4. How do most historians think the Lighthouse of Alexandria was destroyed?
5. How do other people think that the lighthouse was destroyed?
87 Quartet 3
U N I T
C Match the words in A with the definitions in B.

A B
d
1.____ to collapse a. a tower with a flashing light that
2.____ to damage guides ships
3.____ to destroy b. to grow
4.____ to develop c. to hurt
d. to fall apart
5.____ harbor
e. not easily understood
6.____ lighthouse
f. a very tall building
7.____ mysterious g. the place where ships land
8.____ to repair h. to ruin completely
9.____ rumor i. a piece of information that people
10.____ skyscraper repeat to each other which is
usually not true
j. to fix something
What Do You Think?

1. In your opinion, what makes a building a "wonder of the world"?
2. Why do you think the Lighthouse of Alexandria is one of the Seven Ancient
Wonders?
3. In The Lighthouse of Alexandria, there were two explanations for the
destruction of the lighthouse. Which one do you believe? Why?
B One of the three stories below is false. With a partner, read the
stories and decide which you think is the false one. Ask other
people in the classroom what they answered. *
1. A man named Sostrates designed the lighthouse. When the lighthouse was
completed, Sostrates wanted to put his name on the building. King Ptolemy
wanted only his name on the building. To fool the King, Sostrates carved
his own name onto the building and covered it with plaster. He then carved
Ptolemys name into the plaster. Over the years, the plaster disappeared
and only Sostrates' name remained.
88 Quartet 3
U N I T
4
2. Cleopatra lived a short distance from the lighthouse. Every morning, she
took her bath in the water nearby. For this reason, a statue was built in her
honor and was placed next to the harbor. Recently, archeologists found
the statue far beneath the water. They translated a faded message on its
front. It said, "We honor she who bathes in the glow of the lighthouse."
3. The Egyptian government recently gave famous clothing designer Pierre

Cardin permission to rebuild the Alexandria Lighthouse. The Council of
Europe and UNESCO fully support the project. The new lighthouse will be a
modern version of the old one: multicolored, covered in mirrored glass, and
earthquake-proof.
C Choose a building that you like. It can be a famous building, or

one that is not well-known. Write a paragraph to explain why
this building should be a Wonder of the World.
* The answer is number 2
On Your Own
Write a conversation between a tour guide and a traveler about

the Lighthouse of Alexandria. Use the information in Something
to Read on page 86 to help you, and the conversation in Before
You Start on page 78 as a model.
89 Quartet 3
U N I T
PART 2: THE SEVEN WONDERS ON THE

BIG SCREEN
Language Point
Gerunds
Before You Start

A Read the texts and answer the questions that follow.
Do you enjoy exploring historical sights?

Traveling around the world?
Learning about ancient mysteries?
Do you want to see the Great Pyramid of Giza, the Colossus of Rhodes, the
Temple of Artemis at Ephesus, and other exciting mysteries up close?
Visit our giant screen, three-dimensional tour of the sights that shook the
ancient world!
Viewing the ancient wonders with us is the thrill of a lifetime!
If you want to read about the Seven Wonders before joining our tour, visit
us on the Internet:
www.qgroupplc.com/mysterytheater
90 Quartet 3
U N I T
Melissa: Seeing the Seven Wonders on a giant screen was exciting. My

favorite was the Colossus of Rhodes. I cant believe the Statue of
Liberty was modeled after it! I also loved the Statue of Zeus at
Olympia. I didnt realize that the Greeks held the Olympic Games in
honor of Zeus.
Caley: I didnt either. When I have time, I plan to read more about the
famous fire that destroyed the statue.
Melissa: What was your favorite wonder?
Caley: Well, you know how much I love learning about great architecture.
The Temple of Artemis at Ephesus was my favorite, because of its
beautiful construction. You know, I read somewhere that people who
went to worship the goddess left gold, ivory, and other wonderful
treasures at the temple.
Melissa: Really? I wonder if there is any treasure still buried there. Maybe we
should go to Turkey on our next vacation.

1. t
____
Mystery Travel Theater has a giant screen.
2. ____
Melissas favorite wonder was the Temple of Artemis.
3. ____
The Greeks held the Olympic Games in honor of Zeus.
4. ____
People who went to visit the Statue of Zeus at Olympia left gold and
other treasures.
5. ____ Caley loves architecture.
6. ____ Melissa wants to go to Turkey.
91 Quartet 3
U N I T
Some Grammar
Gerunds
Visiting ancient sites is interesting. Gerund as subject

Call me before going to the theater. Gerund after preposition
I love visiting ancient sites. Gerund after verb
A gerund is a noun which is formed by adding -ing to the end of a verb.

Gerunds can be used as the subject of a sentence.
Example: Viewing the Ancient Wonders with us is the thrill of a lifetime!
Gerunds can be used after prepositions such as before, after, without, and
by.
Examples:
You can read about the Seven Wonders before joining our tour.
I learned a lot about ancient history by watching the movie.
Gerunds can be used after certain verbs. Other verbs must be followed by
infinitives. There are certain verbs that can be used with both gerunds and
infinitives.
Examples:
I enjoy exploring historical sights.
I can afford to have a long vacation this year.
I love traveling. = I love to travel.
List of verbs used with gerunds (verb+ing)

Example: John admitted taking the money.
admit finish practice

avoid imagine put (off)
consider keep (on) recommend
delay mention regret
deny mind suggest
dislike miss
enjoy postpone
92 Quartet 3
U N I T
4
List of verbs used with the infinitive (to + base form of verb)
Example: He can't afford to take a vacation this year.
afford happen pretend

agree hope promise
appear learn refuse
arrange manage regret
decide mean = intend seem
expect offer threaten
fail pay want
forget plan wish
List of verbs used before gerunds or infinitives (with no difference in

meaning)
Examples: He began studying at 8:00 pm.
He began to study at 8:00 pm.
attempt like stand

begin love start
cant stand neglect stop
continue prefer try
hate remember
93 Quartet 3
U N I T
Some Practice
A Underline the gerund in each sentence. Then mark whether it is

used after a preposition (P), after a verb (V), or as the subject of
the sentence (S).
1. ____ Caley likes watching historical movies.
2. ____ Melissa suggested visiting Turkey for our next vacation.
3. ____ You cant leave Egypt without seeing the Great Pyramid.
4. ____ Traveling to Turkey was exciting.
5. ____ Id like to read about the Great Pyramid before going to Egypt.
6. ____ When I was younger, I imagined traveling around the world.
7. ____ I considered going to the Mystery Travel Theater last night, but I
changed my mind.
8. ____ Reading about the Seven Wonders of the Ancient World was
interesting.
B Complete the sentences using either a gerund or an infinitive.

The Statue of Zeus at Olympia
competing (compete) in the Olympic Games
The ancient Greeks enjoyed 1. ___________
and they decided to transform their Olympic Stadium by 2. ____________ (build)
a temple there in honor of the god Zeus.
After the temple was completed, they regretted 3. ________________ (build)

such a small, unexciting monument. They wanted 4. __________________
(create) a huge temple in honor of their god.
When the Olympic Games became more popular, the Greeks decided
5. ______________ (build) a giant statue of Zeus in the temple.The sculptor
decided 6. ________________(make) the statue so large that its head almost
touched the ceiling.
For years after, people enjoyed 7. ____________________ (visit) this site. In

462 AD, the statue was destroyed in a huge fire. Nobody wanted
8. ________________________ (rebuild) it, so today the site of the temple is
nothing but rocks.
94 Quartet 3
U N I T
C Rewrite the following sentences using a gerund and the word in

parentheses ( ).
Example: We designed the temple carefully and then we built it (after).

We built the temple after designing it carefully.
1. You should read about the Temple of Artemis and then visit Turkey. (before)
2. We watched the movie and then we talked about the Seven Wonders of the
Ancient World. (after)
3. You learn a lot about ancient history when you travel. (by)
4. The Greeks designed the statue of Zeus but they didnt consider its size.
(without)
5. I was able to travel all over the world because I saved money all year. (by)
6. We went to Cairo but we didnt visit the Great Pyramid at Giza. (without)
7. I looked at the Mystery Theater Internet site and then I saw the movie.
(before)
8. I learned about the statue of Zeus at Olympia when I read a book about
Greek history. (by)
D Complete the sentences to make them true for you. Compare

your answers with a partner.
1. Traveling is
2. Visiting ancient sites
3. I love taking pictures of
4. Flying on an airplane is
5. I love learning about
6. Before going on vacation, I ...
95 Quartet 3
U N I T
E Before reading the story below, write down any eight gerunds.
Then insert them into the blanks in the story and read the results
to your partner.
The Mausoleum at Halicarnassus
353 BC, Halicarnassus
Dearest Medalia,
I am writing to tell you the sad news: my dearest husband Mausolus

has died. I dont need to explain to you, my friend, how much I miss
1. _______________________ him every day and
2. _______________ his sweet voice. 3. ___________________
without him is difficult, but 4. __________________ wont help me.
I must start 5. __________________ the rest of my life. After carefully
6. __________________the situation, Im going to call it a
Mausoleum, after my dear husband. Ive decided to build a giant
burial place in his honor. Im going to call it a Mausoleum, after my
dear husband. Ive asked several of the best artists and architects in
Greece to begin 7. _____________________ the monument right
away. When the design is complete, workers will start
8. _____________________ the Mausoleum on the hill overlooking
the city. Its going to be beautiful. My Mausolus would be so pleased.
Your dearest friend,
Artemisia
96 Quartet 3
U N I T
F Go back to The Mausoleum at Halicarnassus in exercise E and

complete the passage with gerunds of your choice.
G Who am I?
Next to each statement, write the name of one of the Seven
Ancient Wonders.
1. Many years ago, I was used for guiding ships into the harbor of Alexandria.
__________________________________________________________
2. If you enjoy looking for treasure, come and walk through my secret
passages.
__________________________________________________________
3. The best artists in Greece began designing me after King Mausolus died.
__________________________________________________________
4. After praying to the goddess, people left ivory and other treasures inside
me._______________________________________________________
5. Until I was destroyed in a fire, I was sitting in the Olympic Stadium in

Greece.____________________________________________________
6. Hanging around is what I did best. I enjoyed making Babylon a beautiful

place._____________________________________________________
7. Standing in the New York harbor is a statue that looks like me.
__________________________________________________________
97 Quartet 3
U N I T
Some Fun
A Fill in the missing words and then complete the crossword puzzle.
4 5 6
10
Across
2. One of the wonders of the world was a s ____ of Zeus.
3. People go to Egypt to see the Great P _______ .
4. The island of Pharos is a small, m _________ island.
8. The lighthouse was d ______ even before this earthquake.
9. There was a r ______ about a treasure under the lighthouse.
10. The lighthouse c _____ after the earthquake.
Down
1. Since it wasn't r _____ after the first two earthquakes, it was easily
destroyed by the third earthquake.
5. A very tall building is called a s _______ .
6. By 332 BC Alexandria had already d _______ into an international city.
7. The lighthouse stood in the Alexandria h _____ .
98 Quartet 3
U N I T
B Look at the list and check ( ) the "wonders" you have visited.
Add any other places you have visited which you consider
"wonders".
EUROPE
____ The Parthenon (Athens, Greece)
____ The Kremlin (Moscow, Russia)
____
____
____
ASIA
____ The Great Wall (China)
____ Taj Mahal (Agra, India)
____
____
AFRICA
____ Suez Canal (Egypt)
____ Aswan High Dam (Egypt)
____
____
NORTH & CENTRAL AMERICA

____ Church of our Lady of Guadalupe (Mexico City)
____ Panama Canal (Panama)
____ Mount Rushmore (South Dakota, U.S.)
____ Golden Gate Bridge (California)
____
____
____
SOUTH AMERICA
____ Valley of the Statues (San Agustin, Colombia)
____ The Inca Trails (Bolivia)
____
____
AUSTRALIA & OCEANIA

____ Easter Island
____ Rotorua (New Zealand)
____
____
99 Quartet 3
U N I T
On Your Own
Pick one of the wonders that you have seen, and write a
paragraph about it. If you havent seen any of the wonders
listed in Some Fun, decide which one you would most like to see
and get information about it. You should answer some of the
following questions in your report:
Where is the wonder located?
When was it built?
Why was it built?
Did it have a practical use?
How did you feel when you saw the wonder?
Why do you think it is considered a "wonder"?
100 Quartet 3
U N I T
What Did You Learn?
Facts:
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
Words:
Word Meaning
Language points:
Past Perfect:
positive form
Past Perfect:
negative form
Past Perfect:
question form
Gerunds as subject
Gerunds after
prepositions
Gerunds after
verbs
101 Quartet 3
U N I T
Crossword Answers
1
r
2
s t a t u e
3
p y r a m i d
a
4 5 6
m i s t e r i o u s d
r k e
7
h e y v
8
d a m a g e d s e
r c l
9
b r u m o r o
o a p
10
r c o l l a p s e d
e d
r
102 Quartet 3
U N I T
5
Great Bargains!
U N I T
PART 1: BUYING AND SELLING
Language Point
Non-defining relative clauses
Before You Start
Looking for a new car? Tired of running around to

every car dealer in town?
Try Bobs Online Car Store! Buying a car has never
been so simple!
Bobs Online Car Store, where we sell the best
cars, isnt hard to use. Just type in the car you want
and click on the search button. Your car will appear
on the screen. Then click on the "payment
information" button and type in your credit card
number. The down payment for the car will be taken
out of your account immediately.
The car payments, which are lower than anywhere
else, will be automatically taken from your credit card
account every month! Your car will be delivered to
your home the next day! Its that easy!
Our cars, which come in every available color,
have a ten-year guarantee.
Bob, whose family has been in the business for
30 years, personally stands behind every car that he
sells.
If theres any problem at all with your car, just send
us an e-mail or give us a call.
www.qgroupplc.com/bobscars
555-CARS
104 Quartet 3
U N I T
A Read the dialog and answer the questions below.

Kassia: Gerry, Im a bit worried. I bought a car on the Internet
two days ago and it still hasnt arrived. Bob, who runs the
online car store, advertised that the car would be delivered
the next day.
Gerry: Lets call the number on his web site and see whats going on.
Here, let me call. Its 555-CARS.
555-CARS: ring ring ringclick!
Hello. You have reached Bobs Online Car Store. We cant come
to the phone right now. If you have a question, send us an e-mail
at bobscars@qgroupplc.com.
Gerry: Its an answering machine. Let me send them a quick e-mail right
now. Oh no, I think we have a problem
Kassia: Why?
Gerry: The message on the screen says, "This e-mail address doesnt
exist!"

According to the advertisement
t Bobs cars come in every available color.

1. ___
2. ___ If you buy a car at Bobs Online Car Store, it will be delivered to you the
next day.
3. ___ Bobs cars have a two-year guarantee.
4. ___ You have to pay for your car with a credit card.
5. ___ The down payment for your car will be taken out of your account in a
month.
6. ___ Bobs family has been in the business for 30 years.

1. How do you buy a car at Bobs Online Car Store?
2. What information does the advertisement give you about Bob?
3. What information does the advertisement give you about the car payments?
4. Why do you think Kassia didnt get her car?
105 Quartet 3
U N I T
Some Grammar
Non-defining relative clauses
Bobs Online Car where the best cars are is easy to use.
Store, sold,
Our cars, which come in every have a ten-year guarantee.
available color,
Bob, who runs the online car said in his advertisement

store, that the car would be
delivered the next day.
Bob, whose family has been personally guarantees

in the business for 30 each car he sells.
years,
We use non-defining relative clauses to add extra information about a

known person, place, or thing.
These relative clauses can be left out of the sentence without a loss of
meaning.
Example: The cars, which are expensive, are sold on the Internet.
= The cars are sold on the Internet.
Non-defining relative clauses are always separated from the rest of the
sentence by commas.
106 Quartet 3
U N I T
Some Practice
A Complete the following sentences with who, which, whose, or

where.
who was enthusiastic, sold me my first new car.
1. The car dealer, ______
2. Jerrys Car Store, _______ my uncle works, is close to my house.
3. My old car, ____________ was in bad condition, kept breaking down.
4. Gillian, ______________ father is a mechanic, sold me the used car.
5. The Internet, ______________ I often use, has many online car stores.
6. Bobs Online Car Store, _________ Kassia bought her car, doesnt really
exist.
7. Kassia, _______ wanted a Pontiac, never got her car.
B Combine the sentences to make a non-defining relative clause.
Example: This watch doesnt work. I bought it at Bargain Jewelers.

This watch, which I bought at Bargain Jewelers, doesnt work.
1. Lenny sells great clothes. His store is on Marlin Road.

2. That bag is beautiful. Its made out of leather.
3. That market sells everything. Ritu shops there.
4. That coat looks good on you. You bought it in Paris.
5. These shoes hurt my feet. They were very expensive.
6. Kassia wears nice clothes. She works in the fashion industry.
7. Jane was helpful. She sold me a new ski jacket.
8. Bills Bike Store is in the town center. They sell mountain bikes.
107 Quartet 3
U N I T
C Read the advertisement and add commas.
Big Als, which opened on March 6 has the best

bargains in town. All of the products that nobody else
wanted are waiting for you in our bargain basement.
Come to our clothing section which is near the back door
exit to get secondhand shirts, shoes, ties, dresses, and
coats. Find great bargains on comfortable womens
shoes that are almost new.
Big Al, whose goal is to save you money has been in

the bargain business for 20 years.
He is a man who can be trusted.
Come and join us at 666 Bargain Lane where Big Als is

located, for great prices and fantastic service.
108 Quartet 3
U N I T
D Look at the advertisements. Rewrite them, using sentences with

who, which, where, or whose.
Example: Gerry is moving to Europe
Gerry, who lives in Chicago, is moving to Europe.
Gerry, who wants to empty his house, is moving to Europe.
I am moving to Europe! Join me My cat needs a home!

as I empty my house.
Im selling everything but the I have recently developed an
kitchen sink! allergy to cat fur, and I cant keep
Old clothes, science fiction my cat. Shes had all her
books, furniture, rugs, pop
and classical music CDs, shots and is very healthy.
and more! If you can give her a loving home,
Place: 266 Walmer Road Ill sell her to you
Date and Time:
for a very low price.
Saturday, February 10
from 1:00 - 5:00 pm.
See you there! Call: Kassia Mier at 555-2323
Is having a GIANT SALE!

Bargains, Bargains, Bargains
Everything must go!
Shirts, dresses, ties, and mens suitsall half price!
Steve, Carl, and the rest of the staff at Lennys are moving to a new location.
Join us at our new store after September 25: 623 Bargain Road.
109 Quartet 3
U N I T
E Add information to the sentences below. Use a non-defining

relative clause.
Example: Toothshine Toothpaste keeps your teeth clean.
Toothshine Toothpaste, which is white, keeps your teeth clean.
Sugarcane Cola tastes great!
Bills Bikes give you the smoothest ride in town.
Coffee Clive makes the best coffee outside Colombia!
110 Quartet 3
U N I T
F Look at the information sheet and write as many sentences as

you can about the products listed. Use non-defining relative
clauses.
Example: Doogies Dog treats, which cost $3.75, are tasty.
Product Price Flavors/Kinds Amount per Expert

product recommendation
Doogies Dog $3.75 beef or chicken 200 treats per Tasty; dogs love them!
Treats bag
Sunshine $1.90 melon, lemon, 24 ounces (710 Makes your hair
Shampoo kiwi ml) per bottle smell fresh and clean.
Jacks Juice $1.25 apple, orange, 1 or 2 quart Tastes like its
grapefruit (1.05 or 2.11 freshly squeezed.
liter) bottles
Alices Aspirin $4.30 regular and 100 per bottle Takes away your
chewable headache in minutes.
childrens
tablets
G Decide whether the clauses in the following sentences are

defining or non-defining. Insert commas where necessary.
1. The store which was a fine example of Bauhaus architecture was built in
1950.
2. We invited that nice girl who Jackie had met the week before to go shopping
with us.
3. My cousin Bill who I havent seen in six years is coming to visit next week.
4. That is the store where I bought my first bicycle.
5. Officer Dilbert whose son works in my store will be visiting us tonight.
6. The authors latest book which has become a bestseller is about markets
around the world.
111 Quartet 3
U N I T
H With a partner, add non-defining relative clauses to expand the

story of Jack and the Beanstalk.
Example: A boy, whose name was Jack, went to town, where there was a
market, to sell his familys cow, which was old.
A boy went to town to sell his familys cow. On the way, an old man offered to trade
some magic beans for the cow. Jack agreed and gave the man the cow. Jack took the
beans and went home. When his mother saw the beans, she was very angry. She
threw the beans out of the window. In the morning, Jack woke up and saw a huge
beanstalk outside his window.
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
112 Quartet 3
U N I T
Something to Read
Some Words
abandoned collect opportunity successfully
bargain flea market optimistic variety
cheerfully international recommend
Mias Travel Guide:
Buying and Selling

at the San Jose Flea Market
Weekly readers of my travel guide
know that theres nothing I enjoy more
than a good bargain. Last week, I had
the opportunity to visit one of the
biggest bargain hunting centers in the
world: the San Jose Flea Market.
The flea market, which is in the heart of

the Silicon Valley, sells everything you
can ever imagine. By the end of my day In March 1960, the market opened on
there, I had a shopping cart full of an abandoned piece of farmland to
items: toys for my children, fruit and about 100 customers and 20 excited
vegetables, a new tire for my car, sellers. Today, an average of 80,000
clothes, books, and shoes. I also had a customers a week and over 4 million
chance to meet the director of the San people a year shop at the market, and
Jose Flea Market, who cheerfully told 6,000 people sell goods there!
me about the fascinating history of the
biggest and most successfully run The market, which is open from
open-air market in the U.S. Wednesday to Sunday, also has a
variety of international restaurants
The idea for the market began in 1959, and 30 snack bars.
with a man named George Bumb.
George, an intelligent and optimistic The next time you visit the Silicon
businessman, noticed that people often Valley, I highly recommend that
throw away things that are still useful. you visit the San Jose Flea
He decided that there must be a way to Market. And dont forget your
collect these unwanted items and sell shopping cart
them to other people, and he was right.
113 Quartet 3
U N I T
Some Practice

Example: The San Jose Flea Market sells furniture.
The San Jose Flea Market sells everything you can imagine.
1. Mia, who writes a weekly travel guide, learned about the history of the
market from a book.
2. The San Jose Flea Market, which is in the Silicon Valley, is the smallest and
least successful open-air market in the U.S.
3. The market, which is very successful today, opened in 1960 in an
abandoned parking lot.
4. Over 80,000 customers a year, who come from all over the world, visit the
market.
5. The market, which is always busy, is open every day of the week.

1. Where is the San Jose Flea Market?
2. What types of things can you buy at the market?
3. Where did George Bumb get the idea for starting a flea market?
4. How many customers visit the market every week? Every year? How many
people sell things there?
5. Where can you see a text like this?

A B
1. g
____ abandoned a. to gather things
2. ____ a bargain b. doing something well
3. ____ to collect c. a chance
4. ____ cheerfully d. a place where people buy and sell old things
5. ____ a flea market e. a mixture
6. ____ international f. having a positive attitude
7. ____ an opportunity g. left behind
8. ____ to recommend h. a good price
9. ____ successfully i. to say that something or someone is good
10. ____ a variety j. having to do with more than one country
11. ____ optimistic k. happily
114 Quartet 3
U N I T
What Do You Think?

1. What does Mia think of the San Jose Flea Market? How do you know?
2. Do you ever shop at flea markets? If yes, what types of things do you look
for?
3. There is a popular saying: "One persons trash is another

persons treasure." What do you think it means? Do you agree?
B Invent your own flea market together with some other students.
Decide:
what kind of products will be sold in your flea market (handicrafts, old
furniture, etc.).
when the flea market is open (all week, only on weekends, etc.).
where the flea market is located (parking lot, backyard, etc.).
how you're going to advertise the flea market (newspaper, notice boards,
etc.).
how you're going to make money from the flea market (charge the sellers,
charge the buyers, etc.).
On Your Own
Choose a store or a market which you particularly enjoy visiting.

Write a short article recommending it to others. Include some of
the following information in your article.
Where is it located?
What can you buy there?
What is the history of the store or market?
What do you like about it?
115 Quartet 3
U N I T
PART 2: BAZAARS AND SPECIAL GIFTS

Language Point
Review of Modals
Before You Start
Jason: I didnt realize how big the Khan al Khalili Bazaar would be!
Theres so much to see!
Fabia: Im glad theres such a big selection. I have to buy presents for
everyone in my family before we leave Cairo.
Jason: I do too. Look over here, Fabia. These necklaces are beautiful. I
must get one for my mother. Im a little short of cash though
could you lend me $50?
Fabia: Jason, dont you know that you can bargain with the shop owners
for a lower price? Thats the fun of the bazaar!
Store owner: Did I hear you say that you were interested in these lovely
necklaces, sir? Sit down and have some tea. I might be able to
give you a very good price.
Jason: The necklace with the blue stone in the middle is beautiful. Could
I look at it?
116 Quartet 3
U N I T
5
Shop owner: Of course. For you, Ill make a special price. How does $30
sound?
Jason: Fabia, thats a $10 discount. Should I buy it?
Fabia: Keep bargaining. You may be able to get an even lower price.
Ask him politely for a bigger discount.
Jason: Would you give it to me for $25?
Shop owner: Thats a very low price. This necklace was handmade by a local
artist. My final offer is $27.
Jason: Ill take it! Thank you.
Fabia: You did very well, Jason. Are you happy with your necklace?
Jason: Yes Just one question. Do you want to buy it from me?
Fabia: Buy it? I thought it was for your mother!
Jason: It was supposed to be. The problem is, I got so excited about
bargaining for a lower price that I forgot that my mother is allergic
to jewelry. She cant wear this necklace!

1. Where are Jason and Fabia?
2. The shop owner wants to sell Jason a necklace for $30. What advice does
Fabia give Jason about the price?
3. Why does Jason want to sell the necklace to Fabia?

t You can bargain with the shop owners at the Egyptian bazaar.
1. ____
2. ____ Jason must buy a necklace for his sister.
3. ____ The shop owner cant bargain with Jason.
4. ____ Jason might buy the necklace tomorrow.
5. ____ Jasons mother cant wear jewelry.
6. ____ Fabia has to buy presents for her family.
117 Quartet 3
U N I T
Some Grammar
Modal Review
Use Positive Negative

Ability/Inability You can bargain with the shop owners for a cant
lower price.(present,future)
I am able to give you a good price. isnt able to
(present) wasnt able to
was able to (past) wont be able to
will be able to (future)
I could bargain with shop owners easily in couldnt
the past, but now I find it embarrassing.
(past of can)
For you, Ill make a special price. (future) wont
Permission Can I try some of this perfume before I buy cant
it? (present, future)
May I try on the necklace? (more formal) may not
Could I look at that necklace, please? couldnt
Requests Could I borrow $50? couldnt
May I have some spices, please? may not
Would you sell me the necklace for $25? wouldnt
Advice You should try to bargain for a lower price. shouldnt
Obligation I have to buy presents for everyone in my dont have to
family.
I had to sell the necklace that I got at the didnt have to
bazaar.
Obligation I must buy that necklace for my mother. mustnt
and strong These are so beautiful! You really must buy
recommendation one! (past = had to)
Possibility He may give it to you for a lower price if may not
you keep bargaining.
I might come with you Im not sure yet. might not
It could rain later, so bring an umbrella. couldnt
118 Quartet 3
U N I T
Some Practice
A Rewrite the sentences using an appropriate modal.

Example: Do you think its a good idea for me to buy gifts at the bazaar?
Should I buy gifts at the bazaar?
1. There is a possibility that I will meet you at the spice bazaar later.
2. When the shop owner offers you tea, its a good idea to accept it.
3. Is it possible for you to tell me whats in this Turkish dessert? Its delicious.
4. I ate very spicy foods when I was younger, but now I cant.
5. If you like spices, its a good idea to visit the bazaar in Cairo.
6. Do I have permission to try some of this before I buy it?
7. I have an obligation to confirm my plane ticket three days before I leave
Cairo.
8. Is it possible for you to give me a bag of herbs?
B Complete the passage using appropriate modals.
The Perfect Gift Bazaar

Looking for the ideal gift for that special someone? Tired of running all
can find exactly what you are looking for at the
over town? You (1) _____
Perfect Gift Bazaar.
The Perfect Gift Bazaar is located at 22 Cado Drive. Join us anytime from
9:00 am - 10:00 pm seven days a week, and remember our motto:
"If you (2) __________ find what youre looking for at the Perfect Gift
Bazaar, you wont find it at all!"
Sales Assistant: Hello, (3) _________ I help you?
Rena: Yes. I saw your advertisement in a magazine, and I decided to

come and take a look. My brother is getting married, and I
(4) _________________ buy him and his fiance a nice present.
Sales Assistant: You (5) ________________ look in our household section. We

have pictures, silks, furniture, and a variety of other things for the
home.
119 Quartet 3
U N I T
5
Rena: Well, they (6) ______________ like something new for the
house later on, but they have everything they need at the
moment. Besides, after they get married they are going to
travel around the world for six months.
Sales Assistant: You (7)________________ buy them some camping equipment.

If you (8) ____________ afford it, we have the best quality
camping gear in the country.
Rena: Actually, I think they have all the equipment they need. I really
want to find them something that they (9) _________________
use. The big problem is, they have everything!
Sales Assistant: If you (10)______________ think of anything, why dont you get
them a gift voucher?
Rena: A gift voucher! I thought you were going to help me find the
perfect gift!
Sales Assistant: Well, you said they have everything. This (11)____________ be
the one thing they dont have!
C Pick the best sentence to continue the first sentence.

1. I couldnt afford to buy people expensive presents when I was younger.
a. I have more money to spend on presents now.
b. I still cant afford expensive presents.
2. You should buy Fabia camping equipment for her birthday.

a. Im not sure if she likes to go camping.
b. She loves to go camping.
3. I might buy my friends a picture at the Perfect Gift Bazaar.

a. I havent decided yet.
b. Its exactly what they are looking for.
4. You must pay for your purchase with cash.

a. We dont take checks or credit cards here.
b. Its not a good idea to use a credit card.
120 Quartet 3
U N I T
5
5. Can I try on this dress?
a. I want to see if it fits me.
b. I dont think I need to see how it looks. The label says "one size fits all."
6. I could fit into a size ten a few years ago.

a. I still fit into a size ten.
b. Now I am a size fourteen.
D Complete the following sentences. Make them true for you.

Compare your ideas with other students in the class.
Example: Before you buy a present, you should
Before you buy a present, you should make sure you have enough
money to pay for it.
1. I think all shopping malls should because
2. When I cant think of anything to buy for someone, I
3. In the future, people might be able to shop
4. In the past, people could buy Now
5. If I could shop without ever leaving my house
121 Quartet 3
U N I T
E Read the advertisements and then answer the questions.

Compare your answers with other students in the class.
Gifts and Speciality Stores
Aarons Travel and Gift Store Floras Flowers

Travel souvenirs 894 Bouquet Lane............555-6712
23 Mall Road...................555-7722
The Games Store
Body Fresh Board games and puzzles
Luxurious soaps and bath products 43 Brello Lane................555-3456
to keep you smelling fresh and feeling great. Gifts, Gifts, Gifts
67 Beaverton Blvd..........555-9090 Unusual gifts
56 Yellow Road................555-6879
The Book Bazaar
Books for a variety of interests: Hals Hats
science fiction, romance, psychology, Hats for every occasion: Cowboy hats,
health, and music. We also have a rare baseball caps, winter hats, formal hats
books section and a selection of new 66 Brain Drive.................555-8080
and old magazines.
567 Calway Drive............555-8899 Harrys Household Goods
Well take care of all of your home
The Bridal Shop decorating needs. We sell furniture, rugs, wall
Everything you need to make paper in a variety of patterns, floor tiles,
your wedding day special. stained glass windows, and more!
55 Pathway Ave...............555-2020 78 Renault Ave...............555-9034
Candles and Things Jewels for You

Candles, incense, massage oils Necklaces, bracelets, rings, and watches in
56 Mason Drive...............555-7676 gold or silver. Classy and casual.
90 Conrad Ave................555-4243
Carols Curtains
Lovely handmade curtains, pillowcases, The Dollar Store
place mats, and other accessories for your Everything you need, and it only costs a dollar!
home. School supplies, household items, candles,
32 Kathrose Drive...........555-1570 and souvenirs.
The Silk Store

Deliciously Sweet Gifts Beautiful mens and womens
Find the perfect gift for the silk underwear for that special someone.
chocolate and sweets lover. 55 Thornway Blvd...........555-0000
45 Donlands Ave.............555-7777
Toys, Toys, Toys
Toys for children, stuffed animals, games.
67 Victoria Park Ave.......555-9812
122 Quartet 3
U N I T
5
1. You are looking for a present for a five-year-old child. Where should you go?
2. You are getting married next month. Which store(s) could you visit to help
you plan your wedding? What would you buy?
3. You have just moved into a new house/ apartment and you want to buy a
few things to make the place look nice. Which store(s) might you visit and
what could you buy?
4. You have to send a gift to your cousin. She lives in another country and
wants something that reminds her of your country. Where could you buy the
present and what would you buy?
5. You have to buy the perfect present for the person sitting next to you in
class. Try to guess what they might like and where you could buy them a
present. Write your answer down on a piece of paper and swap papers. Tell
your partner how you feel about the gift they chose for you.
123 Quartet 3
U N I T
Some Fun
Fill in the missing words and then complete the crossword

puzzle.
1 2 3
4 3
6 1 1 7
10
Markets
Across
7. When you tell me that you think I should do something, you are r______ it to me.
8. You can find a v _____ of restaurants at the market.
9. If everyone has left the land and there is nothing there, it is a _____________ .
10. Another word for happily is c ___________ .
Down
1. Another word for chance is o __________ .
2. If you usually think that things will turn out well, you are o _______________.
3. He decided to c ________ all of the unwanted items and to sell them.
4. If you run your business s _______ , you will be making a profit.
5. When something is being sold for less than usual, it is called a b _____________ .
7. An i ____________ restaurant serves food from different countries.
124 Quartet 3
U N I T
On Your Own
Choose one of the following statements or make up your own.

Use it to write your own advertisement. Include details about the
store itself, the types of things you can buy there, and the prices.
You can buy beautiful clothes at Lenas Fashions.
If you like flowers, you must shop at Cherry Blossoms.
Try Emmas Gift Store you just might find that perfect gift!
At Cliffs CD Store, you can dance!
125 Quartet 3
U N I T
What Did You Learn?
Facts:
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
Words:
Word Meaning
126 Quartet 3
U N I T
5
Language points:
Language Point Examples

Non-defining
relative clauses
Modals:
ability / inability
can
is able to
could
will
permission
can
may
could
requests-questions
could
may
would
advice
should
obligation
have to/has to
must
possibility
may
might
could
127 Quartet 3
U N I T
Crossword Answers
1 2 3
o o c
4 3
p s p o b
p u t l a
o c i l r
6 1 1 7
r e c o m m e n d i n g
t e i c n a
u s s t t i
n s t e n
i f i r
t u c n
y l a
8
l v a r i e t y
y i
o
9
a b a n d o n e d
a
10
c h e e r f u l l y
128 Quartet 3
U N I T
6
Review
U N I T
Some Grammar
A Fill in the missing verbs in the letter below. Use any of the
following past tense forms: Past Simple, Past Progressive, Past
Perfect, Past Passive, was able to, and used to.
Dear Amy,
enjoyed (enjoy) being with you last weekend. Im so glad

We really (1)________
that we (2)________________ (be) able to stay for the Chinese New
Year. We (3)_____________ (know) about Chinese New Year, but
(4)__________________ (never celebrate) it before. I remember
when we (5)________________ (be) children, you
(6)______________ (bring) sweet dumplings over to our house after
the Chinese New Year. I (7)_____________ (love) them, but I
(8)__________________ (not know) what the holiday (9)__________
(be) about. Now I know.
We also (10)_________________ (appreciate) the fantastic tour you

(11)_____________ (give) us of the Canton Bank building.
We (12)_____________ (tell) that we (13)_____________ (be) very
lucky to get in because the building is supposed to be renovated in a few
days. While we (14)__________________ (walk) around the building,
builders (15)______________________ (prepare) to start the
renovations. Did you notice?
Thank you for the delicious fortune cookies you (16)__________ (give)
us. We (17)___________ (tell) by our Chinese neighbors that we should
only eat one a day, otherwise we may have bad luck. Is that true?
Please keep in touch!

Love,
Nadine and Marcus
130 Quartet 3
U N I T
B Write your own letter describing a vacation you had.

Use the letter in exercise A as a model.
131 Quartet 3
U N I T
C Complete the conversations below with is/are going to or will.

Conversation 1
Jane: Marco, can you please take me to the airport tonight?
Marco: will No problem at all. I (2) __________
Of course I (1) ______.
pick you up at your place.
One hour later, Sophia calls Jane.

Sophia: Jane, how are you getting to the airport tonight? (3) ___________
__________ take the bus? I can drive you, if you want.
Jane: No thanks. Marco (4) ___________take me.
Conversation 2
Larry: Hi Rita, have you decided what to do tonight?
Rita: Yes I have. I (5) __________________ see a movie with Ray.
Larry: Oh that's great. I think I (6) _____ join you.
Rita: Sorry Larry, I don't think you can join us. We
(7) __________________take Marco with us and there are no
more tickets for tonight. How about joining us for dinner
tomorrow?
Larry: I (8) ____________ try to make it, but I'm not sure if I can. Ive
arranged to meet Suzie. I (9) ______________ call you later and
tell you if I can come.
D Write a conversation in which you and a friend talk about

your plans for the evening. Use will and going to. Use the
conversations in exercise C as a model.
132 Quartet 3
U N I T
E You are on a train. Another passenger begins a conversation with

you. Read the passengers comments to you and then your
thoughts about each comment. Then complete your replies to the
passenger. Use the appropriate future tense.
The passengers Your thoughts Your reply

comments
1. Which station are you You have a ticket to Im going to get off in
getting off at? Richmond. Richmond.
2. Are you going to sit here You want to visit a friend

for the whole journey? who is in another car.
3. There is an empty seat Your friend is getting on

near you. Is anyone the train at the next stop.
going to join you later
on?
4. What a pity. Are you No, you want to have

going to need the seat lunch in the trains dining
during lunch? car.
5. How long is that At least one hour.

going to take?
6. I am very tired, and Im You also want to have a

going to have a nap. nap.
133 Quartet 3
U N I T
F Jane is a travel agent. Look at her notes and write full sentences
using going to to talk about her plans.
Example: Sell tickets for next week.

Im going to sell tickets for next week.
1. Call the customers at 10:00 am. 1.

2. Look for a cheaper ticket for Ms.
2.
Kramer.
3. Go to the concert on Wednesday 3.
night.
4.
4. Leave the cat with the neighbors on
the weekend. 5.
5. Prepare salary for the secretary.
6.
6. Meet the bank manager on the
31st at 11:00 am. 7.
7. Speak to the doctor about my
headaches.
G Ross works for Sun Travel Agency. He is speaking to his boss

about a raise. Complete the conversation using the Past
Simple, Present Perfect Simple, or Present Perfect Progressive.
Born in 1962.
Moved to San Francisco in 1970.
Started working at the Sun Travel Agency in October 1990.
Started working as a messenger for Sun Travel Agency four
years ago, but for the last three years has worked in the ticket
department.
Married for three years.
Has had the same salary for more than a year and a half.
Wants a raise.
134 Quartet 3
U N I T
6
Boss: Ross, how long have you been living in San Francisco?
Ross: Ive been living here since 1970.

Well (1) _____________________
Boss: And how long (2)_______________(work) for the Sun Travel Agency?
Ross: (3)________________________.
Boss: What month (4)________________ (born)?
Ross: I (5)_____________ in October.
Boss: How long (6) ___________________(work) in the ticket department?
Ross: I (7)___________________ for three years.
Boss: So, how can I help you?
Ross: Well, I (8)_____________(come) here to talk about a raise.
Boss: A raise?
Ross Yes, I (9)________________(have) a raise for almost two years.
Boss: Really? That long? (10)_____________ (have) any bonuses from us at

all?
Ross: No, I (11) ________.
Boss: So youre asking for a raise and a bonus?
Ross: Yes or
Boss: Or what.?
Ross: I will leave. I (12)___________ (got) a job offer from another

company. Theyll pay me 50% more than Im making now.
Boss: Well, you (13) ______________ (convince) me. Youll get your raise
AND a bonus.
135 Quartet 3
U N I T
H Write short notes describing any work experience youve had.

Add some personal details as well. Talk to your partner about
why you think you should have a raise.
136 Quartet 3
U N I T
I Complete the letter with the verbs in brackets. Use the

Present Perfect Simple or Progressive.
Hi there,
has been
Who had this crazy idea of sending us on a honeymoon cruise? It 1. _________
raining
__________(rain) ever since we got on the boat. Poor Melissa 2. ___________
(be) seasick ever since we left. We 3. ___________(be) to the ships doctor
many times but he 4. _____________(never see) such a difficult case.
Melissa 5. _____________(not eat) a thing for three days and
6. ___________(not be able) to enjoy the wonderful food.
I dont feel so good either. I 7. _________________ (have) a cold for a few days.
I 8. ________ (not have) many colds, but this one is the worst one I
9. ________________ (ever have). I cant wait to get off this boat. Please help
us!
Love,
Rick and Melissa
J Think of a terrible/funny experience youve had. Write a letter to

a friend, describing this experience. Read your partners letter,
and then describe his/her experience to someone else in the
class.
K Use the verbs in brackets to complete the conversation

between the police and Ms. G. Use the Past Perfect or Past
Simple.
Police: What happened on the night of the accident?
Ms. G. was
It (1) _______ (be) late and I was on my way back from a business
dinner. The way back home (2)__________ (not be) very familiar
to me. There (3)_______ (be) a big truck in front of me. Before I
(4)_______(know) it, he (5)___________ (made) a sudden stop.
The truck driver (6)_________(not notice) the traffic light. Of
course it all (7)__________(happen) so suddenly.
Police: What about your brakes? Are they working?
137 Quartet 3
U N I T
Ms. G: Just before I 8. _________ (go) shopping on Tuesday, I

9. _______ (hear) a noise and I 10. _________ (decide) to have
the car checked. Everything 11. __________ (be) OK, including
the brakes.
Police: Were there any witnesses to your accident?
Ms. G: Unfortunately not. I 12. ___________ (drop off) Mr. Clark, my

boss, just before the accident.
Police: Thank you for coming to the station. We might have to call you
back again.
L Student A: You are the policeman. Use the facts from the
conversation in K and interview the truck driver to find out
his/her version of the story.
Student B: You are the truck driver. You do not believe the
accident was your fault. Prepare your version of events.
M Write a full report describing the accident based on the facts.

from exercise K and L above. Read it to the class.
POLICE ACCIDENT REPORT
138 Quartet 3
U N I T
N Before reading the letters below, write down any nine gerunds
(verb+ing). Then insert them into the blanks in the story and read
the results to your partner. You may have some very funny
stories!
Dear Doctor Feelgood,
Ive always loved exercise, and there is nothing

I enjoy more than (1) ___________________.
I usually go (2) ______________________ at
least three times a week. For the past few
weeks, Ive been having trouble
(3) ________________ when I run. Can you
tell me why this might be?
I dont have any major health problems, but I
do like (4) ___________________________.
Could this be the reason?
Dr. Feelgood
A troubled runner
Dear Doctor Feelgood,
I have a problem.
For the past few weeks, I have been (5) _____________ very badly
at night. I feel very tired during the day and I have trouble
(6)_______________. I have tried (7) ___________________ sheep
before I go to sleep, but it hasnt helped. I enjoy (8)______________
coffee and (9) ________________ chocolate at night. Could this be
part of the problem?
A tired reader
O Go back to the letters in exercise N and fill in suitable gerunds of

your choice.
P Choose one of the letters in exercise N and write Doctor

Feelgoods reply. Use gerunds in your answer.
139 Quartet 3
U N I T
Q Read the advertisement below and underline the relative clauses.
ARE YOU THE PERSON WERE LOOKING FOR?
How many times have you said to yourself that you were the
most adventurous person in the world? Havent you always said
that if you get the opportunity, youll do something unusual?
Well, heres an offer that you cannot refuse!
If you are a person whos prepared to work hard for three
months without asking any questions, then this is the job you
have been waiting for.
Our expedition company, whose name is known all over the
world, is looking for a person with a sense of adventure, some
medical experience, and a lot of courage!
Excellent pay
Tropical climate
Wonderful company
R Complete the letter of application by finishing the sentences.

Add a few clauses of your own.
Dear Adventure Tours,
I am writing to apply for the job I saw advertised in the newspaper. I think that I
am the perfect person for the job for a number of reasons.
1. I am a person
who_________________________________________________.
2. I think that adventure ___________________________________________.
3. My last job, which _____________________________________, gave me
some medical experience.
4. I am looking for a job that _____________________________________.
5. I want to work for a company that _________________________________.
I am available to be interviewed every morning before 11:00 am.
Please contact me if you think I am suitable for the job.
Thank you,
_________________________________________ (your name).
140 Quartet 3
U N I T
S Role-play
Student A: You are the interviewer at Adventure Tours. Ask the applicant
questions to decide if they are right for the job.
Student B: You are applying for the job at Adventure Tours. Try to convince
the interviewer that you are the right person for the job.
Example:
Student A: Why do you think that you are the right person for this job?
Student B: Because I am a person who loves adventure.
T Write your own advertisement for an unusual job. Use the model
in exercise Q above. Find someone in your class whos interested
in the job and interview him/her.
U Who do you think is speaking?

Match the people in A to the statements in B.
A B
1.___ Parent to child a.You dont have to finish those letters

2.___ Doctor to patient today.
3.___ Teacher to pupil b. You shouldnt watch so much TV. It

isnt good for you.
4.___ Boss to secretary
c. You must sign the contract today.
5.___ Friend to friend
d. I may come to visit you, but Ill let
6.___ Lawyer to client you know beforehand.
e. You mustnt drive while youre taking
this medication.
f. You must hand in your homework
tomorrow.
141 Quartet 3
U N I T
Something to Read
Some Words
behave critic humor repetitious
brilliant dull nostalgia ridiculous
brutal expatriates novels unfulfilled
combination expectations recovering wounded
The Critics Talk: The Sun Also Rises
Critic 1
Ernest Hemingway, the well-known American writer, would be very happy
today. His book The Sun Also Rises has become one of the bestsellers of the
twentieth century. The "recipe" for bestselling novels is always the same. The
dramatic background of a war (in this case World War I), expatriates (in this
book, an American man and a British woman living in Europe), love, loss, and
nostalgia. In The Sun Also Rises we meet two ridiculous people the
wounded American, Jake Barnes, who drinks too much, and the Briton, Lady
Bret Ashley, who loves too much. Their unfulfilled love and their general
unhappiness make this story dull and repetitious. So what is a bestseller?
Critic 2
The Sun Also Rises was published in 1926. It was Ernest Hemingways first
important novel, and he became famous after it was published. This wonderful
book tells about a group of American and British expatriates and their
adventures in Spain and France. The main characters are Jake Barnes
(American) and Lady Bret Ashley (British). It is the story of their unfulfilled love
in a Europe that is recovering from World War I. In addition to Barnes and
Ashley, there are many other colorful characters in the book who all behave
differently from our expectations. Hemingway's brilliant novel presents the
unusual combination of humor alongside human suffering.
The brutal descriptions of the bullfights in Pamplona, the strange relationship
between the two main characters, and Hemingways wonderful language have
made this novel a classic!
142 Quartet 3
U N I T
Some Practice
A Choose the correct definition.
1. novels
a. stories
b. books
c. writers
2. expatriate
a. a tourist
b. a person living in the country where they were born
c. a person living in a foreign country
3. wounded
a. having damage to a part of the body
b. doing damage to an object
c. doing damage to a building
4. dull
a. interesting
b. boring
c. funny
5. repetitious
a. never done or said
b. done or said too few times
c. done or said too many times
6. brilliant
a. wonderful
b. funny
c. boring
7. ridiculous
a. smart
b. crazy
c. silly
8. to behave
a. to act a certain way
b. to sing
c. to scream
143 Quartet 3
U N I T
6
9. humor
a. the quality of making people laugh
b. the quality of making people cry
c. the quality of making people scared
10. combination
a. one thing that is separate from other things
b. two or more things that are joined together
c. something serious
11. expectations
a. thinking that something is funny
b. thinking that someone is unpleasant
c. thinking that something is going to happen
12. recovering
a. getting over something
b. enjoying something
c. not enjoying something
13. nostalgia
a a feeling of fondness for the past
b. a feeling of fondness for the future
c. a feeling of fondness for the present
14. critic
a. someone who says what is good and bad about something, such as art
or music
b. someone who writes stories
c. an artist or musician
15. brutal
a. nice
b. funny
c. cruel
16. unfulfilled
a. how you feel when something happens that you didnt want to happen
b. how you feel when something didnt happen that you wanted to happen
c. how you feel when you think that something might happen
144 Quartet 3
U N I T
B Check () the correct answers (there is more than one correct

answer.)
According to the two critics, The Sun Also Rises is about
1. ____ bullfighting
2. ____ two people who get into a strange friendship
3. ____ the suffering as a result of World War I
4. ____ World War I
5. ____ the city of Pamplona
6. ____ the two countries, France and Spain
C Who might say this, critic 1 or critic 2?
Critic 1 Critic 2
1. I loved the book.
2. The book was boring.
3. The characters in the book
were wonderful.
4. The novel was intelligent.
5. Many bestselling novels
are repetitive and boring.
6. The book was humorous.
D Write a few sentences summarizing the story The Sun Also Rises
in your own words. The first sentence has been done for you.
1. The book takes place in France and Spain.
E Think of a book you didnt like. Write a short review criticizing

the book.
145 Quartet 3
U N I T
Some Words
carried out disappointment hardly exists troop
conquered docked Holy Land unbelievable
crusaders excavations
Text 1
In the year 1100 AD, a troop of crusaders on their way to

the Holy Land stopped at the city of Ephesus in Turkey.
The leader of the troop had read about the large seaport,
the huge ships that docked there, the rich city of
Ephesus, and the famous Temple of Artemis. But he didn't
see any of these things.
"Excuse me, " he asked someone. "Am I in the right
place? Is this the city of Ephesus? "
"Well, this used to be the City of Ephesus, but now its
called Ayasaluk," the man said.
"So where are the ships? And what happened to the
unbelievable Greek Temple of Artemis?"
"Excuse me sir," said the citizen. "You must be in the
wrong place. There's no temple here."
What happened to the city of Ephesus? What happened
to the large port? And where was the temple that was one
of the Seven Wonders of the World?
146 Quartet 3
U N I T
Text 2
Unit 19: The Temple of Artemis
Its quite a disappointment to see the Temple of Artemis in

Ephesus. Why? It hardly exists! We know that there were a
few temples on this site. Some facts:
The first temple was built around 800 BC for the goddess
Artemis by Greek architect Cherisphorn.
This temple was destroyed in 550 BC during a war with
King Croesus, who conquered Ephesus.
King Croesus built the next temple. The architect was
Theodorus.
This temple was burned down in 356 BC by Herostrautus.
He was a citizen of Ephesus and he wanted to be famous
forever.
Shortly after the fire, work began on the next temple. The
architect was the Greek, Scopas of Paros.
The Goths, who invaded Ephesus in 262 AD, destroyed
this last temple.
Two important excavations were carried out by the British

Museum: one in 1863 and the other in 1869. They found the
remains of all the temples.
147 Quartet 3
U N I T
Some Practice
A Answer the questions about the two texts.

1. Where do you think the texts are from?
2. Which one do you prefer?
3. Which text teaches you more facts?
4. Which one is easier to remember?
5. Which text do you prefer to learn from? Why?
B Complete the following passage, using the words in the box.
carried out crusaders troop

conquered Holy Land unbelievable
In 1095 AD, Pope Urban II, the leader of the Catholic Church, gave a famous
speech in Claremont, France. He asked the people of Western Europe to travel to
the (1)_______________________ and take the city of Jerusalem from the
Muslims, who had ruled it since 638 AD.
To his surprise, a huge (2)___________________ of people
(3)_____________________ his request right away. They went eastward in
several waves and (4)______________________ Jerusalem very quickly. This
was the first of many crusades. They continued for the next several centuries,
and the (5)___________________ left a history behind which has had an
(6)_________________ effect on Western culture and thought.
C Think of a historical event that has had an influence on you.

Find out as many facts about it as you can. Then write a
paragraph for a history textbook, explaining the event.
148 Quartet 3
U N I T
IT'S ABOUT TO HAPPEN
I was there that day the day that it happened. The sun was shining and there
wasn't a cloud in the sky. The weather was perfect for such an important event.
Everyone was in a party mood, waiting for something to happen.
Near me, a few people began singing and dancing. Many people gathered
around them and encouraged them to continue. They sang songs that we all
knew, so we started singing with them.
Lots of people were there with their entire families. Some had even brought food
and drink with them and were having a picnic in the middle of the crowd. Other
people bought food and drinks from the food sellers. They made a lot of money
that day!
I was there alone. My family lived far away and couldn't get there that day.
Afterwards, I sat with them for hours and described everything that happened and
the excitement of the crowd.
We had waited for this day for so long. For the last month, everyone had been
preparing for this moment. Suddenly it became quiet. You could only hear the
birds that were singing in the trees. They had arrived. It was about to happen.
149 Quartet 3
U N I T
Some Practice
A Describe this special day.

1. What was the weather like?
2. What were the people doing?
3. How were the people feeling?
4. Where was the storyteller's family?
5. Why did it suddenly become quiet?
B What do you think happened on this special day?
C What happened? Together with your partner, add information to

the story, referring to one of the specific events listed below.
Use information from previous units in this book. Then share
your new story with the class.
Example:
I was there that day the opening of the pyramid in Giza by archeologists. The
sun was shining and there wasn't a cloud in the sky. It was a typical summer day
in Egypt
the opening of the pyramid in Giza by archeologists

the first viewing of the statue of Zeus at Olympia
the opening of the flea market in San Jose
the opening ceremony for the repaired Leaning Tower of Pisa
the opening of Pierre Cardin's Lighthouse of Alexandria.
the Running of the Bulls in Pamplona
D Write a story which doesn't refer to anything specific. Give your

story to your partner who will add his/her own details about any
event. Begin your story:
It was a rainy evening. The streets were dark and empty
150 Quartet 3
U N I T
7
T e s t s
U N I T
Test 1
PART 1: READING (20 POINTS)
A Read the texts below and find a suitable job/course for each
person. (10 points)
1) Marcelo:
Marcelo is 21 years old. Hes a student and is looking for a part-time job. He can
only work in the evenings and on weekends. He doesnt have any free mornings.
He lives in a rented apartment and must pay rent every week. He speaks English
very well. He doesnt smoke and he likes jobs that are outdoors.
2) Renata:
Renata is 28 years old. Shes a graphic artist. Shes looking for a part-time job in
the evenings so that she can study in the mornings. She would like to work in her
profession but if she cant find anything, shell agree to any evening job. Renata
doesnt mind working on weekends but prefers not to, if possible.
3) Adam
Adam is 35 years old. He is a freelance writer at a local newspaper. He wants a
permanent job at a bigger and better newspaper. If he cant find what he wants,
he is ready for a change: writing advertisements, interviewing people, or even
trying to see if he has talent in writing short stories.
4) Liana
Liana is an experienced librarian. She works at a school near her house. Her job
is interesting, but she misses the days when she actually set up the school
library. She also wants to study and develop in this field.
a
Are you talented and feel that no one really knows about it?
Do you write and keep your work hidden in a small, dark drawer?
We, The Discoverers, are the agents for you!
Send your work for evaluation and we will find you a place to publish it.
*10% commission
152 Quartet 3
U N I T
b
CLDB
Computerized Librarian Data Base is a company that trains and develops
librarians all over the world. We offer a three month course
with a guaranteed job placement upon course completion.
Only experienced librarians are accepted. No computer skills needed.
Registration ends in seven days!!!
c
Waiter/Waitress needed!
Evenings/mornings or weekends.
No previous training needed.
Especially good for students.
Apply in person to the Caf Leonardo
224 Richmond Ave.
d
Tour guides needed urgently!!!
Young males/females with fluent English, who are ready to work
morning or evening shifts. We will train you
and turn you into professionals.
*Payment by the hour
e
Q Telemarketing
Do you have free time? Do you want to work flexible hours?
Do you want to make a lot of money?
Q Telemarketing is your answer.
Job Requirements: Fluent English & French
Fax or call: 1-800-qmarket
153 Quartet 3
U N I T
B Match the advertisers in column A to the advertisements in

column B. (10 points)
A - Advertiser B - Advertisements
1. e
____ a caf a. Tour Guides
2. ____ a computer company b. The Discoverers
3. ____ a marketing company c. CLDB
4. ____ a tourist agency d. Q Telemarketing
5. ____ an agency for writers e. Caf Leonardo
154 Quartet 3
U N I T
PART 2: WRITING (50 POINTS)

A Here is some information about the Richards. Rewrite the
sentences so that they mean the same thing as the opening
sentences. Use the cues to help you. (20 points)
1. The Richards dont have as many friends as we do.
We have more friends than the Richards
___________________________________________________________.
2. Noise and music is always heard from their house.

We ________________________________________________________.
3. They lived in a city nearby and moved here a month ago.

They used __________________________________________________.
4. They were robbed by some local teenagers and decided to move out.
Local teenagers ______________________________________________.
5. The robbery happened while they were watching their favorite TV

program.
During _____________________________________________________.
6. The police warned the Richards by saying, "If you dont lock your doors,
we cant protect you."
The police said, "Unless _______________________________________.
7. The Richards decided to move to a better neighborhood even though they

didnt have enough money.
Although ___________________________________________________.
8. We told them that it was a good idea to lock their doors in our
neighborhood as well.
You should _________________________________________________.
9. We told them to lock their doors, but they didnt listen.

Even though ________________________________________________.
10. The Richards are cleaning the mess that the thieves left. They hate it!
The Richards hate ____________________________________________.
155 Quartet 3
U N I T
B Complete the questionnaire. (10 points)
Welcome to our hotel. To make your stay more enjoyable, please fill
in the missing information.
First name:__________
Last name:___________________
Home address: ___________________________________
Passport number:_____________
Room number___________
What kinds of meals do you like?
1. _____________________
2. _____________________
3. _____________________
What kinds of sports do you like?
1. _____________________
2. ______________________
C Roger stayed at the Holiday Hotel and was very unhappy with
the service. He asked for a newspaper and breakfast in bed and
didnt get it. He also reserved the tennis court, but no one wrote
it down. Write a letter of complaint from Roger to the manager
of the hotel. (20 points)
Dear Sir,
I would like to _________________________________.
I stayed in your hotel
but______________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________
Regards,
___________________
156 Quartet 3
U N I T
PART 3: LANGUAGE (30 POINTS)

Choose the best response to each question.
1. Hi Lisa, hows your family doing?
a. Theyre OK.
b. Theyre at home.
c. Theyre wonderful.
2. Where was the missing ring?

a. It was found in Jennys pocket.
b. It is not found.
c. It is found in the Jennys pocket.
3. Tess, why arent you taking the job?

a. It might be too difficult for me.
b. It must take a lot of time.
c. It can be easy.
4. What are you interested in?

a. Im interested to meet new people.
b. Im interested to meeting new people.
c. Im interested in meeting new people.
5. If I dont leave the hotel room on time, where can I leave my suitcase?
a. You may leave it in the storeroom.
b. You may stay in the storeroom.
c. You might leave it in the room.
6. Will you wait for me if Im late?

a. Yes, I must.
b. Yes, I will.
c. Yes, I am.
7. Have you been living with Mark for a long time?

a. No, Im not.
b. No, I havent.
c. No, I cant.
157 Quartet 3
U N I T
7
8. How are you going to get to Peters house?
a. Im going to catch a train.
b. Im catching a train now.
c. I have been in the train.
9. Why arent you joining us tonight?

a. Im joining you.
b. Because Im very tired.
c. Although Im very tired.
10. Were you asked to come?

a. Yes, I am.
b. Yes, I am asked.
c. Yes, I was.
158 Quartet 3
U N I T
Test 2
PART 1: READING (20 POINTS)
A Read the text and choose the correct answer below. (5 points)
Legends of Africa
Are you a legend lover? Do you want to listen to stories while the sun sets and
you are relaxing in a quiet African hotel?
We are here to take you on a magic trip of legends and sites.

Our small and luxurious hotel can host fifteen guests at a time. You will have a
guide and a storyteller. Each site and activity is linked to a legend.
Join our one-week tour in Matusadona National Park and enjoy:
canoeing through the park while listening to a legend.

a walk and a story about the wildlife of the forests.
a relaxing week with our local storytellers.
Dont forget to bring a legend, a musical instrument (even if you cant play),
and a game.
*We also specialize in childrens story tours. * Special prices for families.
1. This text is 3. You can stay in

a. an article. a. a tent.
b. an advertisement. b. a lodge.
c. an e-mail. c. a hotel.
2. This vacation is for 4. On this vacation you will

a. people who play musical a. cook a meal.
instruments only. b. go on a canoe ride.
b. children only. c. buy a musical instrument.
c. legend lovers.
159 Quartet 3
U N I T
B Read the text and choose the best answers. (5 points)
January 23
Hi Laura,
Im e-mailing you the advertisement for the company that Im working at
right now. Its a really good place to start a career. Im lucky that these
wonderful people have given me the chance to design some of their
clothes. The salary is very low, but its great experience for me.
Hope to see you soon.
Marco
Clothing is our business, but we arent businesspeople. We care about

nature and the environment. All of our clothing is made of natural
materials. We grow and pick the cotton ourselves. We do everything from
the design of the clothing to the production.
We personally deliver each item to our customers.
Our store is also a museum. You are always welcome to visit us.
1. The writer is 3. Marcos profession is

a. the store owner. a. advertising.
b. an advertiser. b. designing clothes.
c. a person working at the c. growing cotton.
store.
2. Who is Marco writing to? 4. Marco is

a. a friend or relative a. working hard in a boring job.
b. the company owner b. enjoying his work but not
c. a cotton factory getting paid very well.
c. not enjoying the job and isnt
getting paid well.
160 Quartet 3
U N I T
C Check () the correct facts about the company where Marco

works. (7 points)
The people who work in the store:
1. ____ are businesspeople.

2. ____ protect nature.
3. ____ live in tents.
4. ____ dont design the clothes.
5. ____ work in the cotton fields.
6. ____ sell the clothes they make.
7. ____ personally deliver their clothes to the customers.
D Before Marco found this job, he wrote an advertisement in the

newspaper looking for a job as a clothing designer.
Check the advertisement you think he wrote. (3 points)
1.
A textile and fashion designer specializing in natural
materials is looking for work. Willing to travel and learn.
E-mail: clothes@qgroupplc.com
2.
An artist with lots of experience in set design for movies
is looking for an interesting job.
Fax: 555-0064
3.
A graduate of Queens Textile and Design College

is looking for an exciting job with good pay.
Willing to learn and experience any kind of work.
Call: 555-9964
161 Quartet 3
U N I T
PART 2: WRITING (50 POINTS)
A Rewrite the sentences so that they mean the same thing as the
opening sentence. Use the cues to help you. (20 points)
1. Thats my dog Lucky. I got him from my neighbor.

I got my dog Lucky from my neighbor.
________________________________________
2. My dog Lucky doesnt eat as much as our neighbors dog.

Lucky eats ___________________________________________.
3. The neighbors dog doesnt know as many tricks as our dog Lucky.
Lucky knows __________________________________________.
4. If Lucky doesnt stop chewing our furniture, Ill have to give him away.
Unless ___________________________________.
5. Lucky was found by Miss Brown, our neighbor down the street.
The neighbor _________________________.
6. Lucky is always fed by my younger brother Max.

Max ___________________________.
7. Until I went to university, I walked Lucky every morning.

I used ___________________________________________.
8. Miss Brown was walking down the street when she suddenly saw a lonely
dog. While _________________________________________________.
9. I thought to myself: Ill take that dog if no one else comes to get him.
Unless _____________________________________.
10. Even though Lucky is difficult, we love him.

Although ___________________________________
162 Quartet 3
U N I T
B Complete the questionnaire. (10 points)
Q Life Insurance Leisure Questionnaire
1. Full name:___________________________________________
2. Home address:________________________________________
Name three things that you do in your free time:

3. ____________________________________________________
4. ____________________________________________________
5. ____________________________________________________
6. What is your favorite place at home? ______________________
7. Why? _______________________________________________
C Laura and Phil have invited some friends for dinner. They made a
list of the things they have to do for the dinner. Laura has just
come home and wants to know whats happening. Complete the
conversation according to the list. (20 points)
To Do List
Peel potatoes (yet)
Chill drinks (already)
Make fresh orange juice (just)
Buy bread (yet)
Arrange the flowers (already)
Set the table (yet)
Cook fish (already)
Prepare salad (yet)
163 Quartet 3
U N I T
7
Laura: Have you bought bread?
Phil: No, I havent bought bread yet.
(1) ____________________________
Laura: Have you cooked the fish?
Phil: (2)_____________________
Laura: Have you set the table?
Phil: (3)___________________________.
Laura: Have you chilled the drinks?
Phil: (4)________________________
Laura: What about the salad? Have (5)____________________?
Phil: (6)______________________________
Laura: Ive (7)______________________the flowers. Where is the
orange juice? Have you (8)___________________?
Phil: (9)_________________________. Laura, I havent
(10)______________the potatoes yet. Can you peel them?
Laura: No problem. We need to hurry, its getting late.
164 Quartet 3
U N I T
PART 3: LANGUAGE (30 POINTS)

Choose the best response to each question.
1. Hi Claire, how are you?
a. Im fine, thank you, and you?
b. Im ill.
c. Im home, and you?
2. Where have you been?

a. I was at home.
b. Ive been out all day.
c. I am busy.
3. Have you seen Claire?

a. Yes I have.
b. Yes I am.
c. Yes you can.
4. Where have you been working since yesterday?

a. I worked at home.
b. Ive been working at home.
c. Im working at home.
5. What is he going to do about his health condition?

a. Hes never been to a doctor.
b. Hes going to visit the doctor.
c. Hes visiting the doctor.
6. Why dont you get something to eat?

a. But Im not hungry.
b. Because Im not hungry.
c. So Im not hungry.
7. Doctor Prince, what should I do about these headaches?

a. You can drink a lot.
b. You may drink a lot.
c. You should drink a lot.
165 Quartet 3
U N I T
7
8. If I call you at 8:00 pm, will you be home?
a. Yes I am.
b. Yes, you can call.
c. Yes, I will.
9. I dont like working late. Do you?

a. No, I dont like to work.
b. Yes, I like working late.
c. Yes, I like to work.
10. I have been to Paris twice. Have you ever been to Paris?
a. Yes, Ive been there three times.
b. No, Ive never been there twice.
c. No, I am there now.
166 Quartet 3
Appendix

beat beat set set
come came swim swam
cut cut take took
do did tear tore
draw drew tell told
feed fed wear wore
feel felt win won
forget forgot
forgive forgave
get got
give gave
go went
have had
hear heard
hide hid
hit hit
hurt hurt
keep kept
know knew
lay laid
lead led
lean leaned
learn learned
leave left
lend lent
let let
lie lay
light lit
lose lost
167 Quartet 3
Agreeing and disagreeing 12-13

Non-defining relative clauses 104-112
Future
be going to 15-23
can 15-23;116-123
may 15-23;116-123
might 15-23;116-123
Present Progressive 15-23
Present Simple 15-23
should 15-23;116-123
will 15-23;116-123
Gerunds 90-97
Modals
am/am not/is/isnt/are/arent able to (ability/inability) 116-123
can/cant (permission) 116-123
can/cant (ability/inability) 15-23;116-123
could/couldnt (ability/inability) 2-9;116-123
could/couldnt (permission) 116-123
could/couldnt (possibility) 116-123
could/couldnt (requests) 116-123
have to/dont have to (obligation) 116-123
had to/didnt have to (obligation) 2-9;116-123
may/may not (possibility) 15-23;116-123
may/may not (requests) 116-123
may/may not (permission) 116-123
might/might not (possibility) 15-23;116-123
must/mustnt (obligation and strong recommendation) 116-123
should/shouldnt (advice) 15-23;116-123
was/wasnt able to (ability/inability) 2-9;116-123
will/wont (ability/inability) 15-23;116-123
will/wont be able to (ability/inability) 116-123
would/wouldnt (requests) 116-123
Opinions 12-13
Past
could 2-9;116-123
had to 2-9;116-123
Past Passive 2-9
Past Perfect 78-85
Past Progressive 2-9
Past Simple 2-9;66-71
used to 2-9
was able to 2-9;116-123
Present Perfect
and Past Simple 66-71
Progressive 42-49;51
Simple, with adverbials 54-61
Simple, with for and since 28-34
169 Quartet 3

Book

Enviado por

Dados do documento

Direitos autorais

Formatos disponíveis

Compartilhar este documento

Compartilhar ou incorporar documento

Opções de compartilhamento

Você considera este documento útil?

Este conteúdo é inapropriado?

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

Book

Enviado por

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

eTeacher ENGLISH

Online Language Academy

Unit 1 Pages 2-24 Visiting cities Present Simple

Part 1: My Favorite Pages 2-12

Part 2: What a Pages 13-24

Unit 2 Pages 26-51 Verbs describing Present

Part 2: Lets See a Pages 39-51

Unit 3 Pages 54-73 Food and Wh-questions:

Part 2: Always and Pages 64-73

Giving and accepting Casablanca, a Describing what is Writing a travel

Asking and Where in the Role-play: Writing an

Unit 4 Pages 76-100 Health Food Modals for ability:

Unit 5 Pages 102-124 Vacations some, any, much,

Part 2: Were Going to

Unit 6 Pages 126-149 Travel and Past Simple

Part 2: Whats the Pages 138-149

Permission and Facts about Food Role-play: asking Describing unusual

Wanting or promising Year-Round Skiing Deciding on Writing fortune-

Complaining Visit the Land of Planning a Making an

PART 1: MY FAVORITE CITY

Before You Start

A Are these sentences true or false?

2. ______ Selma often swims in the sea.

3. ______ Debbie loves classical music.

4. ______ Pedro doesnt like tests.

5. ______ Jean Paul works very hard.

6. ______ Selma lives in Istanbul.

B Complete the following sentences. Make them true for you.

4. I dont like ____________________.

5. Every day I ___________________.

I, You, We, They study classical music.

He, She, It, Jean Paul likes milk.

We usually add s to the 3rd person (he, she, it) singular.

Do I, you, we, they study music?

Does he, she, it, Selma drink milk every day?

I, You, We, They dont /do not live in Paris.

He, She, It doesnt /does not eat meat.

We use the Present Simple to talk about feelings and thoughts.

A Match the questions in A to the answers in B.

2. ____ Do you know the name of b. Yes, I do. I love French

4. ____ Do you eat Chinese food? d. No, he doesnt. He comes

B Complete these sentences with the correct form of the verbs in

cost go speak work

C Describe the things that you do on a vacation.

always usually often sometimes never

D Compare your answers with your partners answer and prepare a

E Read Jean Pauls weekly schedule.

F Are these sentences true or false?

2. _______ Jean Paul works until 6:00 pm every day.

3. _______ Jean Paul plays basketball on Wednesday.

4. _______ Jean Paul sometimes eats lunch at the Caf Paris.

5. _______ Jean Paul never goes to the health club.

G Complete your own weekly schedule. Then tell your partner

Hours Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday

carpet(s) explain practice

Two Postcards from Istanbul

A Are these sentences true or false?

2. ________ Graciella and Henry sell carpets at the market.

3. ________ There is a museum just for carpets.

4. ________ Graciella and Henry want to buy a carpet.

5. ________ Muhamut speaks five languages.

B Complete the sentences with words from the box.

carpets expensive special

2. There are beautiful _____________________ in Istanbul. Let's get one for